The Endless Web

Fascial Anatomy and Physical Reality

R. Louis Schultz, Ph.D. and Rosemary Feitis, D.O.

Illustrations by Diana Salles
Photographs by Ronald Thompson

North Atlantic Books

Berkeley, California
 Copyright © 1 9 9 6 by R. Louis Schultz and Rosemary
Feitis. All rights reserved. No portion of this book,
except for brief review, may be reproduced, stored in
a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by
any means—electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise—without the written per-
mission of the publisher. For information contact
North Atlantic Books.

Published by
North Atlantic Books
P.O. Box 1 2 3 2 7
Berkeley, California 9 4 7 1 2

Cover drawing of a child by Diana Salles

Cover ard book design by Andrea DuFlon
Printed in Canada

The Endless Web is sponsored by the Society for the

Study of Native Arts and Sciences, a nonprofit edu-
cational corporation whose goals are to develop an
educational and crosscultural perspective linking
various scientific, social, and artistic fields; to nur-
ture a holistic view of arts, sciences, humanities,
and healing; and to publish and distribute literature
on the relationship of mind, body, and nature.

ISBN 13: 9 7 8 - 1 - 5 5 6 4 3 - 2 2 8 - 6

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Schultz, R. Louis (Richard Louis), 1 9 2 7 -
S387e
North Atlantic Books are available through most
bookstores. For further information, visit our web-
site at www.northatlanticbooks.com or call 8 0 0 -
733-3000.
The endless web : fascial anatomy and
physical reality / by R. Louis Schultz and
Rosemary Feitis; illustrations by Diana Salles ;
photographs by Ronald Thompson,
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 1 - 5 5 6 4 3 - 2 2 8 - 3 (paper)
1. Manipulation (Therapeutics) 2. Fascia
(Anatomy). 3. Rolfing. I. Feitis, Rosemary.
II. Title.
[DNLM: 1. Fascia. 2. Manipulation, Orthopedic.
3. Human Body. 4. Holistic Health. WE 5 0 0
1996]
RD736.M25S38 1 9 9 6
615.8'2—dc20
DNLM/DLC
for Library of Congress 96-31550
CIP
8 9 10 11 12 TRANS 12 11 10 09 08
 Dedicated to Ida P. Rolf

A promise fulfilled—with love

 Our thanks go to Sean Hellier
for his computer production on
the manuscript, without which
the physical book would not exist
Contents

Introduction vii

Part I E a r l y D e v e l o p m e n t Pre- a n d P o s t - B i r t h
1 E m b r y o l o g y : I n t r o d u c t i o n to C o n n e c t i v e Tissue 3
2 Early E m b r y o l o g i c a l D e v e l o p m e n t 6

3 Factors in the G r o w t h of t h e E m b r y o 11

4 D e v e l o p m e n t of M e s o d e r m a l Tissues 13
5 E m b r y o n i c L i m i t a t i o n s a n d Early Structural
Organization 15

Part I I C o n n e c t i v e Tissue B o d y
6 T h e Effect of t h e Birth Process 21

7 Developmental Transitions in the N e w b o r n

and Young Child 23

8 Myofascial Structures: T h e Spine as an E x a m p l e

of "Living A n a t o m y " 27
9 M o v e m e n t and Gravity 34
10 Body Contour 40
11 E m o t i o n s a n d t h e Fascial W e b : B o d y Awareness
and Response Patterns 46

Part III Body Retinaculae (Bands/Straps)

12 T h e C h e s t B a n d : Implications for M o v e m e n t
and Behavior 53

13 T h e Inguinal Band and the Structure and Function

of the Vertebral C o l u m n in Relation to t h e Bands 61

14 T h e Eye B a n d a n d C h i n B a n d 68

15 The Collar Band, Umbilical Band, and Groin Band 73

Part I V Anatomy and Function

16 Proprioception: Internal Body Awareness 83

17 Upper Body 85

18 Axial Skeleton 93

19 Pelvis a n d U p p e r Legs 98
20 T h e System of Horizontal a n d Vertical Myofascial
Structures 106
  v i       T H E  E N D L E S S  W E B  

21 Reciprocity of Movement 109 

22 Joints 114 
 
Part V              Practical Application 

23 Doing Bodywork Based on the Connective 
Tissue Concept 119 
Evaluation 119 
First Intervention 120 
How to Go Deeper 123 
How to Touch 124 
How to Make It Last 126 

Illustration Index 127 

Subject Index 129 

About the Authors 131 
Introduction

T h e m u s c l e - b o n e c o n c e p t p r e s e n t e d i n s t a n d a r d a n a t o m i c a l d e s c r i p t i o n gives
a p u r e l y m e c h a n i c a l m o d e l o f m o v e m e n t . I t s e p a r a t e s m o v e m e n t i n t o dis-
crete f u n c t i o n s , failing to give a picture of t h e seamless i n t e g r a t i o n seen in a
living body. W h e n o n e part m o v e s , t h e b o d y as a w h o l e responds. Function-
ally, t h e o n l y t i s s u e t h a t c a n m e d i a t e s u c h r e s p o n s i v e n e s s i s t h e c o n n e c t i v e
tissue. T h i s is t h e heart of t h e c o n c e p t t h a t we are p r o p o s i n g in this b o o k .
Including an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of fascia/connective tissue in t h e evaluation of
m o v e m e n t gives a n m o r e accurate picture o f t h e p h y s i c a l reality o f t h e b o d y .
T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue c o n c e p t w e discuss a c c o u n t s for m u c h o f t h e success
o f R o l f i n g . T h i s i s a c o n c e p t t h a t w a s o r i g i n a l a n d u n i q u e w i t h Dr. R o l f a t t h e
t i m e she was developing her m e t h o d of working with bodies. She started in
t h e late 1 9 3 0 s . A t t h a t t i m e a n d u p i n t o t h e 1 9 5 0 s , received w i s d o m stated
t h a t soft tissue c o u l d n o t h o l d a c h a n g e . M y o f a s c i a per se was n o t e v e n c o n -
sidered as a d e t e r m i n a n t of structure. B o n e - s e t t i n g (osteopathy, c h i r o p r a c t i c )
was t h e o n l y t r e a t m e n t for structure t h a t was t h e n considered effective.
Today, m a n y f o r m s of b o d y w o r k i n c l u d e a soft tissue t e c h n i q u e .
T h i s i s o n e o f t h e t w o i d e a s a b o u t b o d y w o r k t h a t Dr. R o l f e s t a b l i s h e d
t h r o u g h her work. Her o t h e r seminal idea has to do with t h e c o n c e p t of
g r a v i t y a s i t a c t s o n t h e p h y s i c a l b o d y — t h e stress l i n e s t h r o u g h t h e b o d y
t h a t ideally establish a n d reinforce physical structure. This, t o o , is imple-
m e n t e d t h r o u g h t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue c o m p o n e n t . I n fact, t h e centrality o f
c o n n e c t i v e tissue t o Rolfing a n d our a t t e m p t t o u n d e r s t a n d c o n n e c t i v e tissue
has b e e n t h e impetus for this b o o k .
T h e way bodies c h a n g e during Rolfing is n o t satisfactorily explained by
any of the usual descriptions of physical m a k e u p . Traditional a n a t o m i c a l
attitudes a b o u t c o n n e c t i v e tissue do n o t give us a living picture of t h e
d y n a m i c s i n v o l v e d i n t h e c h a n g e s w e see i n o u r w o r k . W h a t h a s i n t e r e s t e d
us is t h e body's apparently great capacity for structural c h a n g e at a n y age.
W e are c o n f r o n t e d d a i l y w i t h v e r y w i d e d e v i a t i o n s f r o m s t a n d a r d a n a t o m i c a l
description in people w h o function perfectly well. People look very different
e v e n t h o u g h t h e y are m a d e o f t h e s a m e c o m p o n e n t p a r t s . W e h a v e c o m e t o
the working hypothesis that this variability is a function of certain properties
o f t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e b e s t i l l u s t r a t e d b y its d e v e l o p m e n t f r o m e m b r y o n i c
m e s o d e r m i n t o m a t u r e tissue. Our ideas a n d c o n c e p t s h a v e c o m e directly out
of our experience as Rolfers—a c o m b i n e d total of m o r e t h a n forty-five years.
P e o p l e t e n d t o a p p r o v e a n d d i s a p p r o v e o f t h e i r b o d i e s p i e c e m e a l . It's r a r e
f o r t h e m t o l o o k a t t h e m s e l v e s a n d s a y t h e y ' r e all b a d o r all g o o d . R a t h e r , it's
" M y b e l l y sticks o u t , " " I ' v e a l w a y s h a d k n o c k k n e e s , " " M y l e f t f o o t i s b i g g e r
t h a n m y right f o o t . " O n t h o s e o c c a s i o n s w h e n t h e y are feeling g o o d a b o u t
t h e m s e l v e s , t h e y l i k e t h e s h a p e o f t h e i r h e a d o r t h e set o f t h e i r s h o u l d e r s .
W o m e n s a y t h e y l o o k g o o d i n t h o s e s h o e s , w h i l e m e n say, " T h a t c u t o f
jacket brings out t h e best in my shoulders."
viii THE ENDLESS WEB

N o t o n l y d o t h e y see t h e m s e l v e s t h i s way, t h e y a l s o h a v e t h e s a m e i m p r e s -
s i o n o f o t h e r s . F o r m a n y , c e r t a i n p a r t s o f t h e b o d y are m o r e a t t r a c t i v e : " I ' m
a l e g m a n , " o r " I like m e n w i t h b i g s h o u l d e r s . " I n o u r n a t i o n a l c u l t u r e , i t
s e e m s t o b e a c c e p t e d t h a t o n e ' s business, e c o n o m i c , social, a n d sexual suc-
c e s s e s a r e less i f o n e i s f a t . A m a n fears t h a t i f h i s p e l v i s m o v e s w h e n w a l k -
i n g , r u n n i n g , o r o t h e r k i n d s o f m o v e m e n t , t h e w h o l e w o r l d will q u e s t i o n h i s
s e x u a l p r e f e r e n c e s . A w o m a n ' s b r o a d s h o u l d e r s a r e t a k e n a s a s i g n o f aggres-
sion and masculinity.
M o s t of i n n e r - b o d y awareness is also piecemeal, a n d generally negative:
" I h a v e a n upset s t o m a c h , " " M y k n e e h u r t s , " " M y n e c k i s stiff," " M y n o s e i s
stuffed." M o r e t h a n likely this is a carry-over f r o m t h e Puritan n o t i o n that it
is u n s e e m l y to speak well of oneself. W h e n I brag, I am c o n c e i t e d , w h i c h is
b a d . T h i s g e t s i n t e r n a l i z e d s o t h a t w h e n I feel g o o d a b o u t m y s e l f , g o o d a b o u t
my body, I e n d up feeling guilty.
E v e n w h e n t h e a i m i s t o i m p r o v e t h e p h y s i c a l self, t h e f o c u s i s o n o n e
t h i n g a t a t i m e . A m a n w i l l d o p u s h - u p s a n d lift w e i g h t s t o b r o a d e n h i s
s h o u l d e r s ; a w o m a n w i l l d o l e g lifts t o s l i m d o w n h e r legs a n d h i p s . Yet
t h o s e h i p s o r t h o s e s h o u l d e r s a r e a n e x p r e s s i o n o f e v e r y t h i n g else i n t h a t
b o d y . T h e y ' r e t h e r e s u l t n o t o n l y o f its s t r u c t u r e , b u t a l s o a n d r e c i p r o c a l l y
of h o w e v e r y t h i n g else in t h a t b o d y is used.
This kind of connectedness is easy to understand in impact injuries.
W h e n I s t u b m y t o e , t h e i n j u r y r e s o n a t e s t h r o u g h m y w h o l e b o d y , all t h e
way to my head, whether I notice it or not. The pain in the toe makes me
n o t w a n t t o s t a n d o n it, a n d m y w h o l e b o d y s h i f t s i n o r d e r t o a v o i d f e e l i n g
w e i g h t o n t h e p a i n f u l p a r t . I w a l k l i g h t l y o n t h e side t h a t h u r t s , m o r e h e a v -
ily o n t h e side t h a t d o e s n ' t . I f I ' m n o t a w a r e o f d o i n g t h i s , m y t e n d e n c y i s
t o k e e p t h e s h i f t i n w e i g h t t o o n e side l o n g a f t e r t h e t o e i s n o l o n g e r p a i n f u l .
T h e p a i n f u l side h a s c o n t r a c t e d a w a y f r o m t h e s o u r c e o f p a i n a n d i s s h o r t -
e n e d . This is especially true if t h e toe was b r o k e n , a n d t h e pain has persisted
for a l o n g t i m e . T h e c o m p e n s a t i o n (shortening a n d deviation) b e c o m e s a
p e r m a n e n t part of structure.
A n e v e n m o r e o b v i o u s e x a m p l e i s a b r o k e n a r m o r leg. E v e n a f t e r t h e
cast is r e m o v e d , there is t h e physical habit of allowing for t h e weight a n d
bulkiness of t h e cast, as well as t h e fear of o n c e again freely using t h e part
that was b r o k e n . People t e n d to carry an arm that was o n c e broken half
b e n t , as t h o u g h it w e r e still in a s l i n g or a c a s t .
T h e s e are straightforward responses to straightforward injuries. Our bodies
t e n d t o r e c o r d o u r r e s p o n s e s t o t h e e v e n t s i n o u r life like a c a l c u l a t o r w i t h a
m e m o r y . In our living tissue, t h e record b e c o m e s fixed w i t h c o n s t a n t replay-
ing. Like an orchestra, e a c h part relates to t h e o t h e r segments. In an orches-
tra w h o s e m e m b e r s h a v e m a n y y e a r s o f e x p e r i e n c e p l a y i n g t o g e t h e r , i f o n e
s e c t i o n g o e s o f f k e y o r p l a y s o f f t e m p o , t h e rest o f t h e o r c h e s t r a a t t e m p t s t o
compensate and blend in.
I n t h e h u m a n b o d y , c o m p e n s a t i o n i s life s u p p o r t i v e . I f I w e r e t o g i v e
in c o m p l e t e l y to a b r o k e n leg or a w h i p l a s h e d n e c k , I w o u l d be in bed. I
 INTRODUCTION ix

wouldn't be able to function. T h e body's t e n d e n c y is to go toward as m u c h

balance in a n y given m o m e n t as it c a n find, giving us m a x i m u m operational
support for t h a t m o m e n t . T h e p r o b l e m occurs w h e n w e keep t h e c o m p e n s a -
t i o n after t h e i n j u r y h a s h e a l e d . O n e o f t h e m o s t c o m m o n e x a m p l e s o f this
is the t e n d e n c y to keep birth trauma as a part of one's physical m a k e u p .
W h a t has fascinated us as Rolfers in our w o r k w i t h clients a n d in our
experiences of our o w n bodies is the m e c h a n i s m of this record. How a n d
w h e r e d o w e k e e p t h i s m e m o r y o f o l d i n j u r y ? Ida R o l f ' s a n s w e r w a s t o e x a m -
ine a system of the b o d y that has b e e n neglected, b o t h by scientists and by
medically oriented practitioners: t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue or m y o f a s c i a . To use
t h e orchestra analogy, t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue is t h e score on w h i c h t h e n o t e s
are w r i t t e n ; b o n e , m u s c l e , a n d o r g a n s y s t e m s a r e t h e i n s t r u m e n t s . T h e c o n -
nective tissue is t h e record; it is an i n f o r m a t i o n b a n k for t h e body.
Visualize a n e t curtain or a h a m m o c k . W h e n a h o o k pulls on o n e part of
that web, the resulting distortion influences every part of t h e system to s o m e
d e g r e e . A s w e l o o k a t c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e , its h i g h l y s t r u c t u r e d d i r e c t i o n a l o r i -
e n t a t i o n is suggestive of this k i n d of i n f o r m a t i o n system. By tracing c o n n e c -
t i v e tissue's o r i g i n , f u n c t i o n , a n d a p p e a r a n c e i n t h e b o d y , t h i s b o o k s h o w s
h o w myofascia creates an informational w h o l e of t h e living organism. It is
t h e u n i f y i n g factor i n t h e m o v e m e n t system w e call t h e body. T h i c k e n i n g ,
snagging, or h o l d i n g in a n y part of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue w e b results in a
g e n e r a l h e a v i n e s s o f m o v e m e n t . W h a t a t first i s a w a y t o p r o t e c t a p a r t o f
t h e b o d y (particularly a part t h a t hurts) e v e n t u a l l y results in a loss of fluidity
throughout the entire body.
P e r h a p s t h e b e s t i m a g e o f f l u i d i t y i s a t i g e r o n its w a y t h r o u g h t h e f o r e s t ,
n o t m a k i n g a s o u n d a s i t m o v e s a c r o s s l e a v e s a n d t w i g s a n d p a s t b u s h e s . Its
" k n e e b o n e i s c o n n e c t e d t o its . . . a r m b o n e " w i t h o u t r e s t r i c t i o n , a l l o w i n g a
s p r i n g - l i k e a c t i o n a m o n g all p a r t s o f its b o d y . O u r d r e a m i s t o h a v e all o f u s
m o v i n g surefootedly t h r o u g h our f o r e s t s — b e t h e y o f w o o d , o f steel a n d c o n -
crete, or of h u m a n i t y .
 PART ONE

Early Development
Pre- and Post-Birth
ONE
Embryology
Introduction to Connective Tissue
T h e b a s i s f o r all b o d y f o r m i s e m b r y o l o g y . I n
understanding embryology, we understand
h o w the adult structure c a m e to be. Embryol-
ogy doesn't stop at birth; we have that p o t e n -
tial f o r c h a n g e all a l o n g . I n a s e n s e , w e a r e
embryos throughout our lifetime. T h e aging
process is also a part of t h e e m b r y o l o g i c a l
process. D e a t h is a n o r m a l part of develop-
m e n t . D e g e n e r a t i o n is a n o r m a l part of t h e
life c y c l e o f t i s s u e , w h i c h g r o w s a n d d i e s f r o m
t h e early m o n t h s o f prenatal life.
To the embryologist, the term " e m b r y o "
i s a p p l i e d t o d e v e l o p m e n t t h r o u g h t h e first
t r i m e s t e r o f p r e g n a n c y . L a t e r s t a g e s are
t e r m e d "fetal d e v e l o p m e n t . " We are generaliz-
ing the term, using embryological in a m u c h
broader sense, as a time w h e n things develop
a n d d i f f e r e n t i a t e . All t i s s u e g o e s t h r o u g h t h i s
state, b o n e s as well as soft tissue. In general,
t h i s stage m a r k s t h e o r i g i n o f p o t e n t i a l
organs. Undifferentiated cells develop i n t o
p o t e n t i a l liver, p o t e n t i a l b o n e , p o t e n t i a l s k i n .
T h e b o d y is always at p o t e n t i a l — t o c h a n g e ,
a n d for n e w t h i n g s t o d e v e l o p .
Birth is a c h a n g e in e n v i r o n m e n t , o n e of
m a n y t h a t occurs t h r o u g h o u t life. W e k n o w
t h a t cells t u r n o v e r w i t h i n o r g a n s — t h a t is,
t h e y live, d i e , r e g e n e r a t e . T h i s i s t r u e o f
every organ except the brain, a n d even that
is b e g i n n i n g to be questioned. E a c h cell has
a finite lifetime, n o r m a l l y considered seven
years. W i t h i n seven years, every cell in an
o r g a n dies a n d i s r e p l a c e d . T h e o r e t i c a l l y t h a t
m e a n s t h e r e i s a p o t e n t i a l i n t h e s e cells t o
regenerate in a different direction. This m a y
b e w h a t h a p p e n s i n a g i n g . I n o u r v i e w , all
c h a n g e i s t h e first s t e p i n n e w p o s s i b i l i t i e s .
This is what we m e a n by developmental
anatomy.
A b o n e c a n b e r e m o d e l e d t h r o u g h o u t life
a s t h e r e l a t i v e stresses o n i t c h a n g e . T h i s i s
h o w braces work on the jaw (now being used
f o r all a g e s ) : c o n s t a n t p r e s s u r e c r e a t e s s o m e
change in the b o n e formation and, thereby,
in the c o n t o u r of t h e upper a n d lower jaw-
b o n e s . Research has b e e n published w h i c h
describes t h e results of c h a n g i n g a n d increas-
ing t h e pressure on o n e e n d of a b o n e . T h e
b u m p s o n b o n e s are p l a c e s w h e r e m u s c l e t e n -
d o n s a t t a c h . T h e b u m p s are t h e r e f o r e regions
of localized rapid g r o w t h of b o n e as a result of
prolonged tension on that spot. If tension is
applied to a different area, t h e n e w area is
stimulated to create an increased a m o u n t of
b o n e , a n o t h e r b u m p . W h a t t h e n appears t o
h a p p e n i s t h a t o n t h e o t h e r side o f t h e b o n e
there is s o m e localized resorption of b o n e ,
resulting in an i n d e n t a t i o n . It seems that a
certain v o l u m e of b o n e is needed in the body;
its c o n f i g u r a t i o n a d a p t s t o c h a n g i n g stresses
over time. This m e a n s that if we hold our-
selves i n a b e n t p o s i t i o n , b o n e u l t i m a t e l y
a c c o m m o d a t e s its s h a p e t o t h a t p o s i t i o n .
U n d e r p r o l o n g e d stress t h e b o n e c a n g e t a
different configuration, a slightly different
curving. T h e s e c h a n g e s are slight, b u t if t h e y
were plotted over time they would neverthe-
less p r o b a b l y b e m e a s u r a b l e . W e all see p e o p l e
b e c o m e m o r e b e n t with age. T h e b o n e has
c h a n g e d its c o n f i g u r a t i o n . I t d o e s n ' t h a p p e n
i n o n e m o n t h o r six; i t takes place over m a n y
years.
C o n n e c t i v e tissue literally c o n n e c t s a n d
supports. It forms t h e structure of t h e body.
This is a new concept. We tend to think of
structure in terms of muscle a n d b o n e . But in
fact, structure is t h e result of t h e o r g a n i z a t i o n
o f m u s c l e a n d b o n e . C o n n e c t i v e tissue, i n
4 THE ENDLESS WEB
response to m o v e m e n t , is the organizing
factor. M u s c l e tissue is e n f o l d e d w i t h i n t h e
fascia; t h e c o m b i n a t i o n is called myofascia.
Movement is the outcome of embedded mus-
cle tissue a c t i o n o n t h e surrounding c o n n e c -
t i v e t i s s u e . (Fig. 1-1). S t r u c t u r e is t h u s t h e
result o f m o v e m e n t , t h e characteristic m u s c l e
a c t i o n on t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d as a
w h o l e . C o n n e c t i v e tissue (myofascia) defines
t h e b o d y c o n t o u r a n d is t h e organ of structure
a n d m o v e m e n t (as I d a R o l f c a l l e d it) i n t h e
body.
Epimysium
Perimysium'
Endomysiunr
Figure 1-1
This cross section of the arm shows the way in
which muscle tissue is embedded within its con-
nective tissue wrapping.
C o n n e c t i v e tissue supports t h e organ,
nerve, and vascular systems. It makes up
a high proportion of body mass, reaching
t h r o u g h all b o d y e l e m e n t s like a s u p p o r t i v e
n e t or spider w e b . This is a g o o d i m a g e
because it is organized but irregular—the
fibers o f a s p i d e r w e b are a l s o n o t i n a c o m -
pletely regular p a t t e r n . A spider w e b d e p e n d s
o n its s u p p o r t — t w i g s o r t h e w i n d o w l e d g e it's
s p u n a r o u n d — f o r its s h a p e . S i m i l a r l y , m y o f a s -
cia is adaptive.
M o s t of t h e forces acting on a b o d y are
f r o m t h e o u t s i d e . B u t f o r c e s a l s o arise f r o m
inside, in the interconnections within the
b o d y . I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n s are m a i n t a i n e d w i t h
m o v e m e n t or inhibited with lack of m o v e -
m e n t . M a n y people m o v e o n l y a part of their
b a c k s w h e n t h e y walk, for e x a m p l e . As a
r e s u l t , c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e i n t h e b a c k l o s e s its
e l a s t i c , s p i d e r w e b q u a l i t y a n d i s m u c h less
adaptable or movable. Perpetuating this
i m m o b i l i t y , c o n n e c t i v e tissue t h i c k e n s a n d
hardens.
T h e r e is research s h o w i n g t h a t pressure or
t e n s i o n o r f r i c t i o n a p p l i e d i n o n e area o f t h e
e m b r y o r e s u l t s i n i n c r e a s e d s e c r e t i o n o f fibers
b y t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e cells a t t h e s t i m u -
l a t e d p l a c e . T h e s e fibers t e n d t o a r r a n g e t h e m -
selves a l o n g t h e line of t h e pull or friction or
t e n s i o n . T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue t h e n c h a n g e s
from a lacelike elasticity to s o m e t h i n g m o r e
d e n s e . If a fly g e t s c a u g h t in a s p i d e r w e b ,
there's a snag, a t i g h t e n i n g of t h e w e b in
 EMBRYOLOGY 5

that area. Everything is pulled toward t h a t

s n a g , p a r t i c u l a r l y a s t h e fly m o v e s a r o u n d .
Similarly, i f t h e r e ' s a s n a g i n t h e m y o f a s c i a l
w e b , i t t e n d s t o g r a b — c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e fibers
concentrate there.
W e h a v e said t h a t e v e r y t h i n g i n t h e b o d y
• B
is supported by c o n n e c t i v e tissue. W i t h i n
t h a t tissue i s a r i c h n e t w o r k o f c a p i l l a r y b e d s .
W h e n an area is compressed, t h e b l o o d sup-
p l y t o t h a t area i s a l s o c o m p r e s s e d a n d t h u s
impeded. This t h e n affects t h e physical state
of the intercellular matrix, with far-reaching
results o n p a r t i c u l a r stages o f d e v e l o p m e n t .
C o n n e c t i v e tissue is alive in t h e sense t h a t
it responds to stimulus. It has certain physical
laws t h a t i t lives b y . T h e r e a r e c h e m i c a l l a w s
a s well, b u t t h e p h y s i c a l o n e s a r e m o r e r e a d i l y
a p p a r e n t . A g i v e n s i t u a t i o n a l w a y s g i v e s rise
C D
to a specific reaction. C o n n e c t i v e tissue cells
(fibroblasts) b u i l d a n d s e c r e t e f i b e r s . U n d e r
a certain kind of stimulus, s u c h as pressure,
this process can be speeded up. This is n o t Figure 1-2
This schematic shows an idealized sequence of
unusual; it is t h e n o r m a l way for a t e n d o n or
normal development of tendon from early gesta-
ligament to grow and take shape before birth.
tion to just before the baby is born. The process
As t h e e m b r y o gets bigger, t h e b o n e s get big- continues throughout life.
ger. I n g r o w i n g , t h e b o n e p u s h e s o u t , c r e a t i n g
a directional pressure in t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue (A) Early undifferentiated connective tissue near
bed between t h e two growing heads (ends) of early newly differentiated bone.

t h e b o n e (Fig. 1-2). T h i s i s t h e n o r m a l f o r m a -
tion of ligaments and (where there is muscle
tissue) o f t e n d o n s . T h e d i r e c t i o n o f t h e liga-
m e n t or t e n d o n is determined by t h e direc-
tional pull. T h e pattern of m u s c l e a n d t e n d o n
a n d l i g a m e n t i s e s t a b l i s h e d v e r y early, i n t h e
first c o u p l e o f m o n t h s o f g e s t a t i o n . I n t h e
later m o n t h s , s t r u c t u r e s b e c o m e m o r e e l a b -
o r a t e , m o r e set, a n d larger.
(B) The growth of the bone exerts a directional
pull within the connective tissue bed.
(C) Beginning of a more recognizable tendon
shape; note that potential muscle tissue is devel-
oping within the tendonous bed.
(D) Fully formed tendon with muscle developing
along the line of connective tissue tension
between the two bones.
TWO
Early Embryological Development

It's a b i g j u m p f r o m t h e first g e r m c e l l t o t h e Extraembryonic,

mesoderm
f o r m a t i o n o f g e r m l a y e r s t h a t a r e t h e first
r e c o g n i z a b l e f o r m o f t h e e m b r y o . T h e r e are
Amnion
t h r e e g e r m layers: Embryonic,,
Ectoderm
disc Endoderm*
• t h e e c t o d e r m g i v e s rise t o t h e b r a i n a n d
nervous system a n d t h e superficial epi-
Primitive
dermis (skin) yolk sac

• t h e e n d o d e r m g i v e s rise t o t h e d i g e s t i v e
system a n d t h e digestive glands
• t h e m e s o d e r m g i v e s rise t o m u s c l e , b o n e ,
Second week
blood, the urogenital system, and con- of pregnancy

nective tissue in general Head

By about the end of the second week of

pregnancy, t h e cell has b e c o m e a disk t h a t is
s u r r o u n d e d b y c a v i t i e s filled w i t h f l u i d . T h e
e m b r y o grows b y t h e m u l t i p l i c a t i o n o f cells,
w h i c h organize i n t o layers at a b o u t t h e sec-
Amnion-
o n d week. T h e disk has a t o p layer (ectoderm)
a n d a b o t t o m layer ( e n d o d e r m ) . Direction in Tail

the e m b r y o is established at the beginning of

Ectoderm Primitive
a b o u t t h e t h i r d w e e k (Fig. 2-1), w h e n a n a r e a streak
Endoderm-
o f m o r e rapid cell f o r m a t i o n develops i n o n e
p a r t o f t h e disk. Primitive^
yolk sac
At the beginning of the third week, the
e m b r y o i s a b o u t t h e size o f t h e t i p o f a p e n c i l
p o i n t . T h e area of greater proliferation is Early third week
of pregnancy
approximately a quarter of the total surface
area. It rapidly c o n d e n s e s i n t o a line w h i c h is
called t h e p r i m i t i v e streak. T h i s is t h e tail e n d
of the embryo; it eventually becomes the anal Nolochord

region. W h e n t h e primitive streak is estab- Primitive

-"streak
lished, t h e m i d d l e layer ( m e s o d e r m ) begins to
develop. T h e process of growth in the embryo Mesoderm

Figure 2-1 Ectodernr

A three-dimensional view of the embryo at the Endodemv

beginning of the third week of pregnancy, show-

ing the initial differentiation of ectoderm and
endoderm and the first indication of directionality,
as well as the notochord, which marks the location
Late third week
of the future spine. of pregnancy
 EMBRYOLOGY 7

n o w b e c o m e s twofold: cell m u l t i p l i c a t i o n b y
division o f existing cells, a n d t h e g e n e r a t i o n
o f n e w cells f r o m t h e primitive streak.
T h e e m b r y o at this stage is r o u g h l y oval
and b e c o m i n g m o r e elongated as it grows.
Having established top and b o t t o m (ectoderm
a n d e n d o d e r m ) as well as a tail (primitive
streak) a n d t h e r e f o r e a h e a d f o r o u r e m b r y o ,
w e c a n n o w k n o w w h i c h a r e its r i g h t a n d l e f t
sides. C e l l s p r o l i f e r a t i n g f r o m t h e p r i m i t i v e
streak are e n l a r g i n g a n d e l o n g a t i n g t h e disk.
Cells i m m e d i a t e l y in front of t h e source (the
p r i m i t i v e s t r e a k ) d e v e l o p i n t o t h e rest o f t h e
body.
Logically, we w o u l d e x p e c t t h a t either
everything is established at the same time in
t h e e m b r y o and grows bigger and m o r e c o m -
p l e x ; or, s i n c e e v e r y t h i n g g r o w s f r o m t h e
p r i m i t i v e s t r e a k ( t a i l ) , t h i s e n d d e v e l o p s first
(initially tail, t h e n t h e pelvis, t h e n chest,
neck, a n d finally t h e head). In fact, neither
is the case. Nature doesn't share our sense of
logic.
T h e primitive streak r e m a i n s primitive
(undifferentiated). T h e n e w cells created f r o m
the primitive streak b e c o m e t h e h e a d a n d
t h e n t h e rest o f t h e b o d y f r o m t h e t o p d o w n .
T h e head is gradually pushed away from t h e
s o u r c e a s t h e rest o f t h e b o d y g r o w s b e t w e e n .
T h e top e n d is pushed farther a n d farther
away from the source.
M u l t i p l i c a t i o n o f cells i s t a k i n g p l a c e
throughout the embryo, not only at the
source, a l t h o u g h t h e greatest generation is
there. The embryo is growing geometrically:
lengthwise, sideways, a n d internally. T h e
s h a p e c h a n g e s f r o m a disk i n t o a r o u n d ,
body-like s h a p e . T h e circular disk was like
a slab of "silly p u t t y " t h a t got pulled l e n g t h -

Figure 2-2
This cross section sequence illustrates stages of
development during the third and early fourth
week of gestation, showing the changes from
early germ layer pattern to recognizable
structures.
8 THE ENDLESS WEB

wise. As longitudinal pressure increases, t h e t h e oldest part of t h e digestive system is t h e

edges b e g i n to curve inward, closing to f o r m
a m o r e t u b u l a r s h a p e (Figs. 2-2, 2-3). T h e
o u t s i d e ( w h i c h w a s t h e t o p o f t h e disk) i s t h e
ectoderm. T h e inside (originally t h e b o t t o m
o f t h e disk) i s t h e e n d o d e r m . T h e m e s o d e r m
is t h e filling b e t w e e n t h e s e t w o layers.
T h e p r i m i t i v e s t r e a k i s t h e first " s t r u c t u r e "
differentiated from the general mass of the
primitive e m b r y o . It later b e c o m e s the anal
region, so t h a t we m a y say t h a t this r e g i o n is
t h e " o l d e s t " part o f t h e body. After t h e anus,
m o u t h . T h e b a c k o f t h e m o u t h i s older t h a n
t h e esophagus, the s t o m a c h is older t h a n the
small intestine, and so forth. T h e sigmoid
c o l o n just in front of t h e anus is the " n e w e s t "
part of t h e body.
At birth, t h e m o s t differentiated part of t h e
e m b r y o i s t h e h e a d . T h e least differentiated
(the least m a t u r e ) is t h e pelvis. Differentiation
o c c u r s w h e n cells h a v e b e e n i n o n e l o c a t i o n
long enough to have multiplied and elabo-
rated. T h e primitive local structures mature.
E n d o d e r m a l cells m u l t i p l y a n d d i f f e r e n t i a t e
i n t o specifically e n d o d e r m a l structures; ecto-

Ectoderm-
Primitive
streak
d e r m a l cells i n t o t h e v a r i o u s e c t o d e r m a l struc-
t u r e s , a n d s o f o r t h . E v e n t u a l l y , cells b e c o m e
s p e c i f i c — a m u s c l e c e l l , a liver c e l l , a b r a i n
Endoderm^ Notochord'"
cell.
Tail
A t t h e e a r l i e s t stages o f e m b r y o n i c d e v e l o p -
m e n t , a c e l l in a g i v e n p o s i t i o n h a s a n u m b e r
of potentialities. A cell s o m e w h e r e in t h e
h e a d , for e x a m p l e , w h e n it divides i n t o two,
m a y b e d i v i d i n g i n t o t h e l e f t a n d r i g h t sides
of t h e head. W h e n these in turn divide, t h e y
m a y b e c o m e structures in front a n d back. As
Heart,
primordium cells c o n t i n u e t o d i v i d e , t h e y split t h e i r
potentiality, b e c o m i n g more and more
focused toward a purpose.
E a c h c e l l c r e a t e s its o w n s p e c i f i c e n v i r o n -
m e n t w i t h i n t h e g e n e r a l m a t r i x . T h e r e are
structural a n d c h e m i c a l changes within the
cell as it zeros in on b e c o m i n g o n e t h i n g ,
o n e o r g a n . T h e s u r r o u n d i n g cells m a k e u p t h e
Heade
fold
e n v i r o n m e n t o f t h a t o r g a n , c o n t r i b u t i n g t o its
s t r u c t u r e , its s h a p e . I f t h e c e n t r a l c e l l i s p u t i n
Heart, a n o t h e r part of t h e b o d y early e n o u g h , it c a n
primordium' Tail
-•fold b e c o m e a d i f f e r e n t o r g a n . Yet a t s o m e p o i n t
i n t i m e , its e n v i r o n m e n t h a s s h a p e d i t suffi-
c i e n t l y t h a t i t c a n b e c o m e o n l y itself.
F o r e x a m p l e , p o t e n t i a l liver at first is j u s t a
Figure 2-3
l i t t l e t u b e w h o s e cells are s e p a r a t i n g f r o m t h e
This mid-sagittal (lengthwise) sequence shows the
rest o f t h e g u t . A s l o n g a s t h e s e cells stay
folding of the body during the third week of ges-
tation. The same structures are present as in Fig- i n s i d e t h e t u b e , t h i s e n v i r o n m e n t will d e t e r -
ure 2-2. m i n e t h a t t h e y b e c o m e liver. I f o n e c o u l d
 EMBRYOLOGY 9

dissect a w a y o n e o f t h o s e cells a n d p u t i t i n a integrity of the growing vertebral c o l u m n .

nearby e n v i r o n m e n t , it could b e c o m e a pan- T h e resulting c o m p l e x i t y o f pulls a l o n g a n d
creas. As described in m a n y standard e m b r y - b e t w e e n t h e d e v e l o p i n g b o n e s results i n t h e
ology texts, it has b e e n s h o w n that potential differentiated ligaments that c o n n e c t the
pancreas does n o t differentiate into mature bones (Fig. 2-4).
p a n c r e a s cells u n l e s s it is in a s p e c i f i c m e s o - In a d d i t i o n to a grid-like support f r o m
dermal e n v i r o n m e n t (potential fascia). Rela- b o n e , t e n d o n , a n d l i g a m e n t , t h e b o d y gets a
t i o n s h i p to t h e surrounding fascial tissue is "packing material" support from connective
i m p o r t a n t ; i t m a y b e t h e s p e c i f i c e n e r g y field t i s s u e . Fat is a p a r t of t h i s m a t e r i a l . It is
that makes t h e difference for this tissue. a n o t h e r kind of c o n n e c t i v e tissue. D e p e n d i n g
About the end of the fourth week, the o n its d e n s i t y , i t a c t s t o c u s h i o n , p r o t e c t , a n d
embryo has developed primitive arms and pad the b o d y or to provide support a n d spac-
legs as w e l l as a p r i m i t i v e b r a i n , p r i m i t i v e i n g w h e r e it's m o r e d e n s e . I n a d i p o s e (fat)
spinal c o l u m n , a n d t h e b e g i n n i n g s of verte- tissue, cells enlarge by a c c u m u l a t i n g droplets
brae to protect t h e central nervous system. o f i n t r a c e l l u l a r fat; fibers a n d m a t r i x a r e
I t i s n o w s h a p e d like a t u b e a n d i s g e t t i n g p u s h e d aside by t h e engorged cells. This tissue
bigger, p a r t i c u l a r l y a t t h e h e a d e n d . Its s h a p e is i m p o r t a n t in t h e spatial a r r a n g e m e n t of
i s t h e result b o t h o f s e l f - p r o l i f e r a t i o n a n d o f structures. Fat is o n e of t h e body's ways of
t h e s p a c e r e s t r i c t i o n s a s d e t e r m i n e d b y its i m m o b i l i z i n g or wedging an area.
outside e n v i r o n m e n t .
A r o u n d all o f t h e s e p r i m i t i v e s t r u c t u r e s
p r i m i t i v e cells are p r o l i f e r a t i n g i n t o " f i l l e r . "
T h i s filler i s m e s o d e r m a l t i s s u e — p r i m i t i v e
fascia m a d e u p o f c e l l s , fibers, a n d i n t e r c e l l -
ular m a t r i x . Its t e x t u r e i s like glass w o o l o r
a n g e l hair, t h e k i n d o f s t r i n g y , fluffy s t u f f
t h a t sticks t o y o u r f i n g e r s . T h e m a t r i x i s s t i c k y A B
a n d s o m e w h a t like J e l l - O i n t e x t u r e . I n m o s t
p l a c e s i n t h e b o d y , i t stays s o f t u n t i l b i r t h .
In o t h e r places, pressures a n d t e n s i o n s , b o t h
internal and external, cause it to respond by
getting hard and directional—ligaments and
t e n d o n s begin to form. Hardness a n d direc-
t i o n o f fiber are t h e n o r m a l f a c t o r s c r e a t i n g
structure in c o n n e c t i v e tissue.
I n t h e places w h e r e b o n e will f o r m , t h e
soft m a t r i x b e c o m e s m o r e rigid, e s t a b l i s h i n g
a directional pull. This internal tension,
together with external pressures f r o m t h e D
C
c o n f i n i n g walls of t h e uterus, stimulates cells
locally to increase p r o d u c t i o n of fibers. An
e x a m p l e is p r e v e r t e b r a l c a r t i l a g e . As it g r o w s ,
its p u s h i n t o t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e b e d c r e a t e s Figure 2-4
a stress l i n e , o r g a n i z i n g a n d m a i n t a i n i n g t h e Tendon/ligament formation.
1 0       T H E  E N D L E S S W E B  

As the head fold grows, the endoderm layer (inner  considerable amount of fat. This fat is an important part of 
lining) grows within the ectoderm (outer lining).  the environment of the large intestine, particularly of that 
Mesenchyme (the primitive mesoderm or middle layer) fills  part which runs across the abdomen, connecting to the 
the space between them. As the head fold begins, the back  backbone in the area of the lowest attachments of the 
of the mouth begins to take shape out of the endoderm. As  diaphragm. Thus the inner organs and their ʺpacking 
folding continues, more and more endoderm is brought  materialʺ affect overall body ease and mobility. Emptying 
into an internal lining, forming esophagus, stomach, and  the digestive tract, for example, can have a dramatic effect 
eventually the curvature of the stomach, the coiling of the  on posture. If the transverse colon is filled with fecal 
small intestine, and so forth.  material, it is necessarily restricted in mobility. This 
Fully developed endodermal tissue is held in position  compresses the back part of the diaphragm and related 
inside the body by a thin, filmy layer of connective tissue. It  spinal junctions. For the most part, however, healthy 
is like a spider web that holds structures in place, like thin  endodermal tissue can and does adapt freely to other body 
guy wires. Endoderm structures do influence the  structures. 
conformation (shape and relationship) of bony structure.  Cells start out with the potential to become anything. 
The large intestine, for example, is almost literally glued to  Gradually they become more specialized, developing into 
the back part of the abdominal cavity, where it forms a  specific parts of the embryo as it grows. 
heavy fascial connection that includes a 
 
THREE
Factors in the Growth of the Embryo
This overview of early embryological develop-
m e n t has b e e n necessarily sketchy a n d gen-
eral. H o w e v e r , it p r o v i d e s a f r a m e w o r k f o r
discussion of embryological concepts as t h e y
predispose a n d influence t h e shape a n d char-
acteristic m o v e m e n t of t h e individual.
D e s c r i p t i v e e m b r y o l o g y tells o n l y p a r t o f t h e
story. It is a h i s t o r y of g e n e r a l p a t t e r n s of
growth. Minor variations in this developmen-
tal p a t t e r n a l l o w p r e d i c t i o n o f t h e i n d i v i d u a l ' s
future structure a n d behavior.
T h e r e are s h i f t s i n t h e i m p o r t a n c e o f o n e
factor over a n o t h e r as t h e e m b r y o grows. At
o n e p o i n t , t h e size l i m i t a t i o n s o f t h e w o m b
may be the most important. At another time,
internal growth and differentiation m a y
take precedence. As described in Section 1,
a c h a n g e i n t h e d i r e c t i o n a l stress i n t h e m e s -
e n c h y m e m o d i f i e s t h e o r g a n i z a t i o n o f sur-
r o u n d i n g tissue. Every g r o w t h stage t h u s
creates n e w d e m a n d s a n d challenges i n t h e
internal environment of the embryo. In gen-
eral, t h e r e s p o n s e is a g r e a t e r d e g r e e of s p e -
cialization of function.
The external environment becomes
increasingly i m p o r t a n t as t h e e m b r y o gets
larger. W i t h i n t h e w o m b , t h e r e m a y b e s o m e
insufficiency of t h e p l a c e n t a (there are chil-
d r e n w h o are b o r n w i t h m a l n u t r i t i o n ) . I f t h e
m o t h e r ' s diet is i n a d e q u a t e , t h e e m b r y o will
be affected. If t h e m o t h e r takes m e d i c a t i o n or
drugs, t h i s will h a v e a g r e a t e r or lesser i n f l u -
e n c e d e p e n d i n g o n t h e d r u g , t h e s t a g e o f ges-
tation, and dosage and/or frequency. If she is
constipated during m u c h of the pregnancy,
this exerts pressure on t h e uterus.
As t h e e m b r y o develops, in terms of struc-
tural organization, c o n n e c t i v e tissue is t h e
least s p e c i f i c o f t h e d e v e l o p i n g t i s s u e s . M e s o -
derm remains relatively a m o r p h o u s .
E c t o d e r m a n d e n d o d e r m structures are f u n c -
tionally b o t h m o r e discrete a n d m o r e stable
i n f o r m . Yet c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e b e c o m e s
increasingly important, establishing the
arrangement of structures as t h e e m b r y o
g r o w s i n size. T h e r e h a v e b e e n f e w t i s s u e
studies of late p r e g n a n c y t h a t detail w h a t
goes on u n d e r n e a t h t h e skin of t h e develop-
ing infant. It is reasonable to suppose that the
great spurts in g r o w t h t h a t take place toward
t h e e n d o f p r e g n a n c y are t h e result o f a n
increase in t h e v o l u m e of c o n n e c t i v e tissue.
T h e b o d y grows organically, solving prob-
l e m s a n d m e e t i n g n e e d s a s t h e y arise, rather
t h a n b e i n g set u p a c c o r d i n g t o a p r e d e t e r -
m i n e d p l a n . G e n e t i c p r e d e t e r m i n a t i o n sets
t h e stage; v a r i a t i o n s are a k i n d of p r o b l e m
solving. N o t w o o f u s are t h e s a m e . N o t w o
sides o f t h e b o d y a r e t h e s a m e . T h e s e v a r i a -
tions relate to differences in e n v i r o n m e n t ,
both internal and external, of the kind we
have b e e n describing. As b o d y structures
develop, they change the internal environ-
m e n t o f t h e i m m e d i a t e area, creating c h a n g e s
a t t h e a n a t o m i c a l level. T h e r e are m a n y slight
differences in t h e rate of d e v e l o p m e n t inside
t h e e m b r y o . T h e o r c h e s t r a t i o n o f t h e s e vari-
ables makes up t h e physical c o m p o n e n t s of
individuality. This is true long before birth,
even before the embryo is recognizably
human.
O n e factor in this kind of problem solving
is t h a t cells h a v e a m u c h wider ability to
respond to changing environment than is
generally believed. M e s o d e r m is a p r i m e
e x a m p l e . It h a s types of n o n s p e c i f i c cells t h a t
a p p a r e n t l y g i v e rise t o d i f f e r e n t k i n d s o f s p e -
cialized cells as n e e d e d . T h e s e cells are p r e s e n t
in the embryo, the child, and in the mature
adult. We have termed this the " e m b r y o n i c
12 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 3-1
The way the baby lies within the uterus
determines the ultimate pattern of the spine.
p o t e n t i a l of m e s o d e r m . " Reticular cells a n d
l y m p h o c y t e s are e x a m p l e s of this type of cell.
Reticular cells in c o n n e c t i v e tissue very proba-
b l y a c t a s s o u r c e c e l l s , g i v i n g rise t o s p e c i a l -
ized c e l l s o n d e m a n d . L y m p h o c y t e s i n b l o o d
a n d l y m p h o i d tissue a c c u m u l a t e n e a r a n area
o f i n f e c t i o n , w h e r e i t s e e m s t h a t t h e y are a b l e
to assume multiple functions as needed in the
healing process, even m e t a m o r p h o s i n g into
p h a g o c y t i c ( r e s t r u c t u r i n g cells) o r b e c o m i n g a
source of additional c o n n e c t i v e tissue cells.
Such m o r p h o l o g i c a l (shape a n d structure)
responses t o e n v i r o n m e n t are t h e e x t r e m e .
Yet all c e l l s c h a n g e t h e i r r a t e o f g r o w t h i n
response to environmental stimulus. Even
in t h e adult, if a k i d n e y is r e m o v e d , w i t h i n
a short time the remaining kidney doubles in
size t o c o m p e n s a t e . C e l l s f o r t h i s r e g e n e r a t i o n
c o m e from within the b o d y As the kidney
g r o w s , i t c o n t i n u e s t o f u n c t i o n a s a k i d n e y . Its
cellular processes are fully l o a d e d — e v e n over-
loaded—yet it can make this compensation.
T h e coordination of t i m i n g is a m a j o r
factor in embryonic development, meshing
internal and external environmental
d e m a n d s . For e x a m p l e , as a few cells b u d
off the e n d o d e r m tube to begin to form the
liver, t h i s c h a n g e s t h e e n v i r o n m e n t o f t h e
area as a w h o l e . If this h a p p e n s at o n e time
schedule, it creates o n e kind of structure. If
it h a p p e n s later, it c r e a t e s a s l i g h t l y d i f f e r e n t
s t r u c t u r e . E v e n a m a t t e r o f h o u r s i s signifi-
c a n t . This is t h e reason that drug effects c a n
be so devastating at o n e e m b r y o n i c stage a n d
less so at a n o t h e r . T h a l i d o m i d e is a r e c e n t
i l l u s t r a t i o n . I f i t w a s t a k e n early, w h e n a r m s
a n d legs w e r e j u s t b e g i n n i n g t o d e v e l o p , t h e r e
w o u l d b e n o a r m s o r legs a t all. I f t a k e n later,
o n l y fingers or forearms m i g h t be affected.
T h e e m b r y o d e v e l o p s i n all its p a r t s b o t h
on a general timetable (the genetic contribu-
t i o n ) a n d o n its o w n i n d i v i d u a l t i m e t a b l e .
This c a n be a little lagging or a little a h e a d of
t h e average pattern. D e v e l o p m e n t takes place
in spurts. By t h e e n d of t h e s e c o n d or third
m o n t h o f p r e g n a n c y , all t h e e l e m e n t s are i n
place. From t h e n o n , growth is a matter of
b e c o m i n g bigger, m o r e coiled, o r m o r e c o m -
p l e x . After t h e t h i r d m o n t h o f p r e g n a n c y ,
t h e e m b r y o has dealt w i t h t h e problem of
b e c o m i n g w h a t it is—an identifiable creature
of h u m a n type. From t h e n on, it is dealing
with a different problem, n a m e l y the develop-
m e n t i n t o a b i g g e r , m o r e d i f f e r e n t i a t e d sys-
t e m . Increasingly, external e n v i r o n m e n t
b e c o m e s a m a j o r factor.
Also at this p o i n t , individual variations
b e c o m e increasingly apparent. The embryo
shows individual body shape and conforma-
t i o n . T h e w a y t h e b a b y lies i n t h e u t e r u s
determines t h e ultimate pattern of the spine
(Fig. 3-1). W h e t h e r t h e h e a d i s t o t h e r i g h t o r
t o t h e l e f t o r b e t w e e n t h e t w o legs, h o w t h e
arms are curled a r o u n d — a l l t h e s e are impor-
tant factors in t h e final shape. As it grows, t h e
e m b r y o (and t h e infant a n d adult) expands in
size b u t r e t a i n s t h e e a r l y p a t t e r n o f r o t a t i o n .
Internal e n v i r o n m e n t is primary at the
cellular level, m o r e influential w h e n t h e
e m b r y o is very y o u n g . As t h e fetus b e c o m e s a
child and t h e n an adult, external environ-
m e n t takes on an increasingly significant role.
FOUR
Development of Mesodermal Tissues

W e n e e d t o digress f o r a m o m e n t t o d i s c u s s study of tissues), t h e fascial wrapping of

t h e d e v e l o p m e n t o f t h o s e m e s o d e r m a l tissues m a t u r e m u s c l e is n o t a true w r a p p i n g . It is
t h a t will b e c o m e t h e b o n e s , l i g a m e n t s , t e n - better described as an area of greater c o n -
dons, muscle, and myofascial elements of c e n t r a t i o n of c o n n e c t i v e tissue. T h e r e is no
c o n n e c t i v e tissue. T h e s e are t h e structural b e g i n n i n g o r e n d t o t h e s e s t r u c t u r e s . Liga-
c o m p o n e n t s of mesoderm; they share a char- m e n t s a n d t e n d o n s d o n o t really a t t a c h t o
acteristic pattern of growth. b o n e — t h e y are c o n t i n u o u s w i t h t h e p e r i o s -
It is usually assumed t h a t c o n n e c t i v e tissue t e u m (a fibrous covering of t h e b o n e ) , w h i c h
(fascia) c o n d e n s e s a r o u n d a m u s c l e b e c a u s e in turn is continuous with the next tendon
e x i s t i n g m u s c l e t i s s u e n e e d s a w r a p p e r . It is or l i g a m e n t . (Fig. 4-2).
our belief that t h e direction of t h e c o n n e c t i v e Anatomists tend to describe the b o d y in
tissue ( t e n d o n o r l i g a m e n t ) i s e s t a b l i s h e d first. t e r m s o f its d i s s e c t i b l e p a r t s . A l i v i n g b o d y i s
P o t e n t i a l m u s c l e tissue c a u g h t w i t h i n t h i s a c o n t i n u o u s w h o l e . T h i s is especially true of
directional pull differentiates i n t o m a t u r e its c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e c o m p o n e n t s . T h e e r r o r
muscle oriented along the line of pull. Muscle arises w h e n w e t h i n k o f f a s c i a a s a t u b u l a r
itself i s s p o n g y , a b l e t o e x p a n d a n d c o n t r a c t
a n d s o e x e r t p r e s s u r e a n d f r i c t i o n o n its sur-
r o u n d i n g fascial bed. M u s c l e tissue is similar
i n c o n s i s t e n c y t o taffy. C o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e
gives i t s h a p e , d i r e c t i o n , a n d o r g a n i z a t i o n ,
m u c h a s t h e c a n d y w r a p p e r s h a p e s t h e taffy.
Because it is c o n t i n u o u s t h r o u g h o u t the body, B
c o n n e c t i v e tissue g e n e r a l i z e s l o c a l m u s c l e
a c t i o n . For e x a m p l e , a s t h e b i c e p s m o v e , t h e
whole arm moves, including the shoulder
and neck.
T h i s i n t e r a c t i o n d e v e l o p s early, i n t h e first
or second m o n t h of pregnancy. Muscle tissue
is caught in the middle of the connective
tissue d i r e c t i o n a l l y w h i l e i t i s still p r i m i t i v e .
T h e c l u m p of primitive m u s c l e cells elongates
t h r o u g h directional pressure. At this stage t h e
g r o u p o f p r i m i t i v e m u s c l e cells c h a n g e s i n t o
differentiated m u s c l e cells. Further g r o w t h
i n c r e a s e s m u s c l e size b y c e l l r e p r o d u c t i o n .
c D

This development m a y be stimulated by the

physical tension present in the connective
tissue, o r i t m a y b e s t i m u l a t e d b y t h e a s s o c i -
a t e d e n e r g y field (Fig. 4-1).
In terms of histology (the microscopic
Figure 4-1
This schematic shows an idealized sequence of
normal development of tendon/ligament from
early gestation to just before the baby is born.
The process continues throughout life.
14 THE ENDLESS WEB
Periosteum^
Tendon'
Fascia>-
Intramuscular
Brachialis- -connective
tissue fibers
Tendon*
Figure 4-2
Upper arm (brachialis muscle), showing the
connective tissue continuity. Periosteum -> tendon
-> myofascia -> tendon -> periosteum.
covering a r o u n d m u s c l e tissue. It is m o r e
a c c u r a t e t o say t h a t t e n d o n goes t h r o u g h
m u s c l e t h a n t h a t t h e m u s c l e lies w i t h i n t h e
tendon.
Keep in m i n d that in t h e embryological
s t a g e o f d e v e l o p m e n t , all o f t h e s e s t r u c t u r e s
are p o t e n t i a l . W h a t starts a s p o t e n t i a l t e n d o n
or ligament has potential muscle developing
w i t h i n it. T h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e a r o u n d t h e
p o t e n t i a l m u s c l e l o s e s its t e n d o n o u s c h a r a c t e r
a n d b e c o m e s fascia (bedding). T h e ends of t h e
original b a n d of fibers remain as the tendo-
n o u s a t t a c h m e n t s . W h e r e t h e c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue b a n d s e x t e n d across a b r o a d area of t h e
body, s u c h as t h e b a c k , t h e y are called a p o -
neuroses. T h i s is a wider, flatter e q u i v a l e n t of
t e n d o n as it connects to the broader muscles.
We h a v e isolated a particular part of m e s o -
dermal differentiation—that of tendons and
ligaments a n d associated muscle within the
c o n n e c t i v e tissue bed as a w h o l e . W h a t do we
m e a n b y differentiation? W h a t really h a p p e n s
w h e n c o n n e c t i v e tissue structures get organ-
ized? As cartilage ( w h i c h will be replaced by
b o n e ) p u s h e s o u t i n t o t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
b e d , d i r e c t i o n a l stress l i n e s a r e e s t a b l i s h e d .
These have one character along the bone and
another between the bones. The connective
t i s s u e c o m p o n e n t w i t h i n t h e s e stress l i n e s i s
s t i m u l a t e d t o i n c r e a s e fiber p r o d u c t i o n , a n d
t h e s e fibers are a r r a n g e d a l o n g stress l i n e s .
This reinforces t h e directional pull within t h e
c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e b e d , s t i m u l a t i n g m o r e fiber
production.
Traditional a n a t o m y describes the average
soft tissue structures of t h e body. We h a v e
f o u n d a v a r i e t y o f a t y p i c a l c o n n e c t i v e tissue
b a n d s a n d c o m p r e s s i o n s t h a t are i l l u s t r a t e d i n
no a n a t o m y text. We have interpreted these
as an individual response to idiosyncratic
patterns. These patterns can include habitual
gestures or posture, c o m p e n s a t i o n to injuries,
i n d i v i d u a l rates o f g r o w t h , a n d e n v i r o n m e n -
tal stresses o f all k i n d s . T h i s k i n d o f i n d i v i d u a l
response is apparent as early as t h e third
m o n t h o f intrauterine life.
A r o u n d t h e s i x t h m o n t h o f p r e g n a n c y , size
l i m i t a t i o n s in t h e uterus b e c o m e a factor. T h e
m o r e stringent this limitation, t h e greater t h e
likelihood of adaptation. In m a n y infants, for
e x a m p l e , t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue o n t h e o u t s i d e
Figure 4-3
The folding of the full-
term baby in the uterus
creates normal fascial
tensions, resulting in
localized thickenings
of connective tissue.
o f t h e leg b e c o m e s t h i c k e n e d . T h e legs are
held folded within t h e uterus so that tension
is created between the knee cap and the hip.
W h e r e there is this kind of pressure, the stim-
ulation causes a heavier c o n c e n t r a t i o n of
fibers, f o r m i n g a t h i c k e n e d s h e e t o f f a s c i a .
This is n o t a response to internal need, but
a r e s p o n s e to o u t s i d e p r e s s u r e (Fig. 4-3).
FIVE
Embryonic Limitations and Early Structural Organization
As t h e fetus grows, e n v i r o n m e n t a l pressures
begin to d o m i n a t e . At six m o n t h s , t h e fetus
is really b e i n g pressed by t h e l i m i t a t i o n s of
space. This is particularly true if t h e m o t h e r ' s
posture or structure supports t h e p r e g n a n c y
w i t h difficulty. T h e c h i l d m o v e s a r o u n d q u i t e
a bit, so that it does have s o m e o n g o i n g
choice. Especially toward t h e eighth m o n t h
of pregnancy, however, this m o v e m e n t tends
to be restricted to t h e limbs because there is
so little space.
T h e child's position in the uterus is thus
i m p o r t a n t i n its s t r u c t u r a l d e v e l o p m e n t a n d
alignment. W h e t h e r the head is to t h e right
o r t o t h e left o f t h e k n e e s , w h e r e t h e a r m s
are i n r e l a t i o n s h i p t o t h e s p i n e — t h e s e f a c t o r s
establish t h e individual pattern of t h e verte-
bral c o l u m n . W e assume t h a t t h e p o s i t i o n o f
the head on the neck is determined by these
s p i n a l r o t a t i o n s (Fig. 5-1). It w a s I d a Rolf's
assumption that this relationship is estab-
l i s h e d a s e a r l y a s t h e first w e e k o f p r e g n a n c y .
S u c h p r i m a r y r o t a t i o n s are a u g m e n t e d a n d
compensated by intrauterine limitations
during late pregnancy.
Other places in t h e b o d y m a y s h o w idio-
syncratic changes in structure, changes away
from simple efficiency. W h a t , t h e n , is simple
efficiency? It m a y be visualized in terms of
the concept of an embryonic, undifferenti-
ated c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d in w h i c h t h e r e are
directional pulls. As t h e b o n e s grow i n t o this
bed, their protuberances act as hooks, pro-
v i d i n g f o c a l p o i n t s o f s o f t t i s s u e t e n s i o n (Fig.
5-2). For i n s t a n c e , t h e a n t e r i o r s u p e r i o r s p i n e
of the ilium (the top front corner of the hip
b o n e ) " s n a g s " t h e b r o a d fascial sheet t h a t
c o m e s u p t h e leg f r o m t h e k n e e . T h i s c r e a t e s
c o n v e r g i n g folds at t h a t p o i n t . T h e sheet of
fascia also t h i c k e n s o n t h e side o f t h e t h i g h ,
w h e r e it is called t h e ilio-tibial tract. T h e ante-
r i o r s u p e r i o r s p i n e a c t s like a h o o k s u s p e n d i n g
a p i e c e o f f a b r i c . T h e m u s c l e s o f t h e t h i g h lie
w i t h i n t h e folds.
A n o t h e r pull is d o w n to t h e pubic b o n e
f r o m t h e rib region. T h e m u s c l e m o s t directly
influenced is t h e rectus a b d o m i n i s , t h e "sit-
u p " m u s c l e o n t h e f r o n t o f t h e a b d o m e n . Its
ease a n d l e n g t h s e e m to relate to t h e degree
o f c u r l a s t h e c h i l d lies i n t h e u t e r u s .
N o w h e r e are t h e s e pulls in i s o l a t i o n . T h e r e
are a l w a y s c r o s s - t e n s i o n s a m o n g t h e m . W e
have described a line of force d o w n to the
pubic b o n e and o n e up to t h e anterior supe-
rior s p i n e . I n a d d i t i o n , t h e r e i s a t o r s i o n
between these two b o n y protuberances.
T h e soft tissue organizes as a s h e e t across
t h i s area, w h i c h i s t h e groin. W i t h i n t h e s h e e t
t h e r e are specific areas of c o n c e n t r a t i o n of
c o n n e c t i v e tissue fibers. T h e m o s t a p p a r e n t is
the inguinal ligament, a rope-like b a n d from
t h e anterior superior spine to t h e pubic b o n e .
W h e n this is t o o h e a v y a n d short, it restricts
Figure 5-1
The rotations in the fetus continue into the
structure of the adult.
16 THE ENDLESS WEB

m o v e m e n t ; w h e n it is insufficiently estab-
l i s h e d , t h e g r o i n sags.
T h e l u m b o - d o r s a l f a s c i a , w h i c h lies i n a
h e a v y v e r t i c a l b a n d o n t h e b a c k , i s a s o f t tis-
Inguinal Rectus
A.S.I.S. sue structure that is established by t h e h o o k -
ligament abdominis
m. ing effect at t h e spinal flexures, those places
where t h e degree of b e n d i n g in the spine is
greater. T h e f e t a l s p i n e d o e s n o t d e s c r i b e a
s m o o t h c o n t i n u o u s " C " c u r v e ; i t i s a seg-
Ilio-tibial m e n t e d curve. These segmental junctions
tract a r e e s t a b l i s h e d b e f o r e t h e b o n e s start t o f o r m .
These junctions probably determine regional
.Sartorius
variations in t h e shape of the vertebrae. T h e
m.
f e t a l c u r v e i t s e l f i s n o t a r e s p o n s e t o restric-
tion from the w o m b ; there seems to be gen-
e t i c d e t e r m i n a t i o n f o r t h a t c u r v e t h a t i s later
reinforced a n d redirected by the muscular
pressure of t h e u t e r i n e walls as t h e child
Rectus
femoris m. grows.
B y t h e t i m e t h e f e t u s i s full t e r m a n d r e a d y
t o b e b o r n , i t i s a b a l a n c e d n e t w o r k o f soft
tissue pulls reflecting t h e i n t e r a c t i o n b e t w e e n
its g e n e t i c b l u e p r i n t a n d i n t r a u t e r i n e stresses.
W h e n t h e c h i l d i s b o r n , i t h a s t o start w o r k -
Figure 5-2 ing—literally—to counteract some of the hab-
Arrows pointing in one direction indicate the
its t h a t a r e a l r e a d y e s t a b l i s h e d i n its b o d y . Its
major tensions that are unidirectional. Note the
spinal curve and a kind of crouched position
tensions on the inguinal ligament are bidirectional
between the ASIS (anterior superior iliac spine) o f legs a n d a r m s m u s t b e o p e n e d a n d l e n g t h -
and the pubic bone (not labeled). ened (Fig. 5-3).
 EMBRYONIC LIMITATIONS AND
At birth, the head nods forward and the
hip turns under. A h u m a n being in t h e w o m b
is b o r n in a natural s t o o p . He straightens for
m a n y r e a s o n s : f o r c o m f o r t , t o m i m i c , f o r effi-
ciency of movement, to explore. As these new
physical habits are established, t h e y i n d u c e
additional cross-stresses w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c -
t i v e tissue n e t w o r k . P r e v i o u s l y e s t a b l i s h e d
stresses d i s s i p a t e f r o m l a c k o f u s e , t h e y m a y
be modified, or t h e y m a y remain as a sub-
structure w i t h i n t h e body.
T h e knee-up position in t h e fetus makes
an almost direct line of restriction across t h e
pelvis b e t w e e n t h e lower b a c k a n d t h e inside
o f t h e t h i g h . T h i s stress l i n e i s c o n t i n u o u s
with t h e fascial t h i c k e n i n g o n t h e small o f t h e
back. T h e c o m b i n a t i o n is a compressed, lean-
ing " S " curve between the lower back and t h e
Figure 5-3
The myofascial structures elongate and change
relationship as the baby moves from fetal curve
(A), to creeping (B), to crawling (C), and on to the
first steps (D).
A B
EARLY STRUCTURAL ORGANIZATION 17
leg. T h i s s t r u c t u r e i s f u n c t i o n a l i n t h e
w o m b a n d as the child crawls. But as t h e
b o d y b e g i n s to stand, t h e s h o r t n e s s is felt as
a restriction that inhibits secure upright bal-
a n c e . Gradually, as d e m a n d for stable m o v e -
m e n t i n c r e a s e s , t h i s t i s s u e m u s t l e n g t h e n . Or,
as is m o r e usual, t h e growing child finds c o m -
p e n s a t i o n s a r o u n d t h e s h o r t n e s s t o s e r v e its
needs. T h e lumbar spine (lower back) m a y
c o m e t o o far f o r w a r d , o r t h e legs m a y b e
pulled up and into the body.
T h e r e are n u m e r o u s e x a m p l e s o f s u c h
restrictions in fascial sheets a n d c o n n e c t i o n s
as the child develops in the w o m b . This m a y
be t h e origin of so-called spontaneous curva-
tures. Children w h o have s h o w n n o prior
structural problems can suddenly develop a
curvature (scoliosis) just before puberty. T h i s
i s n o t a rare o c c u r r e n c e . I t i s p o s s i b l e t h a t t h e
pattern of the curve m a y have been estab-
lished in t h e soft tissue relationships of t h e
spine early o n . T h e d e m a n d s f r o m growing
body weight and increasing control of move-
m e n t then bring out the inherent weakness.
C D
 PART TWO

Connective Tissue Body

SIX
The Effect of the Birth Process
The term "birth trauma" has considerable
emotional impact. From a physiological point
o f view, t h e a c t u a l p a s s a g e n e e d n o t b e s t r u c -
t u r a l l y d a m a g i n g . T h e r e m i g h t b e s o m e diffi-
c u l t y b e c a u s e o f t h e size o f t h e h e a d a n d
shoulders, yet this should be transitory. A
prolonged period of labor m a y be a source of
tension, but even twenty-four or forty-eight
hours should not under ordinary conditions
make that m u c h difference to structure.
Birth is an extraordinary condition. T h e
infant is e x p e r i e n c i n g a total c h a n g e in envi-
r o n m e n t . It has no established ways of deal-
i n g w i t h all t h i s n e w n e s s . A t b i r t h , t h e b a b y
is a wide-open system. N e w stimuli, because
t h e y are n e w , are m a g n i f i e d i n t h e i r i m p o r t
b o t h physically a n d e m o t i o n a l l y . It is a truism
in psychology that what we learn under panic
c o n d i t i o n s is w i t h us for life. T r a u m a t i c sen-
sory attack, such as b e i n g held upside d o w n
under bright lights, c a n i n d u c e structural c o n -
tractions or sensory shutdown that m a y never
go away. T h i s is a c u l t u r a l r a t h e r t h a n a p h y s i -
ological part of the birth process.
Birth is the beginning of n e w e n v i r o n m e n -
tal i n f l u e n c e s o n s t r u c t u r e , o n e s a r i s i n g o u t o f
c o g n i t i v e i m p a c t . T h e r e a r e b a s i c a l l y t w o dif-
ferent kinds of m a l f u n c t i o n in t h e b o d y —
t h o s e c a u s e d b y t r a u m a t i c ( e x t e r n a l ) stress
a n d t h o s e t h a t result f r o m d e v e l o p m e n t a l
( i n t e r n a l ) stress. W e t e n d t o a c c e p t t h e l a t t e r
because "that's just t h e way t h e world is" or
"that's just t h e way m y b o d y is." W e h a v e n o
comparisons. We can never know h o w we
w o u l d feel w i t h o u t t h a t stress.
Breathing is one of the major new things
that happens with birth. It would be inter-
e s t i n g t o c o m p a r e a L e B o y e r f i l m o f t h e first
minutes of infant delivery with a film of m o r e
traditional births. T h e French obstetrician
instituted deliveries of t h e b a b y u n d e r water.
First e f f o r t s t o c l e a n o f f t h e b a b y w e r e d o n e
in the water and no suctioning of airway was
deemed necessary. M o r e traditional birthing
n o w includes vigorous toweling and drying
t h e b a b y as well as suctioning to clear t h e
airway. Birthing t e c h n i q u e s of t h e first half
of this century included holding the baby
inverted by t h e feet until t h e first cry was
h e a r d to be sure t h e airway was clear.
W h a t happens to the diaphragm and the
ribs w i t h b r e a t h i n g i n t h e d i f f e r e n t k i n d s o f
birthing? Intrauterine breathing m o v e m e n t s
have to be shallow because the a b d o m e n and
u p p e r ribs a r e s h a r p l y c o m p r e s s e d i n t h e f e t a l
p o s i t i o n . O n l y t h e l o w e r ribs ( a n d p o s s i b l y
the diaphragm) can be involved. The first
b r e a t h a f t e r b i r t h starts t h e p r o c e s s o f p u s h i n g
t h e fluid o u t o f t h e lungs. B r e a t h i n g h a s actu-
ally started before b i r t h , a n d s o m e a m n i o t i c
fluid n e e d s t o b e e x p e l l e d . T h a t w a s t h e r a t i o -
nale for t h e shock. T h e spanking a n d h o l d i n g
the n e w b o r n upside d o w n were used to
ensure that the lungs were cleared.
As adults, we t e n d to be either chest
breathers or abdominal breathers. Does the
first breath of the n e o n a t e initiate t h e pat-
tern? In abdominal breathing, the diaphragm
moves up and down and the increased vol-
u m e o f air i s a c c o m m o d a t e d i n t h e a b d o m e n .
In chest breathing, t h e d i a p h r a g m also m o v e s
up and down, but not as much. Abdominal
b r e a t h i n g quiets t h e b o d y a n d draws t h e
focus of energy lower in t h e body, a pattern
well suited to m e d i t a t i o n . Chest b r e a t h i n g
draws t h e focus of e n e r g y u p w a r d i n t o a m o r e
a c t i v e p a t t e r n . ( I n o u r v i e w , t h e d e s i r a b l e rest-
ing state is a b a l a n c e b e t w e e n t h e t w o — s e e
Fig. 6-1.)
As t h e support of uterine constriction is
22 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 6-1
In a balanced combination of chest and abdom-
inal breathing, the abdomen lengthens (vertical
arrow) and the rib c a g e widens (horizontal arrow).
The inhale is shown in Figure ( 2 ) ; we have exag-
gerated the drawing for greater visual i m p a c t —
this is what it feels like but the visible effect is less
than this illustration suggests.
lost at birth, t h e r e are n e w pressures f r o m
b l a n k e t s , s h e e t s , d i a p e r s . D i a p e r s are t h e m o s t
insistent pressure, but even sheets a n d blan-
kets probably create m o r e pressure t h a n we
suspect. It was o n c e c o m m o n to pin d o w n
i n f a n t s h e e t s . Lately, i n s t e a d o f p u t t i n g t h e
child under a blanket, he or she is put into
o n e or m o r e sleepers a n d has a little m o r e
freedom of movement.
T h e child was exposed to light and sound
in t h e w o m b , but these were muffled. At
birth, sensory input is increased in intensity.
Probably it b e c o m e s a traumatic factor o n l y
if it is s u d d e n a n d / o r h i g h l y i n t r u s i v e . A f e t u s
is subjected to m o r e sound t h a n we suspect.
W h e n t h e uterine wall is fully e x t e n d e d , it is
very thin. Both light a n d sound can and do
c o m e through. There m a y even be an intra-
u t e r i n e n e e d for t h e i n f a n t t o w i t h d r a w b y
contracting.
T o u c h is t h e earliest sense response, estab-
l i s h e d a t a b o u t o n e m o n t h o f g e s t a t i o n . Tac-
tile s t i m u l a t i o n c h a n g e s radically at birth. In
t h e u t e r u s , t h e r e i s fluid c o v e r i n g t h e c h i l d i n
addition to the uterine musculature. At birth,
t h i s a m n i o t i c fluid i s n o l o n g e r t h e r e . A t b i r t h
t h e r e are s u d d e n i n t r u s i o n s o f f o r e i g n t e x t u r e s
s u c h as sheets, rubber-gloved fingers, suction-
ing devices, a n d rectal t h e r m o m e t e r s . T h e
w h o l e skin is an organ of t o u c h . T h e laying
on of gentle hands at birth is something we
all k n o w t o b e i m p o r t a n t . I t i s g o o d t o see i t
so beautifully represented in LeBoyer's* film
of birthing. W i t h the work of the second gen-
eration of progressive ideas in b i r t h i n g / gen-
tle ways of s t i m u l a t i n g sensory a w a k e n i n g
h a v e b e e n f o u n d — f o r e x a m p l e , b l o w i n g air
on the chest or using the mother's voice in
a low m o n o t o n e to stimulate breathing.
T h e c h a n g e in the quality of sensory
response to the new environment is the
first c h a l l e n g e t h e b a b y f a c e s . H o w t h i s
c h a n g e is h a n d l e d has a marked effect on
identity. Structurally, a defense response
is expressed as tissue c o n t r a c t i o n a n d with-
drawal. A shock to the system, taking the
i n f a n t d i r e c t l y i n t o d e f e n s e , m a y start a w a y
of being. Often, it seems as t h o u g h a baby's
first c r i e s are r e a l l y a n g r y o r f e a r f u l . T h e c o n -
n e c t i v e t i s s u e r e s p o n s e t o t h a t first e m o t i o n
c a n last t h r o u g h l i f e .
*See Frederick LeBoyer, Birth Without Violence (New York:
Knopf, 1 9 7 5 ) .
f S e e Michel Odent, Birth Reborn (New York: Pantheon,
1984).
SEVEN
Developmental Transitions in the Newborn and Young Child
Development is not complete at birth. Birth
marks a transition toward a greater a n d ulti-
m a t e l y m o r e refined use o f m o v e m e n t . T h e
c o n n e c t i v e tissue i s t h e s y s t e m b y w h i c h w e
m e d i a t e m o v e m e n t , yet structurally, t h e least
complete system is t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue.
Increased d e m a n d for m o v e m e n t furthers
maturation of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue. As we
use a part, it b e c o m e s m o r e capable, m o r e
skilled. I n t u r n , a s w e b e c o m e m o r e s k i l l e d ,
we explore a wider range of m o v e m e n t .
Feedback systems can operate to increase
the range of m o v e m e n t , or t h e circuit c a n get
s h u n t e d a n d g o i n t o a d o w n w a r d spiral. F e e d -
b a c k s y s t e m s a r e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c o f all l i v i n g
organisms.
T h e r e is very little i n f o r m a t i o n available
about muscle, c o n n e c t i v e tissue, a n d o r g a n
Figure 7-1
At birth, centers of
ossification are more
fully developed in the
upper body than in the
lower. This is especially
noticeable in the space
between the bony ossifi-
cations in the pelvis and
legs when compared to
the shoulders and ribs.
d e v e l o p m e n t l a t e i n t h e f e t a l c y c l e . After t h e
first t h r e e m o n t h s o f p r e g n a n c y , m o r e e m b r y -
ology texts concentrate on t h e growth of
external form. T h e sequence in which the
head develops a h e a d o f t h e tail a n d t h e b a c k
a h e a d o f t h e b e l l y i s m a i n t a i n e d , a s far a s w e
c a n tell, a f t e r b i r t h .
In the newborn, the bones of the head and
c h e s t are r e l a t i v e l y w e l l d e v e l o p e d . T h e p e l v i s
i s l a r g e l y c a r t i l a g e , w i t h s m a l l disks o f b o n e
(Fig. 7-1). B e c a u s e t h e h i p c a r t i l a g e is m a l -
l e a b l e , h o w a c h i l d h a b i t u a l l y lies i n t h e c r i b
has great effect on this lower structure. If he
o r s h e lies o n t h e b a c k o r f r o n t , t h e legs t e n d
to be splayed out because of limited pelvic
ossification as well as lack of soft tissue t o n e
t o p u l l t h e legs t o g e t h e r .
At birth, the m o s t developed pelvic mus-
culature is in the back. T h e gluteus m a x i m u s
muscle is very well developed. T h e erector
spinae (long m u s c l e s of t h e b a c k ) are strong,
w h i l e t h e b e l l y w a l l i s less s o . T h o s e m u s c l e s
t h a t t e n d t o pull t h e leg t o w a r d t h e m i d d l e
( a d d u c t o r s ) a r e e v e n less s t r o n g . S w a d d l i n g ,
the practice of binding a n e w b o r n closely
i n c l o t h , w r a p s t h e legs s o t h a t t h e y a r e h e l d
close together. It m a y be that isometric m o v e -
ments of the infant within this wrapping
stimulate balance in the hip joint.
D e v e l o p m e n t a l r a t e s a n d p a t t e r n s set u p
t h e stresses; l e a r n i n g t o u s e t h e b o d y r e i n -
forces t h e process. T h e m a j o r i t y of children,
w h e n t h e y start t o s t a n d u p i n t h e i r c r i b s , p u l l
themselves up with their arms and shoulders.
T h e y are u s i n g t h e i r stronger parts to h o i s t
themselves up on the cartilaginous, rubbery
legs a n d p e l v i s . O b s e r v e a s m a l l c h i l d w h o
has just discovered h o w to stand. T h e child
spends the day going up and down, pulling
u p w i t h h i s a r m s , g e t t i n g r u b b e r y o n h i s legs,
falling down, c o m i n g up, getting rubbery,
and so forth. He is visibly exploring the bal-
a n c e possibilities in his pelvis. If t h e h i p j o i n t
has r e a c h e d t h e stage w h e r e t h e tissues are
m a t u r e e n o u g h t o s u s t a i n t h i s e x e r c i s e , all i s
well. But children (and parents) are o f t e n t o o
eager. O v e r u s e o r u s e o f a j o i n t b e f o r e i t i s
adequately developed can physically change
t h e s h a p e o f t h e j o i n t i t s e l f (Fig. 7-2). O r t h e
24 THE ENDLESS WEB

course, m o v e m e n t c a n n o t "flow t h r o u g h " to

t h e b o n e s . Range of m o v e m e n t is restricted.
Maturity in a j o i n t is t h e exploration of t h e
Cartilage
full r a n g e o f p o s s i b i l i t i e s w h i l e still r e t a i n i n g

Cleft -
Synovial membrane
stable m o v e m e n t .
Joint cavity
Joint capsule J o i n t s b e c o m e mature with use. This
Perichondrium - Articular cartilage process accelerates after birth with kicking,
Mesenchyme Periosteum rocking, looking around, a n d so forth. It is
important to remember that a child doesn't
start w i t h w a l k i n g . I f t h e c h i l d d o e s n ' t c r a w l
Immature Mature
before it walks, it is likely to h a v e m o t o r
Figure 7-2 u n c o o r d i n a t i o n for life. T h e child m a y also
The essential difference in the comparison of
h a v e a brain i n c o o r d i n a t i o n , m a n i f e s t i n g as
mature and immature joints is that the immature
" b o n e " is still cartilage. Thus the immature joint is disabilities in t h i n k i n g , reading, seeing, a n d
more pliable and, unfortunately, is more learning.
deformable by misuse. In crawling, an infant works with the
c o n n e c t i o n o f t h e fascial s h e e t s b e t w e e n t h e
m i s u s e m a y b e less d r a s t i c — s i m p l y a h a b i t u a l
way of moving.
We define a myofascial structure as i m m a -
ture w h e n it is insufficiently developed to
m e e t t h e d e m a n d for m o v e m e n t . A n y j o i n t
c a n b e i m m a t u r e e i t h e r s t r u c t u r a l l y o r i n its
pattern of use. T h e heel is an excellent e x a m -
ple of this. W i t h o u t a well-developed heel,
t h e f o o t w o u l d be m o r e like a l o n g e x t e n s i o n
of t h e leg. A m a t u r e h e e l a c t s as a f u l c r u m
t h r o u g h w h i c h t h e f o o t a n d leg relate t o e a c h Immature (4 yrs)
other. Babies don't have this kind of heel
u n t i l t h e y b e g i n t o w a l k (Fig. 7-3). T h e b o n e
a n d tissue e l e m e n t s are present, b u t t h e soft
tissue h a s n ' t b e e n s h a p e d b y use. W h e n t h e
c h i l d starts to walk, it usually stands on t h e •Tibia

balls of t h e feet. It has to because t h e heel

c a n ' t reach t h e floor; t h e muscles c o n n e c t i n g Talus

u p t h e leg a r e n o t y e t e x t e n d e d a n d t h e t w o
h e e l b o n e s a r e still w e d g e d u p i n t o t h e a n k l e
joint b e t w e e n t h e tibia a n d fibula. Eventually,
t h e b o n e s are w o r k e d free a n d t h e m a t u r e
h e e l rests f i r m l y o n t h e g r o u n d .
Adequate flexibility at t h e joints is t h e
anatomical definition of maturity. W h e r e
t h e r e is i m m a t u r i t y in a j o i n t , it is c h i e f l y a
quality of t h e soft tissue p o r t i o n of t h e joint.
W h e n it is inelastic, contracted, or pulled off
•Calcaneous
Mature
Figure 7-3
The black outlines in the immature foot represent
cartilage that will eventually be replaced by bone.
Note the difference in the shape of the talus as it is
molded by ossification and use. Concurrently note
the change in the position of the calcaneus.
 DEVELOPMENTAL TRANSITIONS
outside of the knee and the h i p a n d on up
i n t o t h e b a c k (Fig. 7-4). C r a w l i n g r e d i r e c t s
t h e f l e x u r e s o f t h e fetal p o s i t i o n . I t i s n e c e s -
sary f o r t h e c h i l d a c t i v e l y t o u s e t h i s p o s i t i o n
before going on to the elongations of t h e
body required in walking. Crawling seems
to establish the lower back (lumbar) curve.
It r e i n f o r c e s a s i m u l t a n e o u s p a t t e r n of r i g h t
angles at b o t h the hip a n d the knee. Crawling
develops t h e use of t h e pelvis, b r i n g i n g it
t o w a r d t h e level o f m a t u r i t y o f t h e s h o u l d e r s
a n d belly. A c r a w l i n g c h i l d p r a c t i c e s s y n c h r o -
n i z i n g t h e a r m s a n d legs, a s w e l l a s r i g h t a n d
left sides.
A t b i r t h , t h e pelvis a n d legs are p r i m a r i l y
cartilage. Proportionately, t h e arms h a v e m o r e
b o n e , t h e r e i s a fair a m o u n t o f b o n e i n t h e
ribs, a n d t h e u p p e r v e r t e b r a e h a v e m o r e b o n e
than the ones down toward the lumbar
r e g i o n a n d t h e s a c r u m . T h e full r e p l a c e m e n t
of cartilage by b o n e in t h e skeleton is n o t
c o m p l e t e until t h e age of t w e n t y to t w e n t y -
five. W h e n t h e r e i s still c a r t i l a g e i n t h e v e r -
t e b r a l c o l u m n , i t m a y b e e a s i e r t o c h a n g e its
c o n f o r m a t i o n b e c a u s e o f its g r e a t e r m a l l e a -
bility. A t t h e s a m e t i m e , i t m a y b e t h a t a n y
Figure 7-4
(A) before birth; (B) creeping; (C) crawling;
(D) standing.
A B
IN THE NEWBORN AND YOUNG CHILD 25
stability in position is harder to keep.
An e l d e r l y p e r s o n w i t h a s e v e r e s c o l i o s i s is
at the other end of the spectrum of malleabil-
ity of cartilaginous tissue. T h e r e are m i n e r a l
d e p o s i t s i n t h e disks b e t w e e n t h e v e r t e b r a e ,
w h i c h t h e n b e c o m e m o r e o r less r i g i d . D i s k s
consist of fibrocartilage, w h i c h is dense a n d
fibrous. Functionally it is similar to b o n e ;
histologically it is an i n t e r m e d i a t e stage b e -
t w e e n cartilage a n d b o n e tissue. Fibrocartilage
itself c o m p r i s e s a s p e c t r u m of d e n s i t y — i t c a n
b e rigid like b o n e o r r u b b e r y l i k e c a r t i l a g e .
T h e difference between o n e kind of connec-
tive tissue a n d a n o t h e r is in t h e a m o u n t a n d
o r g a n i z a t i o n o f t h e fibers a n d i n t h e d e n s i t y
of the intercellular matrix. W i t h i n limits, any
o f these tissues m a y m o v e i n t h e direction o f
increased rigidity or at a n o t h e r t i m e , reverse
t o t h e d i r e c t i o n o f g r e a t e r fluidity. T h i s c a n
h a p p e n at a n y age.
Reversibility of tissue density is an i n s t a n c e
of the embryological nature of connective
tissue in t h e adult. I m p a c t e d areas, such as
b e t w e e n t h e shoulder blades or across t h e t o p
o f t h e p e l v i s , c a n f e e l like t e n d o n s . L i k e t e n -
d o n s o r l i g a m e n t s , t h e y are t h e f u n c t i o n a l
r e s p o n s e t o n e e d . W e all h a v e w a y s o f s h o r i n g
o u r s e l v e s u p a g a i n s t t h e stresses o f w e i g h t a n d
constriction. We create short "ropes" and
C D
26 THE ENDLESS WEB
folds across a j o i n t or wide cross b a n d s to
stabilize an u n b a l a n c e d shoulder or hip.
The problems begin when we attempt to
work against rather t h a n with gravity as we
m o v e . W h e n a c h i l d first starts t o w a l k , s h e
gets up a n d a i m s toward a table or s o m e o t h e r
s u p p o r t . S h e s o r t o f falls f o r w a r d , a n d h e r legs
m o v e under her to keep her upright. If she
l e a n s b a c k a t all, s h e sits. S h e s o o n l e a r n s t o
prefer falling on her b o t t o m to falling forward
on h e r face. T h e result is t h a t s h e starts to
b a l a n c e o n t h e b a c k o f her legs. I f this p a t t e r n
persists i n t h e a d u l t , t h e r e w i l l b e t r o u b l e .
W h e n a child is held with his arms up, he
b r i n g s h i s legs f o r w a r d to w a l k (Fig 7-5). As
h i s legs m o v e o u t i n f r o n t , h e f e e l s t h a t h e i s
f a l l i n g b a c k w a r d a n d starts c o m p e n s a t i n g : t h e
lower back c o m e s forward, the shoulders go
back, and the head comes forward to balance.
A further c o m p l i c a t i o n is t h a t b u l k y diapers
f o r c e t h e legs a p a r t . I t i s i n t e r e s t i n g t o see
h o w m a n y adults walk with this kind of c o n -
f i g u r a t i o n — h e a d f o r w a r d a n d legs s p l a y e d .
After birth, t h e activities of b r e a t h i n g ,
t u r n i n g over, sitting u p , grabbing things,
l o o k i n g for things, crawling, a n d walking are
the primary stimuli to convert the immature
Figure 7-5
structure of the n e w b o r n into a c o m p e t e n t ,
independent child.
T h e r e a r e a l s o less o b v i o u s d e m a n d s —
s u b t l e e x p e c t a t i o n s t h a t start v e r y y o u n g . W e
e x p e c t d i f f e r e n t t h i n g s f r o m a b a b y girl t h a n
f r o m a b a b y boy, for e x a m p l e . S o m e of this
m a y e v e n start b e f o r e b i r t h ; i n s o m a n y c a s e s ,
the child is talked about as " h e . " Infants and
c h i l d r e n are n a t u r a l p e r f o r m e r s a n d t h e y get a
great deal of r e i n f o r c e m e n t to act, to m i m i c .
( " I s n ' t t h a t c u t e ; j u s t like h i s f a t h e r . " ) A n o t h e r
way of saying the same thing is that children
are natural seekers of a t t e n t i o n a n d approval.
A w o m a n w h o h a d a l o t o f i n j u r i e s t o o n e leg
said, " M y m o t h e r used to tell me t h a t w h e n I
was a b o u t three years old I followed my father
around in the garden a n d imitated his limp."
Perhaps n o t surprisingly, this was t h e s a m e
leg s h e r e p e a t e d l y i n j u r e d .
As a b a b y l e a r n s to u s e its b o d y , it h a s
m a n y o p t i o n s . A s i t g r o w s older, t h i s w i d e -
o p e n range of possibilities narrows in favor
of greater precision of m o v e m e n t . Premature
use, inappropriate i m i t a t i o n , or a too-early
d e m a n d for precision c a n skew t h e j o i n t out
of true, creating restriction, lack of precision,
and eventually, pain.
EIGHT
Myofascial Structures
The Spine as an Example of "Living Anatomy"
The "organ" that transmits m o v e m e n t in the
body, that makes a structural w h o l e of us, is
t h e mesodermal tissue—the c o n n e c t i v e tissue.
These hard a n d soft tissues t o g e t h e r m a k e u p
w h a t Ida R o l f c a l l e d t h e " o r g a n o f s t r u c t u r e . "
C o n n e c t i v e tissue v a r i e s i n t e r m s o f t h e p h y s i -
c a l n a t u r e o f its i n t e r c e l l u l a r m a t r i x a n d i n
t h e n u m b e r a n d d e n s i t y o f its f i b e r s . I n
descriptive terms, this m e a n s t h a t s o m e is
h a r d e r o r softer, s o m e i s m o r e e l a s t i c o r m o r e
rigid. C o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e i s c o n t i n u o u s
throughout the body from toe to head. Bone,
for e x a m p l e , is a c o n c e n t r a t i o n of h a r d inter-
cellular m a t r i x w i t h i n a c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d .
Histologically, therefore, b o n e is c o n t i n u o u s
with t h e total b e d of c o n n e c t i v e tissue.
Myofascia, t o o , is a specialized type of
Periosteum*
Tendon^
Fasciar-
Intramuscular
Brachialis- -•connective
tissue fibers
Tendorw
Figure 8-1
Brachialis muscle in upper arm showing continuity
of connective tissue: periosteum and tendon with
fascia. Ligaments similarly bridge the periosteum
of one bone to the periosteum of the other bone
in a joint.
c o n n e c t i v e tissue. It is a heavier c o n d e n s a t i o n
o f fibers a t t h e s u r f a c e o f m u s c l e . M y o f a s c i a
also exists as layers b e t w e e n m u s c l e s , relating
t h e m o r e superficial surface muscles to t h o s e
deeper in t h e b o d y as well as c o n n e c t i n g
adjacent muscles into groups. We consider
fascia to be a c o n t i n u o u s system, e x t e n d i n g
throughout the b o d y between the deepest
b o n e level ( p e r i o s t e u m - t e n d o n - l i g a m e n t )
(Fig. 8-1) a n d t h e l a y e r j u s t u n d e r t h e s k i n
( t h e s u p e r f i c i a l f a s c i a ) . It is a l a y e r i n g of s h e e t s
of fibrous tissue t h a t flows t h r o u g h t h e body,
eddying around b o n y protuberances that
c o m p r e s s a n d r e d i r e c t its flow. I t i s t h e p a c k -
ing material of the body; it makes up our
contours and holds us in place.
M u s c l e lies w i t h i n f a s c i a l s h e a t h s . I n a d d i -
t i o n , f a s c i a l fibers i n t e r p e n e t r a t e t h e m u s c l e ,
w r a p p i n g a r o u n d smaller m u s c l e fiber groups
(Fig. 8-2). M u s c l e fibers e x p a n d a n d c o n t r a c t ,
exerting internal pressure on this myofascial
tissue. Acting like a guy rope, t h e fibrous
Epimysium
Perimysium'
Endomysium. 1
Figure 8-2
Cross section of the upper arm showing the fascial
sheaths (labeled) surrounding muscle fibers (dots)
and muscle groupings.
28 T H E E N D L E S S W E B

Coracoclavicular fascial s h e a t h t h e n transmits t h e m o v e m e n t

ligament &
to the periosteum of the b o n e with which it is
Subclavius m.
c o n t i n u o u s . In adults as well as in t h e e m b r y o
and neonate, where the myofascial covering
Coracoid h a s b e c o m e t o u g h e n e d (as i t d o e s t h r o u g h
process
habitual tension or holding), it condenses
Coracobrachialis .Pectoralis to encase the muscle in such a way that there
m. minor m. i s less c a p a c i t y t o l e n g t h e n a n d t o m o v e .
As we h a v e said, t h e m y o f a s c i a l b e d of t h e
adult, as well as of t h e e m b r y o , responds to
Biceps m.
habitual t e n s i o n with a localized increase of
(short head)
f i b r o b l a s t s a n d i n c r e a s e d s e c r e t i o n o f fiber
in t h e direction of pull. This creates a t o u g h
e n v e l o p e t h a t e n c a s e s t h e m u s c l e , r e d u c i n g its
c a p a c i t y t o l e n g t h e n o r m o v e freely. T h e f o c u s
of Rolfing is this t o u g h e n e d myofascia, and
i t c a n b e f e l t t o r e g a i n its n a t u r a l e l a s t i c i t y a s
Rolfing proceeds. We therefore have reason to
believe that this toughening of the myofascial
s h e a t h is reversible.
Fascial s h e a t h s get " s n a g g e d " o n b o n y
h o o k s . An e x a m p l e is t h e coracoid process, a
b o n y projection on t h e inside of the shoulder
b l a d e just a b o v e t h e armpit. Fascia e x t e n d s as
a continuous sheet from the hand, arm, and
c h e s t all t h e w a y u p t o t h e n e c k a n d h e a d .
T h e c o r a c o i d p r o c e s s r e a c h e s i n t o t h a t fascial
c o n t i n u u m , m o d i f y i n g its f l o w (Fig. 8-3).
S i m i l a r l y , t h e t a i l b o n e ( c o c c y x ) a c t s like a
h o o k , i n t e r r u p t i n g t h e c o n t i n u i t y o f fascial
tissue f r o m t h e outside i n t o t h e inside of
t h e pelvis. H o o k s are o n e w a y t h a t b o n e a n d
m y o f a s c i a interact to redirect, stabilize, or
m a g n i f y m o v e m e n t p o t e n t i a l . T h e s e are
t h e r e f o r e areas o r s t r u c t u r e s t h a t w i t h i m -
proper use m a y b e c o m e foci of i n h i b i t i o n
of movement.
Hooks are f r e q u e n t l y points o f a t t a c h m e n t
f o r m y o f a s c i a l s t r u c t u r e s . For e x a m p l e , t h e
Figure 8-3 coracoid process is the point of a t t a c h m e n t
A look at the surface of the shoulder demonstrates
of muscles from t h e arms to t h e shoulder.
the continuity of the fascial sheath (photo). The
On the other hand, the tailbone is only min-
underlying fascial pulls graphically illustrate the
complex dynamics focused on the coracoid process i m a l l y a p o i n t of a t t a c h m e n t for t h e muscles
(drawing). f r o m t h e l e g t o t h e t r u n k . Yet t h e t a i l b o n e ' s

e f f e c t o n leg m o v e m e n t b e c o m e s a p p a r e n t i f
it has been displaced in a n y w a y — m o v e d to
t h e r i g h t o r t h e left, t o o d e e p o r t o o c l o s e t o
the surface—then there is interference with
t h e easy s w i n g o f t h e leg. I n j u r i e s t o t h e c o c -
c y x are c o m m o n i n c h i l d h o o d , a n d e a s i l y
i g n o r e d . T h e y are d i f f i c u l t t o t r e a t — i t i s
i m p o s s i b l e to p u t a c a s t on a t a i l b o n e .
B o n e projects i n t o t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
bed with broad surfaces as well as w i t h h o o k s .
The upper rim of the hip bones, the edge of
t h e l o w e r ribs, a n d t h e s h i n b o n e s a r e e x a m -
ples. T h e s e , t o o , s e r v e a s a r e a s o f a t t a c h m e n t
for myofascial units. In general, t h e s e b r o a d e r
surfaces a r e c o n n e c t e d w i t h m o r e s u p e r f i c i a l
s o f t tissue o r g a n i z a t i o n . S m a l l e r p o i n t s o f
a t t a c h m e n t usually serve to redirect deeper-
lying tissue.
There is a f u n c t i o n a l reasonableness to t h e
c o m b i n a t i o n of myofascial sheets and b o n y
p o i n t s o f r e f e r e n c e . T h e g r o w i n g b o n e sets u p
stresses ( d i r e c t i o n a l pulls) i n t h e c o n n e c t i v e
tissue i n u t e r o . W h e n t h e s e a r e f r o m a s i n g l e
p o i n t (for e x a m p l e , t h e w a y t h e h a m s t r i n g s
a t t a c h to t h e ischial tuberosities), t h e result
tends to be a grouping of rope-like structures.
W h e n t h e p u l l s are f r o m a b r o a d a r e a (for
example, the transverse muscles covering
t h e a b d o m e n ) , t h e r e s u l t i s m o r e like a b r o a d
sheet.
" P o i n t of a t t a c h m e n t " designates t h e sup-
posed e n d p o i n t of m o v e m e n t for a muscle or
group of muscles. It is i m p o r t a n t to r e m e m b e r
t h a t f a s c i a c o n t i n u e s p a s t t h i s p o i n t o f refer-
ence. Points of a t t a c h m e n t c h a n g e the quality
of movement. They change the strength of
t h e gesture a n d absorb s o m e of t h e energy of
a m o v e m e n t b e f o r e t r a n s m i t t i n g i t t o t h e rest
of the body.
Ideally, m o v e m e n t f r o m a g e s t u r e t r a v e l s
t h r o u g h t h e a r m o r leg o r h e a d t o w a r d t h e
spine. M o v e m e n t transmits as a wave d o w n
the spine as well as across t h e spine a n d i n t o
t h e o t h e r side o f t h e b o d y . T h u s , w h e n t h e
MYOFASCIAL STRUCTURES 29
Figure 8-4
Dowager's hump.
arm moves, that movement should continue
wavelike through the neck a n d i n t o the head.
Yet t h e r e i s f r e q u e n t l y a b l o c k i n g o f t h e m o v e -
m e n t . For e x a m p l e , a t t h e j u n c t i o n o f t h e
neck with the chest vertebrae, there is often
a c h r o n i c h o l d i n g p a t t e r n t h a t i n l a t e r life i n
w o m e n is c a l l e d a d o w a g e r ' s h u m p (Fig. 8-4).
Since the spine is the focus of so m a n y
m o v e m e n t difficulties, w e will g o i n t o s o m e
d e t a i l a b o u t its s t r u c t u r e a s a n e x a m p l e o f
w h a t w e c a l l " l i v i n g a n a t o m y . " All o f t h e
spinal c o l u m n ' s 1 8 6 j o i n t s are i n v o l v e d i n
every m o v e m e n t of t h e body. This is espe-
cially well d e m o n s t r a t e d in b r e a t h i n g , w h i c h
is n o t generally t h o u g h t of as a " m o v e m e n t . "
T h e r e are t h r e e or four articulations b e t w e e n
e a c h vertebra. I n t h e c h e s t region, t h e r e are
three articulations of each of the twelve t h o -
r a c i c v e r t e b r a e w i t h its a s s o c i a t e d r i b . T h e r e
are f u n c t i o n a l a r t i c u l a t i o n s b e t w e e n t h e c e n -
tral b o d i e s o f t h e v e r t e b r a e a s t h e y r e l a t e t o
t h e disks b e t w e e n t h e m ( t h e s e a r e n o t u s u a l l y
considered true joints, but t h e y do f u n c t i o n
as joints). Holding patterns can and do occur
b e t w e e n a n y o n e o r (usually) m o r e o f t h e s e
articulations, restricting m o v e m e n t through-
o u t t h e s p i n a l c o l u m n (Fig. 8-5).
30 THE ENDLESS WEB

We i n c l u d e b o n e , fascia, a n d m u s c l e in our
d e f i n i t i o n of a s p i n a l c o l u m n (Fig. 8-6). I n d i -
Costal facet of vidual vertebrae m u s t b o t h separate vertically
transverse process
Inferior costal
and rotate with every body m o v e m e n t . The
articular facet
spinal c o l u m n as a w h o l e integrates rotation
Superior costal
w i t h l e n g t h e n i n g a n d s h o r t e n i n g t o allow for
articular facet diagonal m o v e m e n t s . These types of m o v e -
m e n t s are c o m b i n e d to give t h e spring-like
action of the spine that is characteristic of
v i r t u a l l y all m o v e m e n t i n a t r u l y m o b i l e
s p i n e . In d i s s e c t i o n , a spiral p a t t e r n is v i s i b l e
in t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue a r o u n d t h e spine.
M o v e m e n t between individual vertebrae is
p r o p a g a t e d t h r o u g h this spirally arranged
c o n n e c t i v e tissue i n t o t h e spine as a w h o l e .
T h e spinal c o l u m n is constantly moving
Figure 8-5 in response to breathing, heartbeat, blood
In the thorax, the articulations of the ribs with
c i r c u l a t i o n , c r a n i a l r h y t h m , e t c . For e x a m p l e ,
the vertebrae add another level of complexity to
spinal mechanics. w h e n we i n h a l e , t h e r e is a t e n d e n c y for t h e
c o l u m n to l e n g t h e n ; spinal curves decrease in
a n g l e . W h e n w e e x h a l e , t h e b o d y settles b a c k
i n t o its n o r m a l c u r v e s (Fig. 8-7). N e i t h e r t h e
spine n o r t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue t h a t wraps t h e
vertebrae a n d their associated muscles is ever
Anterior "at rest."
longitudinal 1
„ Interspinous
ligament ligament
As m o v e m e n t b e c o m e s more active, con-
n e c t i v e tissue wraps m o r e tightly a r o u n d t h e
Intervertebral,
disc -Ligamentum s p i n e . T h e p a t t e r n o f c o n n e c t i v e tissue t h e n
flavum
Vertebral goes f r o m a primarily vertical at-ease position
body
(centrum) .Spinous
process

Posterior
'longitudinal
ligament

Transverse,
process

Ventral Dorsal -

Figure 8-6
Lumbar vertebrae with associated ligaments Figure 8-7
illustrating the complexity of fiber direction. Inhale (B) and exhale (C).

to a spiraling, narrower wrapping a r o u n d t h e
vertebrae and muscles. T h e action of t h e mus-
cle fibers i s r a c h e t - l i k e , u n i d i r e c t i o n a l , a n d
m o d u l a r (all o r n o t h i n g ) . T h e a c t i o n o f c o n -
n e c t i v e tissue i s b a s e d o n e l a s t i c r e c o i l , w h i c h
i s less rigidly p a t t e r n e d . R e c o i l c a n b e p a r t i a l ,
it is m u l t i d i r e c t i o n a l , a n d it is p r o p a g a t e d in
waves. As t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue wraps m o r e
c l o s e l y t o t h e s p i n e , its e l a s t i c r e c o i l p r o p e r -
ties b e c o m e a n i n c r e a s i n g l y larger p r o p o r t i o n
o f t h e m o v e m e n t . T h a t is, t h e m o r e f o r c e
b e h i n d t h e m o v e m e n t , t h e greater t h e in-
v o l v e m e n t of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue. Gesture
t h e n b e c o m e s b o t h faster a n d m o r e integrated
(smoother).
T h e c o n t r a c t i o n o f m u s c l e fiber i m p e l s t h e
c o n n e c t i v e tissue to wrap itself m o r e closely
around muscle and vertebrae, paradoxically
causing the spine to elongate. As the muscle
fiber r e l a x e s , t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e r e c o i l s ,
maintaining and spreading m o v e m e n t
through the spine and out into the body.
It is this wavelike propagation of m o v e m e n t
through the b o d y as a w h o l e that supports
continuity of m o v e m e n t and creates m o v e -
m e n t t h a t i s s m o o t h r a t h e r t h a n jerky.
T h e elastic recoil of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
arises f r o m t h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f fibers w i t h i n
t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e m a t r i x . C o l l a g e n fibers
t h e m s e l v e s are n o t elastic, but t h e y are coiled
a n d t h e i r i n t e r w e a v i n g a l l o w s f o r e l a s t i c dis-
p l a c e m e n t a n d r e t u r n . W h e n t h e s e fibers a r e
densely matted or not aligned in the direction
o f m o v e m e n t , t h e i r e l a s t i c p o t e n t i a l i s dis-
persed. This is t h e case w h e r e there is t h i c k e n -
ing and b u n c h i n g of c o n n e c t i v e tissue. This
can be palpated a n d is sensed as restriction
and/or pain.
T h e physical state of t h e m a t r i x also plays
a role in t h e ability of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
t o respond t o m o v e m e n t . C o n n e c t i v e tissue
fibers d o n o t e x i s t i n a v a c u u m . T h e y a r e
e m b e d d e d in a m a t r i x t h a t itself is h i g h l y
organized. This intercellular m a t r i x is a pro-
tein solution. O n e of the chief properties of
MYOFASCIAL STRUCTURES 31
protein solutions is their response to changes
i n t e m p e r a t u r e — t h e y w i l l b e f l u i d (sol) i n
w a r m e r t e m p e r a t u r e s , t h i c k (gel) i n c o l d e r
temperatures. This type of solution is called
a c o l l o i d ; g e l a t i n , f o r e x a m p l e , is a c o l l o i d .
W h e n an area of t h e b o d y is n o t stimulated
by movement, the underlying chronic muscu-
lar t e n s i o n ( h o l d i n g p a t t e r n ) c u t s o f f c a p i l l a r y
circulation to t h e area. Blood circulation
n o r m a l l y provides h e a t as well as nutrients
and waste removal. As capillary circulation
decreases, t h e colloid m a t r i x c h a n g e s state
f r o m sol t o g e l , a n d its c o n s i s t e n c y b e c o m e s
m o r e glue-like, trapping c o n n e c t i v e tissue
fibers i n t o a n o n - m o v i n g m a t t e d m a s s . A s
w e h a v e d e s c r i b e d , fibers p r o l i f e r a t e w h e r e v e r
t h e r e i s t i s s u e stress. T h e r e s u l t i n g m a s s o f
t h i c k e n e d m a t r i x a n d increased fiber m a s s
can be palpated as an unmoving, painful
thickening.
This kind of buildup can be reversed by t h e
intervention of manipulative or movement
techniques. T h e i m m e d i a t e effect is to modify
the physical nature of the matrix. T h e ensu-
i n g g r e a t e r f l u i d i t y o f m a t r i x g i v e s rise t o a
changed m o v e m e n t pattern and eventually
to a c h a n g e in fiber d e n s i t y a n d d i r e c t i o n .
M a n i p u l a t i o n appears to be a faster m e t h o d
of c h a n g e ; intelligent exercise and/or stretch-
ing also has t h e desired effect. In either case,
an improved positioning with respect to t h e
gravity line is essential to a c h a n g e in fiber
density.
T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue m a t r i x is an i m p o r -
t a n t factor in tissue resilience. W h e r e t h e
matrix is t h e primary factor in a h o l d i n g pat-
tern, it c a n be palpated as a glassy m a s s . T h i s
is o n e of t h e m o s t t r o u b l e s o m e types of tissue
restriction. It is generally close to t h e b o n e
a n d is usually difficult to influence toward
renewed movement. Some c o m m o n examples
are areas u n d e r t h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e o r k n o t s
j u s t a l o n g t h e s p i n a l v e r t e b r a e (at t h e s p i n o u s
processes). T h e s e are places t h a t are o f t e n very
sore as well as tight. O t h e r sore places, closer
32 THE ENDLESS WEB
t o t h e b o d y s u r f a c e , t e n d t o b e w h e r e large
m u s c l e masses cross e a c h o t h e r or attach to
bone (Fig. 8-8).
We describe the c o n c e p t of joints in more
d e t a i l l a t e r (see S e c t i o n 2 2 ) , b u t i t s h o u l d b e
mentioned now that between each of the
m a n y a r t i c u l a t i o n s o f t h e s p i n a l c o l u m n (as
well as in a n y j o i n t of t h e b o d y ) t h e r e is fluid
that is similar in c o m p o s i t i o n to t h e intercel-
lular m a t r i x . As b o n e s articulate, t h e y are n o t
in direct c o n t a c t with e a c h other. T h e y have
fluid b e t w e e n t h e m . B o n e s " f l o a t " i n r e l a t i o n -
ship to e a c h other. As t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
compresses around the spinal c o l u m n , the
fluid c a p s u l e s b e c o m e l o n g e r a n d t h i n n e r ,
p u s h i n g t h e v e r t e b r a e f a r t h e r a p a r t (Fig. 8-9).
T h e spinal c o l u m n is l e n g t h e n e d by a c o m b i -
nation of the narrower coiling of the connec-
tive tissue a n d t h e pressure of t h e c o m p r e s s e d
fluid b e t w e e n b o n e s .
This is a n e w picture of physical structure.
Here t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue is t h e supportive
aspect of t h e structure. B o n e s are spacers,
serving to position a n d relate different
areas o f t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue. B o n e s are n o t
t h e supporting structures of t h e body; t h e
E
;Levator
'scapulae m.
Trapezius m.
A-
/Supraspinatus m.
B der (acromion).
C
D .Latissimus
dorsi m.
F scapula (often especially intractable).
c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e serves t h i s f u n c t i o n . M u s -
cles, in this m o d e l , provide t h e source a n d
direction of m o v e m e n t energy. Muscles exe-
cute movement.
In t h e classically taught picture of t h e
body, b o n e s are t h e supporting structures.
However, b o n e s do n o t t o u c h . It is thus
impossible for t h e m to support t h e b o d y the
w a y a t a b l e is s u p p o r t e d by its legs. S u p p o r t
in a m o v i n g structure is very different f r o m
s u p p o r t in a s t a t i c s t r u c t u r e , s u c h as a h o u s e .
S u p p o r t i n a m o v i n g s t r u c t u r e arises f r o m t h e
organization and arrangement of the connec-
tive tissues. W h e n we speak of a m o v e m e n t
b e i n g supported, we are describing t h e a c t i o n
o f o p p o s i n g a n d b a l a n c e d tissue g r o u p s . T h e
r e c i p r o c a l , b a l a n c e d p l a n e s o f c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue s u p p o r t b o t h m u s c l e a n d b o n e b y t h e i r
elastic capability.
A s i n t h e s p i n e , all j o i n t s s h o u l d l e n g t h e n
w i t h m o v e m e n t a s t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
w r a p s a n d s u p p o r t s t h e j o i n t c a p s u l e . For
this t o h a p p e n , t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue m u s t b e
r e s i l i e n t . T h i s r e s i l i e n c e i s felt a s e a s e ; i n p h y s -
iological terms, it is described as t o n e . An
increase in c o n n e c t i v e tissue resilience is o n e
of t h e goals of w a r m u p before exercise.
T h e concept of physical support of move-
m e n t is simplified if we t h i n k in terms of the
c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d rather t h a n in terms of
Figure 8-8
These fascial dumpings are the common "sore
places" that we complain about.
(A) The trapezius as it crosses the tip of the shoul-
(B) The trapezius as it crosses the scapula below
the scapular spine.
(C) The interaction of the levator scapulae and the
supraspinatus at the upper medial point of the
(D) The interaction between the trapezius and
latissimus dorsi at about the lumbo-dorsal hinge.
(E) The attachment of the levator scapulae to the
base of the occiput.
(F) The pad created by the latissimus dorsi at the
lumbosacral junction.
 MYOFASCIAL STRUCTURES 33

m u s c l e m o v e m e n t . Physical a c t i o n alters t h e resilient, either generally or locally, h o l d i n g

shape of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d t h r o u g h -
out t h e structure, creating greater c h a n g e
where m o v e m e n t originates and rippling into
more attenuated change farther away from
t h e origin of m o v e m e n t . B o n e s are spacers,
like t h e m e m b e r s o f a g e o d e s i c d o m e . A s i m -
plified m o d e l i s a t e n t , w h e r e t h e t e n t p o l e i s
held upright by the balanced tension between
r o p e s o n b o t h sides.
W e t e n d t o have a n easier t i m e e n v i s i o n i n g
support from below from a base such as t h e
e a r t h or a c h a i r . S u p p o r t in a l i v i n g , m o v i n g
b o d y c o m e s f r o m above as well as f r o m below.
T h e h e a d a n d t h e fingertips are as m u c h a
part o f t h e s u p p o r t s t r u c t u r e a s are t h e t o e s .
Adequate length in the neck and adequate
lift i n t h e h e a d a r e e s s e n t i a l t o t h e m o v e m e n t
integrity of t h e b o d y as a w h o l e .
W h e n t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d is n o t
Figure 8-9
The figure to the right shows the lengthening that
occurs with spinal movement as connective tissue
more closely wraps the joint. Notice that the con-
nective tissue fibers change direction, becoming
more vertical as the spinal column elongates.
patterns b e c o m e habitual. There is a c o n c o m i -
t a n t loss o f range o f m o v e m e n t a n d o f energy.
M a n y p h y s i c a l t h e r a p i e s a d d r e s s t h i s loss o f
ability. T h e Rolfing i n t e r v e n t i o n is t h e o n e we
k n o w b e s t . B y w o r k i n g t o e n h a n c e t h e resili-
e n c e of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue bed, Rolfing
reeducates the b o d y toward an improved
relationship to the gravity line.
B o t h Rolfing a n d m a s s a g e m i g h t b e classi-
fied a s d i r e c t i n t e r v e n t i o n t e c h n i q u e s . S h i -
atsu, acupuncture, a n d reflexology act by
releasing energy t h r o u g h t h e c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue. O t h e r therapies work t h r o u g h retraining
m o v e m e n t , e i t h e r p a s s i v e l y (Trager m e t h o d )
or actively, or by a c o m b i n a t i o n of active a n d
passive (Rolfing M o v e m e n t work, Alexander
work, Feldenkrais Functional Integration).
Exercise that is properly d o n e also t o n e s a n d
l e n g t h e n s c o n n e c t i v e tissue. S o m e forms of
exercise, s u c h as yoga, t'ai chi, a n d swim-
m i n g , are b y design activators o f c o n n e c t i v e
tissue t o n e . Poorly d o n e exercise a n d exercis-
ing w h e n exhausted, however, have an oppo-
site e f f e c t o n c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e , c a u s i n g i t t o
harden and contract.

Lumbar vertebrae

Anterior
Interspinous
longitudinal'
ligament
ligament

Intervertebral,
disc' tigamentum
flavum
Vertebral
body*
(centrum) ^Spinous
process

Posterior
•longitudinal
ligament

Transverse,
process

Ventral Dorsal-
NINE
Movement and Gravity
W h e n a n y part o f t h e b o d y m o v e s , t h e entire
b o d y responds. We always m o v e f r o m a base
o f s u p p o r t . Ideally, w h e n w e sit, m o v e m e n t
is initiated f r o m t h e part of t h e pelvis t h a t is
resting o n t h e chair. W h e n m o v i n g forward,
t h e pelvis rocks forward, t h e pubic b o n e drops
slightly toward t h e sitting surface, a n d t h e
t a i l b o n e is e l e v a t e d o f f t h a t s u r f a c e (Fig 9-1).
T h e m o v e m e n t is like a spring. It starts at t h e
pelvis a n d is quickly t r a n s m i t t e d t h r o u g h t h e
b o d y u p t o t h e h e a d a n d d o w n t o t h e feet.
T h i s falling-forward m o t i o n takes o n l y sec-
o n d s ; i t i s t h e first p a r t o f a n y f o r w a r d m o v e -
m e n t . A s f o r w a r d m o t i o n starts, t h e p e l v i s
widens, h o w e v e r slightly. T h e r e is an increase
in t h e space across t h e sacroiliac j u n c t i o n
and a widening at the pubic b o n e (pubic
s y m p h y s i s ) . As a result, t h e h i p b o n e s (gene-
rally c o n s i d e r e d relatively i m m o v a b l e ) also
widen.
In walking, we push off from the ground
u s i n g t h e j o i n t s i n t h e f o o t (Fig. 9-2). T h i s
i n i t i a t e s m o v e m e n t i n t h e first s p l i t - s e c o n d ;
m o v e m e n t is t h e n transmitted to the ankle.
Above t h e ankle, t h e shin b o n e c o m e s for-
w a r d w h i l e t h e h e e l b o n e slides b a c k w a r d ,
thereby increasing the horizontal space in the
foot as well as t h e vertical space b e t w e e n foot
and ankle. O n c e again, this is m o v e m e n t by
lengthening. As the shin b o n e c o m e s forward,
t h e r e m a i n d e r of t h e b o d y is propelled for-
ward. Ideally, t h e resulting m o v e m e n t is
literally a falling forward of t h e w h o l e b o d y
—unless s o m e part of the b o d y is held back.
In walking, and particularly in running,
there is a great i m p a c t on t h e foot. T h e spaces
between the bones of the foot widen and
lengthen as the foot comes in contact with
the ground; they narrow and arch as the foot
lifts u p . N o t o n l y i s t h e r e l i n e a r e x t e n s i o n i n
the joints of the bones going from heel
to toes, there is also w i d e n i n g b e t w e e n t h e
b o n e s o f t h e f o o t t h a t are side b y s i d e . T h i s
c u s h i o n i n g o f m o v e m e n t acts b o t h t o protect
t h e structure a n d t o provide spring for t h e
n e x t step. T h e spring action c o m e s from
the lengthening provided as the connective
t i s s u e w r a p s a n d e x t e n d s t h e j o i n t s . T h e leg
becomes longer with m o v e m e n t . This is the
result of l e a n i n g forward f r o m t h e base of
support, allowing t h e leg to c o m e forward
b y l e n g t h e n i n g a t all o f its j o i n t s .
T h e hip j o i n t l e n g t h e n s as well as widens
w i t h m o v e m e n t . C o n n e c t i v e tissue wraps t h e
i n t e r f a c e b e t w e e n t h e h e a d o f t h e leg b o n e
(femur) and the hip socket (acetabulum), so
that t h e h e a d of t h e femur drops slightly out
o f t h e s o c k e t a n d d o w n w a r d . T h i s frees t h e
pelvis for t w o of t h e three m o v e m e n t s charac-
teristic of walking: rocking forward a n d back
a n d f r o m side t o s i d e . ( T h e t h i r d m o v e m e n t i s
swiveling, w h i c h results f r o m t h e f r e e d o m of
m o v e m e n t between sacrum and ilium).
A base of support is an u n m o v i n g surface
or structure f r o m w h i c h m o v e m e n t is initi-
a t e d . Ideally, all p a r t s o f t h e b o d y are free t o
respond to m o v e m e n t . But this is seldom
fully realized. M o r e often, in walking we con-
tract s o m e part rather t h a n fully l e n g t h e n i n g .
T h e leg m a y b e pulled u p against t h e h i p
joint; t h e hip m a y b e i m m o b i l i z e d a n d used
a s a n i n t e r n a l b a s e o f s u p p o r t . A s t h e leg i s
pulled up, t h e hip joint is compressed, short-
ened. T h e pattern of compression is trans-
mitted through the body. The most extreme
exaggeration of this kind of walking is the
goose step.
J o g g i n g a n d r u n n i n g are a m a t t e r o f l e a n -
ing farther forward t h a n w h e n walking; you
adjust your speed in walking or running by

h o w far y o u l e a n f o r w a r d . T h i s i s t h e h a r d e s t
t h i n g f o r u s t o d o ; w e t e n d t o resist l e t t i n g
everything go forward. We bring t h e shoul-
ders b a c k , t h e ass b a c k , a n d / o r h a n g o n t o o u r
s p i n e i n s o m e way, i n o r d e r t o h a v e a f e e l i n g
of control. A c o m m o n exaggeration of this is
holding the body tensely upright as we walk
o r r u n , w i t h t h e r e s u l t t h a t t h e legs a r e i n
front of t h e torso. T h e b o d y is t h e n literally
leaning backward.
In m o v i n g with length, as m o v e m e n t is
initiated, the joints open (lengthen) spon-
t a n e o u s l y a n d s e q u e n t i a l l y . First t h e a n k l e
opens. As it reaches the proper limit, the knee
joint opens, and so on. Insofar as the joints
are free t o o p e n , t h e m o v e m e n t o f w a l k i n g
ripples all t h e w a y t h r o u g h t h e b o d y t o t h e
head.
Figure 9-1
Rising
Figure 9-2
Walking.
MOVEMENT AND GRAVITY 35
M a n y people have a t e n d e n c y to carry their
h e a d s as t h o u g h t h e y were i n d e p e n d e n t struc-
tures. A m o r e workable image is to consider
t h e skull a s a g r e a t b i g v e r t e b r a s i t t i n g o n t o p
of t h e spine. This allows us to visualize h o w
t h e h e a d c a n m o v e " i n l i n e " w i t h t h e rest o f
the spine. W h e n the m o v e m e n t of the spine
is like a s p r i n g , t h e h e a d is its last s e g m e n t .
M o v e m e n t reverberates t h r o u g h the spine
a n d is released t h r o u g h m o v e m e n t of t h e
head. Holding anywhere in t h e structure
reflects m o s t strongly at t h e ends of t h e
body—between the ankle and heel and
between the head and neck. Holding can
also originate at t h e t o p e n d . Almost uni-
versally, w h e n w e t h i n k o f s o m e t h i n g o r
c o n c e n t r a t e i n a n y way, w e h o l d our h e a d s
rigidly. T h i s h o l d i n g t r a v e l s d o w n t h r o u g h
t h e s p i n e a n d i n t o t h e legs, r e s u l t i n g i n a n
audibly heavier tread. W h e n t h i n k i n g (which
is most of the time), we c o m e down heavily
on our heels.
In day-to-day living, we d o n ' t t h i n k about
m o v e m e n t in anatomical terms. A m o r e
accessible c o n c e p t has to do with controlled/
allowed m o v e m e n t . H o l d i n g t h e h e a d rigidly
on t h e n e c k is c o n t r o l . This kind of rigidity is
a l m o s t always a response to u n c o n s c i o u s fear:
w e a r e a f r a i d o u r h e a d w i l l fall o f f , w e a r e
afraid t h a t we will be so jarred t h a t our h e a d
will be seriously disturbed, we're a l m o s t afraid
our brains will get rattled. W h e n w e w a n t t o
focus on something, most of us automatically
f e e l a s t h o u g h w e h a v e t o h o l d still. W e a r e
afraid we will lose t h e i m a g e . T h i s h a p p e n s
w h e n we are visualizing i n t e r n a l l y ( l o o k i n g at
t h e pictures inside our head) as well as w h e n
we are seeing externally. It is a m i s u s e of our
abilities, yet it is very c o m m o n .
T h e other end of this c o n t i n u u m is allowed
movement. We can be confident that as we
walk our brains will n o t b e rattled. W e c a n
b e s u r e t h a t w e c a n see t h e w o r l d i n m o v i n g
p i c t u r e s . W e all are a b l e t o see a n d u n d e r s t a n d
36 THE ENDLESS WEB
movies even though they show a new frame
twenty-four times a second. We don't have
t o h o l d e a c h f r a m e still i n o r d e r t o see it. W e
don't need to control every aspect of our
m o v e m e n t ; w e n e e d t o let ourselves m o v e
a n d a b s o r b a n d let g o .
T h e idea that structure determines f u n c t i o n
i s a n o l d o n e . Ida R o l f g a v e e x p a n d e d m e a n -
ing t o t h e reverse c o n c e p t — t h a t f u n c t i o n
determines structure. Using the connective
tissue m o d e l , we c a n elaborate h o w parts of
t h e b o d y t h a t are a n a l o g o u s structurally (arms
a n d legs) a r e f u n c t i o n a l l y d i f f e r e n t . T h e differ-
e n c e lies i n t h e w a y t h e l i m b s a t t a c h t o t h e
trunk, reflecting a difference in n e e d a n d use.
I n t h e leg, a t t a c h m e n t s a r e p r i m a r i l y f o r l i n -
ear tracking. T h e r e is t h e n e e d for t h e leg to
go forward a n d b a c k a n d for t h e joints of t h e
leg t o m o v e w i t h o u t excess r o t a t i o n . I n t h e
arm and shoulder, t h e primary need is for
r o t a t i o n a s w e l l a s f o r m o b i l i t y i n all t h e
joints. T h i s is a very different kind of
lengthening.
T h e o r g a n i z a t i o n o f t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
i n t h e legs t h e r e f o r e n e e d s t o b e d i f f e r e n t
f r o m t h a t o f t h e a r m . I n t h e leg, i t i s s t r u c -
tured for stability; in t h e a r m , it is m o r e elas-
tic for flexibility. T h e shoulder blade a n d
c o l l a r b o n e ideally float freely in t h e c o n n e c -
t i v e t i s s u e , w h i l e t h e h i p b o n e a n d leg are
m o r e closely knit. In m a n y m o v e m e n t s , the
a r m a c t s i n r e s p o n s e t o t h e rest o f t h e b o d y
w h i l e t h e legs i n i t i a t e m o v e m e n t . T h e t ' a i
c h i c o n c e p t i s t h a t t h e a r m s f l o w like r i b b o n s
after m o v e m e n t has b e e n initiated in t h e
legs a n d p e l v i s .
We believe that there is a difference in t h e
c o m p o s i t i o n of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue in t h e
legs a n d t h e a r m s , p a r t i c u l a r l y i n s t r u c t u r e s
like t h e i n t e r o s s e o u s m e m b r a n e s o f t h e f o r e -
a r m a n d l o w e r leg. I n t h e a r m , t h e i n t e r o s -
seous m e m b r a n e needs to be elastic so that
the b o n e s can rotate with the multidirectional
u s e o f t h e h a n d . I n t h e l o w e r leg, t h e i n t e r -
osseous m e m b r a n e must be denser to support
t h e leg a n d c o n t r o l r o t a t i o n b e t w e e n t h e
two bones as the foot moves. T h e density
a n d a r r a n g e m e n t o f t h e fibers a s w e l l a s t h e
physical nature of t h e intercellular matrix
m u s t b e d i f f e r e n t , t o g i v e t h e n e c e s s a r y dif-
ference in compressor ability (resistance to
compression).
We exist in gravity—we have weight and
w e rest o n t h e s u r f a c e o f t h e E a r t h . I n g e n e r a l ,
a body's o n l y g o o d c h o i c e with respect to
g r a v i t y i s v e r t i c a l i t y . T h e c o n c e p t is, h o w e v e r ,
merely a useful abstraction. Because t h e body
is c o n s t a n t l y m o v i n g , there is rarely static
verticality.
Bodies also d o n ' t m o v e straight forward.
E v e r y g e s t u r e i s o n a d i a g o n a l , a n d t h e s e diag-
o n a l s are b a l a n c e d . It is this b a l a n c e a m o n g
c r o s s - m o v e m e n t s t h a t c r e a t e s f u n c t i o n a l ver-
t i c a l i t y i n t h e m o v i n g b o d y . For e x a m p l e , i n
walking, o n e leg a n d h i p c o m e forward t o -
gether with the opposite shoulder and arm
w h i l e t h e o t h e r leg a n d h i p w i t h t h e o p p o s i t e
arm and shoulder balance backward. There is
always this kind of reciprocal m o v e m e n t tak-
ing place a r o u n d t h e central axis of t h e body.
Turning the b o d y is initiated from the base
of support which, in walking, is mediated
t h r o u g h t h e feet. T h e r e must therefore be
e n o u g h elasticity of action at t h e ankle joint
and between the foot b o n e s to allow not only
for b e n d i n g at t h e j o i n t but also for rotation
so as to m o v e quickly and smoothly from
o n e side t o t h e other.
W i t h s o m e c a u t i o n , w e use t h e a m b i g u o u s
word " c o r e " for t h e body's central axis. It is
a n o t h e r u s e f u l a b s t r a c t i o n ; t h e r e i s n o struc-
tural correlate for this core. T h e b a l a n c e d
diagonals of the limbs function best in c o m -
b i n a t i o n w i t h t h e free spring a c t i o n o f t h e
core. We have discussed the spring action of
the spine. T h e concept of a core includes both
spine (with head, sacrum, and coccyx) and
t h e viscera. There is reason to believe that the
c o n n e c t i v e tissue of t h e organs is also a part
of movement. This can be demonstrated in
 MOVEMENT AND GRAVITY 37

dissection a n d is visible in behavior. T h e

viscera themselves, t h e n , also h a v e a spring
action that helps to organize m o v e m e n t in
t h e b o d y as a w h o l e .
T h e literal c e n t r a l a x i s o f t h e b o d y t r a v e l s
through t h e viscera, n o t t h r o u g h t h e spine
(Fig. 9-3). A s t o m a c h a c h e , a h e a r t s p a s m ,
hemorrhoids, a s t h m a — a l l deflect t h e b o d y
from verticality as m u c h as or m o r e t h a n
a m u s c l e s p a s m or a r o t a t e d v e r t e b r a . F u n c -
t i o n a l l y , t h e n , t h e v i s c e r a are i n c l u d e d i n
t h e c o r e s t r u c t u r e a n d are a d e t e r m i n a n t o f
verticality.
Even w h e n the primary m o v e m e n t is
straight forward, such as walking across an
u n i m p e d e d floor, t h e j o i n t s o f s u p p o r t i n t h e
b o d y still n e e d t o b e f r e e t o r o t a t e s l i g h t l y .
T h e clearest e x a m p l e of this (and t h e largest
rotation in walking in a straight line) is in t h e
connection between the sacrum (the base of
t h e spine) and t h e two b o n e s o f t h e hip. T h e
sacrum remains relatively stable as t h e two
hip bones rock with each m o v e m e n t of the
leg. T h e m o v e m e n t i s a l m o s t like a figure
eight, absorbing a n d a c c o m m o d a t i n g t h e Figure 9-3
swivel a c t i o n a s o n e leg a n d t h e n t h e n e x t Central axis of the body.
r e a c h e s t h e floor. ( T h i n k o f M a r i l y n M o n r o e
o n h e r w a y a c r o s s t h e floor. T h i s i s a n e x a g - b e c o m e s f u n c t i o n a l l y lighter. T h e muscles o f
geration, b u t it is graphic.) the back of the neck and the shoulders can
W h e n w e a r e s t a n d i n g m o r e o r less still, t h e n start t o r e l a x .
i f w e are i n a l i g n m e n t , o u r w e i g h t i s c o m f o r t - T h e c o n c e p t of gravity is particularly
a b l e a n d w e n e e d less e f f o r t t o k e e p o u r s e l v e s appropriate to a m o v i n g body. The b o d y
u p r i g h t . I n s t a n d i n g still, t h e c o n c e p t o f i n m o t i o n i s still a l i g n e d — t h e h e a d i s i n l i n e
weight is a g o o d w a y of analyzing structure. w i t h t h e shoulders, t h e shoulders are i n line
T h e classic e x a m p l e h a s t o d o w i t h t h e posi- with the a b d o m e n , the a b d o m e n is in line
t i o n o f t h e h e a d . I f t h e h e a d i s t o o far f o r w a r d w i t h t h e pelvis, t h e pelvis is in line w i t h t h e
— t h a t is, i f t h e c h i n o r f o r e h e a d i s l e a d i n g t h e k n e e s — n o m a t t e r h o w far o r i n w h a t d i r e c -
rest o f t h e b o d y — t h e n i t i s n o t s u p p o r t e d b y tion the body leans. T h e exception is the o n e
the neck. It is cantilevered. Since the head leg t h a t i s forward t o p r e v e n t t h e b o d y f r o m
weighs somewhere between ten and fifteen falling. W h e n t h e leaning b o d y is in align-
p o u n d s , w e m u s t t h e n use t h e large m u s c l e s m e n t , this forward foot is directly under the
in t h e back of t h e shoulders a n d n e c k literally h e a d (Fig. 9-4). T h e s u p p o r t f o r t h e h e a d i s
to hold o n t o our heads. As soon as the head t h e forward foot. Gravity t h e n acts t h r o u g h
is m o v e d b a c k i n t o a p o s i t i o n w h e r e it is the b o d y in the w h o l e space that it occupies,
centered on and supported by the neck, it a broad base b e t w e e n t h e t w o feet.
38 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 9-4
Walking.
In l o o k i n g at t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue arrange-
m e n t in dissections of h u m a n bodies, we
n o t e d t h a t there was s e l d o m a linear (vertical
or horizontal) arrangement of connective
t i s s u e fibers o n t h e s u r f a c e o r d e e p w i t h i n
the body. T h e fibers tended to run diagonally
across t h e b o d y . For i n s t a n c e , we saw a h e a v y
c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f f i b e r s g o i n g f r o m o n e side
o f t h e c h e s t a c r o s s t o t h e o p p o s i t e side o f
the a b d o m e n and down to the opposite hip.
Fascial crisscrosses seen in dissection s e e m to
relate to t h e n o r m a l rotations in a m o v i n g
body. W h e n crisscrosses h a v e h e a v y c o n c e n -
t r a t i o n s of fat a n d gristle, this is t h e excessive
response of a b o d y that is n o t in alignment.
M a n y of these padded oblique angles can be
s e e n o n t h e s u r f a c e o f t h e b o d y . T h e y are u s u -
a l l y f o l d s , f r e q u e n t l y f o l d s t h a t p e o p l e refer t o
a s fat t h a t t h e y c a n ' t g e t rid o f . B u t t h e y a r e
actually heavier b a n d s of c o n n e c t i v e tissue,
usually a response to a b n o r m a l rotation of
the b o d y in m o v e m e n t . In an aligned body,
o b l i q u e fascial structures are n o t r a n d o m .
T h e y are n e c e s s a r y for n o r m a l m o v e m e n t .
T h e o b l i q u e s o n t h e f r o n t o f t h e b o d y are
in balance with those on the back.
Seen from the front, a well-aligned person
s h o u l d a p p r o a c h s y m m e t r y , b u t w e are n e v e r
entirely s y m m e t r i c a l . For o n e t h i n g , t h e
placement of the organs is asymmetrical.
Further, it seems possible that differences in
brain function engender asymmetrical move-
m e n t preferences resulting in structural asym-
m e t r y . T h e s e n o r m a l d i f f e r e n c e s are s l i g h t
a n d , ideally, i t i s p o s s i b l e t o v i s u a l i z e h o r i -
zontal lines through the body.
T h e r e is a further m e a s u r e of proper align-
m e n t . This is the relationship of the deep to
t h e m o r e superficial structures, t h e b a l a n c e
b e t w e e n surface tissue a n d tissue t h a t is close
to t h e b o n e . This is visible in t h e surface
contour. W h e r e there is excessive knotting
or flabbiness, there is this kind of surface-to-
deep tissue i m b a l a n c e .
W h e n i n n e r a n d o u t e r s t r u c t u r e s are i n
b a l a n c e , t h e tissue h a s w h a t we call proper
t o n e , m u c h t h e way a violin string that is
i n p e r f e c t t e n s i o n h a s p e r f e c t p i t c h . All t h e
w o r d s w e u s e t o d e s c r i b e t i s s u e t o n e are s u b -
j e c t i v e — t h e y have to do w i t h personal experi-
e n c e r a t h e r t h a n o b j e c t i v e s t a n d a r d s . Yet g o o d
t o n e is s o m e t h i n g we all r e c o g n i z e . It is a
springiness to t h e t o u c h and suppleness in
movement.
Vertical integrity a n d g o o d t o n e are our
measures of a properly aligned body. W h a t
g e t s i n t h e w a y o f t h i s i d e a l s t r u c t u r e ? For Ida
Rolf, t h e b a l a n c e o f t h e p e l v i s w a s p a r a m o u n t .
S h e f e l t t h a t e v e r y s e s s i o n i n R o l f i n g h a s a s its
ultimate goal the creation of better balance in
t h e pelvis. This has to do with t h e relations of
the hip b o n e (ilium), the sacrum, and the
lower back (lumbar) vertebrae. These relations
are n o t s i m p l e . T r o u b l e — p a i n , awkwardness,
stiffness, heaviness—is a product of misalign-
m e n t (rotation) of any one of these elements
with respect to another. In the pelvic region,
t h e h i p b o n e c a n b e r o t a t e d i n its r e l a t i o n t o
t h e s a c r u m o r t h e leg b o n e . T h e sacrum c a n
be rotated with respect to the lumbar spine
or the tailbone or the hip bone. There may be
further rotations between individual lumbar
vertebrae.

W h e n w e speak o f t h e rotation o f b o n e s
w i t h r e s p e c t t o e a c h o t h e r , w e are t a l k i n g
about the " h o m e " position of the b o n e . This
is the position that the b o n e returns to w h e n
i t i s a t rest. I n m o v e m e n t t e r m s , t h e r e s t r i c -
t i o n w o u l d b e n o t i c e a b l e a s a loss o f r a n g e o f
m o v e m e n t . All o f t h e s e i m b a l a n c e s b e t w e e n
b o n e s are m a i n t a i n e d b y t h e s o f t t i s s u e — m u s -
cle, l i g a m e n t , c o n n e c t i v e tissue. T h e d i s c o m -
f o r t w e feel arises f r o m o u r a w a r e n e s s o f s o f t
tissue t e n s i o n r a t h e r t h a n b o n e i m b a l a n c e .
Rotation is a c o m b i n a t i o n of tilting a n d
swiveling of b o d y parts, creating i m b a l a n c e s
in the vertical a n d horizontal planes. Here we
e n c o u n t e r an interesting difficulty in translat-
ing f r o m t h e visual to t h e verbal. Seen in pro-
file, e x c e s s i v e p e l v i c tilt t h r o w s o f f t h e v e r t i c a l
l i n e . S e e n f r o m t h e f r o n t (or t h e b a c k ) , a p e l -
v i c tilt t h r o w s o f f t h e h o r i z o n t a l l i n e a c r o s s
t h e body. Images are t w o - d i m e n s i o n a l ; t h e
body is three-dimensional. The combination
of vertical a n d horizontal tilting in t h e b o d y
is w h a t we c a l l r o t a t i o n , a spiral t w i s t .
There is a welter of t e r m i n o l o g y used to
describe t h e various types of rotation of t h e
p e l v i s / s a c r u m / l u m b a r spine area. T h e y are
precise as diagnostic tools, but u n f o r t u n a t e l y
t h e y t e n d to confuse t h e situation for m o s t
of us. Diagnosis attempts to identify t h e m o s t
p r o m i n e n t aspect of a problem. We a n d our
d o c t o r s say, "I h a v e a l o r d o s i s ( s c o l i o s i s ,
kyphosis)." But these terms tend to lock the
b o d y i n t o a static picture. W h a t we n o t i c e so
o f t e n is t h a t rotations are n o t static, t h e y d o n ' t
stay p u t . For e x a m p l e , t h e d a n c e r w i t h t o o
c o n c a v e a l u m b a r curve in standing will o f t e n
show an exaggerated c o n v e x curve in sitting.
W h a t are t h e s e t e c h n i c a l t e r m s , a n d h o w
do t h e y relate to our c o n c e p t of b o d y align-
m e n t ? Seen f r o m t h e side, lordosis is an exag-
geration of the n o r m a l curves of the spine.
(There seems to be no medical t e r m i n o l o g y
f o r a b a c k t h a t i s t o o flat, e v e n t h o u g h t h i s
can create a lot of mischief.) Seen f r o m t h e
MOVEMENT AND GRAVITY 39
f r o n t or b a c k , s c o l i o s i s is a s i d e w a y s S - s h a p e d
b e n d in the spine, w h i c h should be m o r e or
less s t r a i g h t i n t h i s v i e w .
Scoliosis a n d lordosis are clinical t e r m s
that identify spinal exaggerations. In using
t h e terms, we speak as t h o u g h t h e i m b a l a n c e
were solely or m o s t l y c o n f i n e d to t h e spine.
But a scoliosis is manifestly an i m b a l a n c e of
t h e b o d y a s a w h o l e . A r m s , legs, h e a d , p e l v i s ,
a n d rib c a g e are all p a r t o f t h e a b e r r a t i o n . W e
c a n ' t e v e n say t h a t t h e spine is w h a t is h o l d -
ing the body in the scoliotic posture. Our
e x p e r i e n c e as Rolfers is t h a t w h e n we release
t h e t i s s u e o f a r m s o r legs o r r i b c a g e , t h e s p i n e
starts t o u n w i n d . C o n v e r s e l y , t h e s p i n e w i l l
n o t u n w i n d u n t i l e x t e r n a l structures are given
greater range of m o v e m e n t . So we prefer to
speak of curvatures of t h e b o d y as a w h o l e
rather t h a n curvatures of the spine.
T h e r e are o t h e r f a c t o r s i n v o l v e d i n i d e a l
structural vertical a n d horizontal a l i g n m e n t .
F o r e x a m p l e , if a p e r s o n w i t h a f a i r l y b r o a d
pelvis stands w i t h his feet t o o close together,
he's obviously n o t going to be in easy bal-
a n c e . He'll have to t i g h t e n s o m e part of his
body to keep himself upright—grabbing with
t h e toes, locking his knees, tightening t h e
buttocks, and/or contracting the shoulders.
If his feet are slightly farther apart, t h e y c a n
b a l a n c e t h e b r o a d p e l v i s . T h e t w o legs a r e
f u n c t i o n a l l y a unit, a base for e v e r y t h i n g
above t h e m . Adequate width and depth of
t h e body, as well as free range of m o t i o n ,
are all a p a r t o f e v a l u a t i o n o f s t r u c t u r e .
The h u m a n body is obviously an enclosed
system. We exist w i t h i n t h e circumference of
our skin a n d fascia. T h e h e a d is t h e opposite
e n d of a t e n s i o n line f r o m t h e feet. Proper
length and extension within that circumfer-
e n c e allows for adequate t o n e t h r o u g h o u t .
This leads us b a c k to t h e circular c o n c e p t
that we have talked about in reference to
other aspects of balance. Cause a n d effect
in the body b e c o m e interrelated.
TEN
Body Contour
W h e n we look at the contour of the whole
b o d y , w e c a n see i t a s a m a p o f t h e u n d e r l y i n g
structures as t h e y affect t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
bed. Muscles expand and contract in response
t o d e m a n d . Habits lay d o w n pads, s o m e t i m e s
c o n t a i n i n g fatty accumulations. T h e position
o f b o n e s w i t h i n m u s c l e a n d c o n n e c t i v e tissue
controls the direction of m o v e m e n t . Volition,
habit, a n d self-image shape the connective
tissue, w h i c h in t u r n supports a n d restricts
the activity of muscle, b o n e , and other func-
tions such as circulation, breathing, and
digestion. T h e result is a person's s h a p e .
The contour of the body is based on con-
nective tissue. As it interacts with b o n e s a n d
m u s c l e s , t h e s e soft tissues are t h e p r i m a r y
determinant of body shape. This is in contrast
t o t h e u s u a l artist's c o n c e p t i o n o f m u s c l e
anatomy as determining the outline of the
body. Body shape is therefore affected by the
holding patterns that we have described.
Figure 10-1
Body contour tells us a lot about the condition of
the underlying connective tissue and its potential
for movement. Here are photographs of three very
different body types. Intuitively we have expecta-
tions of how these bodies will move.
A p h o t o g r a p h of a b o d y s h o w s s h a d o w s
a n d h i g h l i g h t s t h a t c a n be seen as hills a n d
v a l l e y s (Fig. 10-1). T h e r e are areas w h e r e t h e
t i s s u e b u l g e s a n d areas w h e r e i t a p p e a r s t o b e
h e l d d e e p . H i g h l i g h t s (hills) c o r r e s p o n d t o
t h i c k e n e d pads of tissue b e t w e e n skin and
b o n e ( a n d / o r m u s c l e ) . T h e s e p a d s are o f t e n
m a d e up of fatty tissue in association with
f i b r o u s c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e . T h e s h a d o w s (val-
leys) a p p e a r t o b e a r e a s w h e r e s k i n a l m o s t
sticks to b o n e ( a n d / o r m u s c l e ) . W h a t is creat-
ing these adhesions seems to be a compacted
b e d o f c o l l a g e n fibers m i x e d w i t h i n t e r c e l l u l a r
m a t r i x i n its gel s t a t e .
B o t h o f t h e s e modifiers o f c o n t o u r reflect
t h e w a y t h e b o d y i s u s e d . H e a v y fat a n d c o n -
n e c t i v e t i s s u e p a d s are v i s i b l e i n areas t h a t
h a v e b e e n u n d e r t e n s i o n for a lifetime. T w o
p a d s t h a t are p r e s e n t i n a l m o s t all b o d i e s are a
v e r y h e a v y t h i c k e n i n g a t t h e b a s e o f t h e skull
a n d a heavy pad at t h e base of the spine, over
t h e t o p o f t h e b u t t o c k s (Fig. 10-2). M u s c l e s
a r e o v e r u s e d i n t h e s e t w o a r e a s . T h e large,
b r o a d m u s c l e a t t h e b a s e o f t h e skull (trapez-
ius) i s i n c o n s t a n t p a r t i a l c o n t r a c t i o n t o s u p -
port a forward head. T h e upper margin of the
gluteus m a x i m u s habitually contracts to hold
 BODY CONTOUR 41

t h e p e l v i s rigid. C h r o n i c t e n s i o n h a s r e s u l t e d
in a h e a v y pad on t h e b o d y surface.
I n d e n t a t i o n s are likewise visible in areas
that have b e e n u n d e r t e n s i o n for a lifetime.
T h e b o n e appears to be right at t h e i n d e n t e d
surface, just u n d e r t h e skin. Actually, t h e
b o n e lies u n d e r several layers o f t o u g h e n e d
c o n n e c t i v e tissue. T h e skin sticks to t h e leath-
e r y (or glassy) c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e . O n t h e o t h e r
h a n d , where t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue layer over
b o n e is in good t o n e , t h e skin c a n m o v e freely
over b o n e a n d tissue. We never actually t o u c h
b o n e in palpating t h e body. There is always a
c o n n e c t i v e tissue l a y e r o f g r e a t e r o r lesser
c o m p l e x i t y b e n e a t h t h e skin.
C o n t o u r is idiosyncratic e v e n at birth. In a
detailed dissection on t w o stillborn infants,
there was a considerable difference in m u s c l e
development. In one, the musculature of the
b o d y was relatively undeveloped, while in t h e
o t h e r t h e pattern was well defined a n d visible
Figure 10-3
This is a photograph of a dissection of a stillborn
baby at term. The heavy pad of fat over the
gluteal region was a thick mass of connective tis-
Fat& sue containing fat. Note the similar padding across
"connective the shoulders and up into the neck.
tissue pad

d o w n to t h e tiniest muscle. However, t h e pat-

terns of c o n n e c t i v e tissue padding in t h e t w o
.Trapezius b a b i e s w e r e i n m a n y w a y s s i m i l a r (Fig. 10-3).
m.
In b o t h , there was a heavy pad of fibrous c o n -
nective tissue across t h e upper posterior bor-
Erector der o f t h e large h i p b o n e s , crossing over a n d
spinae
m. tying the hip bones to the sacrum. There were
Fat& also pads of fatty c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e t w e e n
-.connective t h e legs ( b e t w e e n t h e r e g i o n o f t h e a n u s a n d
tissue pad
t h e genitals). These pads were thick, s o m e -

.Gluteus w h a t like a diaper b e n e a t h t h e skin. T h e pres-

maximus m. ence of this padding at birth would indicate
t h a t it is a n o r m a l part of b o d y c o n t o u r . It is
only w h e n it is overdeveloped and thickened
t h a t it b e c o m e s a p r o b l e m .
We tend to think that heavy muscle is good
Figure 10-2 a n d that the more a muscle is developed, the
Fat and connective tissue pads. better off we are. Overdeveloped m u s c l e s l o o k
42 THE ENDLESS WEB
impressive, b u t t h e y t e n d t o reduce free range
of m o v e m e n t . This is because the pumped
muscle is contracted, resulting in compression
a n d s h o r t e n i n g at t h e joints. For b a l a n c e , a
heavy muscle needs another equally heavy
m u s c l e t o o f f s e t its c o n t r a c t i v e n e s s . W h e r e
there has b e e n m o r e persistent effort at m u s -
c l e b u i l d i n g o n o n e side o f t h e j o i n t t h a n t h e
other, t h e j o i n t torques (twists).
A bodybuilder w h o conscientiously works
o n all o f t h e m u s c l e s c a n a c h i e v e a b a l a n c e o f
tightness around individual joints. This bal-
a n c e is based on partial c o n t r a c t i o n ; it will be
functional as long as t h e program of exercise
is m a i n t a i n e d . But w h e n such a person walks,
he or she ends up with a kind of waddle. T h e
leg i s n o t able t o l e n g t h e n o u t o f t h e j o i n t
Proportionately
small head
Short neck
Arms pulled
into shoulders
Shortened
torso
Arms go wide
Legs pulled
into pelvis
Legs go
wide
Figure 10-4
The muscle development of this body looks
impressive, but that muscle bulk is a major
impediment to freedom of movement.
a n d therefore c a n n o t m o v e straight forward
a n d b a c k w a r d (Fig. 10-4). W h e r e b o d y b u i l d -
ing is c o m b i n e d with stretching and body
a w a r e n e s s (e.g. y o g a ) , i t i s s o m e t i m e s p o s s i b l e
to maintain adequate freedom of movement
in the joints along with development of the
muscle mass.
A reasonable a m o u n t of bodybuilding
is a good thing, creating t o n e and strength.
T o o m u c h of a g o o d t h i n g in this case causes
restriction and exacerbates preexisting habit-
ual distortions. Excessive d e m a n d on a b o d y
part always brings out whatever c o m p e n s a -
t i o n s or restrictions already exist in t h e part.
This is true for p u m p i n g iron, working out
on m a c h i n e s , r u n n i n g or jogging, or ballet.
Unless there is modification of t h e exercise to
a c c o m m o d a t e individual idiosyncrasies, there
will e v e n t u a l l y b e p r o b l e m s . I n a d d i t i o n , c h a l -
l e n g i n g w o r k o u t s are generally associated
w i t h exercising past t h e p o i n t of efficiency.
This is where most of the mischief occurs. It
is virtually impossible n o t to create chronic
a n d / o r acute injury w h e n repeatedly exercis-
i n g i n a n e x h a u s t e d s t a t e . O u r a d v i c e i s t o let
pleasure be your guide. How m a n y people
have you seen smiling while running?
T h e c o n c e p t s o f c o n t o u r a n d posture over-
l a p a n d b l e n d i n t o e a c h o t h e r . B o t h are t h e
result of habitual h o l d i n g patterns. Posture is
apparent in t h e static p h o t o g r a p h as overall
b o d y balance or imbalance. From t h e front,
w e see i m b a l a n c e w h e n o n e s h o u l d e r i s
higher t h a n the other, o n e arm longer than
t h e o t h e r , o n e side o f t h e h i p c a n t e d u p w a r d ,
o n e knee tending more in or out. From the
side, w e h a v e already m e n t i o n e d t h e devia-
tions f r o m vertical such as the head forward,
shoulders up or r o u n d e d , chest depressed,
pelvis tipped forward or tucked back.
O n e of t h e great d e t e r m i n a n t s of posture
i n t h e b o d y i s t h e p s o a s m u s c l e . Its c o n n e c -
t i v e t i s s u e r a m i f i c a t i o n s are e s p e c i a l l y i m p o r -
tant. T h e psoas myofascia is interwoven with
t h e fascia o f t h e muscles o n t h e inside o f t h e

pelvis a s w e l l a s w i t h t h e d i a p h r a g m f a s c i a .
I n t h e g r o i n a r e a , j u s t t o t h e side o f t h e p u b i c
b o n e , the direction of t h e psoas changes. This
allows it to act as a k i n d of pulley. T h e psoas
tendon attaches to the femur at the top of the
inner thigh and is thus c o m m o n l y bound up
w i t h t h e fascia o f t h e l o n g e r m u s c l e s g o i n g
d o w n t h e leg.
W h e n the psoas is habitually contracted,
all k i n d s o f p o s t u r a l a n d f u n c t i o n a l d i f f i c u l -
ties c a n arise. T h e p s o a s c a n b e t o o s h o r t , t o o
wide, t o o narrow, t o o flaccid. Moreover, e v e n
t h o u g h centrally located in the body, it is
a b i l a t e r a l m u s c l e . T h e t w o sides a r e r a r e l y
s y m m e t r i c a l i n t o n e , p l a c e m e n t , a n d size. A
physically asymmetrical psoas t h e n leads to
l u m b a r r o t a t i o n s a n d p e l v i c tilts (Fig. 10-5).
A c c o r d i n g t o Ida Rolf, t h e p s o a s i s o n e o f
the most significant muscles of the body. It
maintains body structure a n d b o d y relation-
s h i p s (Fig. 10-6A and 6B). T h e p s o a s o r i g i -
nates along t h e upper l u m b a r spine; for part
o f its l e n g t h i t r u n s a l o n g t h e f r o n t s u r f a c e o f
t h e l u m b a r v e r t e b r a e . Its o r i g i n i s i n c l o s e
proximity to the two tabs of the diaphragm
called t h e crura; t h r o u g h these n e i g h b o r s , t h e
psoas c a n involve t h e respiratory pattern. It
diagonally traverses t h e cavity of t h e pelvis,
a n d i n s e r t s b y a t e n d o n s h a r e d w i t h t h e ilia-
c u s ( t h e i l i o p s o a s t e n d o n ) i n t o t h e lesser t r o -
c h a n t e r of t h e femur. T h e iliacus lines t h e
i l i u m , t h e large b o n e o f t h e p e l v i c b a s i n .
S t r u c t u r a l l y , t h e p s o a s is a b r i d g e b e t w e e n
u p p e r b o d y a n d legs.
"If a b o d y is n o r m a l , t h e psoas should
e l o n g a t e d u r i n g f l e x i o n a n d fall b a c k t o w a r d
the spine. This prevertebral support ensures
l e n g t h i n t h e l u m b a r s p i n e a s a w h o l e , irre-
spective of general b o d y position. W i t h t h e
psoas f u n c t i o n i n g in this n o r m a l pattern,
lengthening with every m o v e m e n t of flexion,
t h e l u m b a r v e r t e b r a e c a n n o t slip i n t o t h e
compression and misalignment that is the
beginning of t h e bad lower back. A deterio-
rated psoas, glued d o w n as it crosses t h e
BODY CONTOUR 43
pelvic b ri m, chronically flexes t h e b o d y at
t h e level of t h e groin, so t h a t it p r e v e n t s truly
erect posture."*
T h e preferences o f t h e psoas are n o t obvi-
o u s a t b i r t h . T h e y start t o s h o w w h e n t h e legs
adjust to bearing weight, as t h e child crawls
a n d starts t o s t a n d u p . Nevertheless, m u s c u l a r
imbalances do exist in t h e n e o n a t e . As we
h a v e said, c h i l d r e n a r e b o r n w i t h m o r e d e v e l -
oped muscle in back t h a n in front. At about a
year old, in order to walk, t h e child has s o m e -
h o w to solve the p r o b l e m i n h e r e n t in this
muscular a n d c o n n e c t i v e tissue i m b a l a n c e .
O n e fairly c o m m o n s o l u t i o n i s t o o v e r u s e t h e
psoas, pulling the lumbar vertebrae forward.
This is the origin of the typical big-bellied
baby look.
I m m a t u r e b o d y patterns f r e q u e n t l y persist
*Ida P. Rolf, Rolftng: The Integration of Human Structures
(New York: Harper & Row, 1 9 7 7 ) , p. 1 1 0 .
Lateral pelvic tilt
Psoas
' longer lax
Psoas shortened;,
pulls pelvis up
Figure 10-5
A physically asymmetrical psoas leads to lumbar
rotations and pelvic tilts.
44 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 10-6A
This masterly drawing by John Lodge has been
taken from Ida Rolf's book on Rolfing. It shows the
iliopsoas and its associated muscles.
into adulthood. T h e y intensify to pervade the
b o d y a n d t h e personality o f t h e adult. Start-
ing with the work of W i l h e l m Reich,* there
has b e e n t h e t e n d e n c y t o classify characteris-
tic b o d y postures in clinical terms. Reich clas-
sifications were hysteric, psychotic, schizoid.
T h e basis for these types is considered to be
b o d y a r m o r i n g , w h i c h is w h a t we call h o l d i n g
patterns. Psychological treatment of character
a r m o r i n g is designed to release these patterns.
We prefer n o t to classify physical habits in
psychological terms. Our assumption is that
*See W i i l h e l m Reich, Character Analysis (New York:
N o o n d a y Press, 1 9 9 0 ) , p. 7 2 .
the psychological pattern tends to change
as t h e physical structure is able to evolve.
On t h e other h a n d , physical culture experts
a t t e m p t to m o d i f y structural patterns by
building up muscle mass. A familiar example
are all t h o s e e x e r c i s e s d e s i g n e d t o " t i g h t e n
t h e t u m m y . " It is our c o n t e n t i o n that it is
n o t effective to shorten t h e belly muscles to
m a t c h the tight back muscles. We believe that
n o a m o u n t o f s i t - u p s will i m p r o v e a s t r u c t u r e
w h o s e k e y is a c o m p u l s i v e l y t i l t e d p e l v i s .
Moreover, no physical p r o b l e m exists in iso-
lation, so we c a n n o t ameliorate structure by
f o c u s i n g o n o n e s y m p t o m . For e x a m p l e , t h e r e
are t w o typical h o l d i n g patterns reinforcing a
b e l l y t h a t sticks o u t . O n e i s a d e p r e s s i o n o f
t h e rib a r c h ( c o s t a l a r c h ) . T h e o t h e r i s a n
i m m o b i l i t y at the groin (inguinal) region.
T h e s e start t o d e v e l o p i n t h e s m a l l c h i l d . T h e y
t o o a r e e x a c e r b a t e d a s t h e c h i l d starts t o w a l k .
B o t h of these patterns would be reinforced
r a t h e r t h a n c o r r e c t e d w i t h i m p r o p e r sit-ups.
A n o t h e r e x a m p l e of a c o m m o n postural
set i s f o c u s e d a t t h e b a s e o f t h e n e c k ( s e v e n t h
c e r v i c a l v e r t e b r a ) . A t its e x t r e m e , t h e h e a d i s
p u s h e d v e r y far f o r w a r d . T h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e s
are so h i g h t h a t it a l m o s t looks as t h o u g h
t h e y are p u s h i n g t h e h e a d forward, cantilev-
ering it out over t h e chest. A variation of this
pattern is often seen in older w o m e n and
m e n . T h e " d o w a g e r ' s h u m p " i s t h e result o f
creating an excessive pad at the base of the
neck.
Like t h e folds of a curtain, w h e n t h e h e a d
is forward, everything in t h e b o d y appears to
h a n g from the base of the neck. There is no
way this posture can be corrected by simply
"holding your head u p . " It is too hard to hold
y o u r h e a d up; y o u will stop t h e effort as s o o n
as your attention is deflected from bettering
your posture. To get t h e n e c k straight, you
m u s t exert c o n s t a n t effort to pull against
d e p r e s s e d ribs a n d c o l l a r b o n e . Y o u m u s t p u s h
 BODY CONTOUR 45

against h u n c h e d or rounded shoulder blades.

E v e n a s s u m i n g y o u c o u l d d o all t h a t , t h e r e
are f u r t h e r h o l d i n g p a t t e r n s all t h e w a y d o w n
to t h e feet.
Rolfers h a v e b e e n t a l k i n g a b o u t t h e
way people use their structures inefficiently,
squandering their energies and working
against themselves. H o w can an efficient b o d y
b e d e s c r i b e d ? Rolfers like t o t a l k i n t e r m s o f
vertical and horizontal planes. T h e y evaluate
the body in terms of the logic of m e c h a n i c s
and draw lines t h r o u g h t h e b o d y in t h e
mind's eye. T h e total b o d y tissue—bone,
muscle, and especially c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e —
acts together to create t h e structure t h a t gives
t h e s e i m a g i n a r y l i n e s . T h e s e l i n e s are m o r e
a p p a r e n t i n a b o d y t h a t i s still, b u t b o d y
workers learn to evaluate t h e u n d e r l y i n g
structure of a m o v i n g body.
T h e goal, t h e n , is n o t so m u c h to achieve
perfect vertical a n d horizontal structure lines
in a body. Rather it is to free t h e soft tissues so Figure 10-6B
A chronically short psoas will have its greatest
that t h e b o d y c a n m o v e freely b y b a l a n c i n g
impact on the groin, forcing the pelvis down in
t h r o u g h planes t h a t are h o r i z o n t a l a n d verti-
front. There is a concurrent loosening of the nor-
cal. Our goal is to h a v e j o i n t s m o v e as t h o u g h mal t o n e of the rectus abdominis. One very com-
they were in line. mon result is lordosis and a pot belly.
ELEVEN
Emotions and the Fascial Web
Body Awareness and Response Patterns
As children, we are taught almost everything
w e d o i n life, a n d y e t i t i s t a k e n f o r g r a n t e d
t h a t w e k n o w h o w t o u s e o u r b o d i e s . It's
assumed that we n e e d to learn h o w to use
our brains, but presumably using our bodies
i s d o i n g w h a t c o m e s naturally. N o o n e gives
us i n f o r m a t i o n on h o w to create balance or
change physical problems.
W h e n a c h i l d starts to walk, it is no l o n g e r
an o b j e c t to be carried a r o u n d (however lov-
ingly). It is b e c o m i n g independent in the
w o r l d , t a k i n g c h a r g e o f its o w n l i f e . J u s t t h e
f a c t t h a t t h e b a b y i s u p o n t w o legs i n s t e a d o f
d o w n o n all f o u r s s e e m s m i r a c l e e n o u g h . I t
w o u l d b e g i l d i n g t h e lily t o t r y t o i n s t i l l f o r m ,
even t h o u g h this would be the best time to
s h o w a c h i l d h o w t o u s e its l e g s .
I m a g i n e , f o r a m o m e n t , a b a b y ' s first s t e p s .
T h e r e i s u n s t e a d i n e s s i n t h e f e e t a n d legs,
accompanied by attempts at balancing with
t h e a r m s . W h e n t h e b a b y w a s c r a w l i n g o n all
fours, security lay in keeping t h e back steady
and pushing off with the hands and knees.
W h e n there is unsteadiness in walking, the
baby again attempts to control with arms
a n d k n e e s a n d b y h o l d i n g t h e s p i n e rigid.
W h e n adults h o l d a child to help it walk,
they generally hold under the armpits or by
the hands. This again reinforces the pattern
of c o n t r o l l e d shoulders to stabilize walking.
T h i s persists as t h e h o l d i n g p a t t e r n of t h e
adult (Fig. 11-1).
M o s t h o l d i n g p a t t e r n s are related t o e m o -
t i o n a l fear, l a c k o f t r u s t . R e a s o n a b l e c a u t i o n
and attempts at control by the infant as it
learns to walk can be retained as m o v e m e n t
patterns in t h e adult. T h e adult is n o t afraid
of losing b a l a n c e a n d falling, but as t h e adult
walks, h e / s h e u n c o n s c i o u s l y restimulates
t h o s e early fears. I n W i l l i a m J a m e s ' f a m o u s
d i c t u m , "I d o n ' t r u n b e c a u s e I am afraid;
I am a f r a i d b e c a u s e I r u n . "
M o v e m e n t patterns express personality
p a t t e r n s a s w e l l a s v i c e v e r s a . Fear m a n i f e s t s
as a g e n e r a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c in all a s p e c t s of
t h e individual's identity—in body, e m o t i o n ,
e n e r g y , m i n d . T h e t r u e n a t u r e o f fear (lack
of t r u s t ) is t h a t it is a s i g n a l to p a y a t t e n t i o n .
Yet we h a b i t u a l l y m i s i n t e r p r e t it as a s i g n a l to
fight or flight. Even in t h e case of a b o d y part
t h a t h u r t s w h e n i t i s m o v e d , fear i s m o r e
a p p r o p r i a t e l y a s i g n a l f o r c a u t i o n . It s h o u l d
not cause us automatically to tighten that
a r e a . T h e m o r e w e t i g h t e n it, t h e m o r e i t will
hurt. This "natural" reaction has an outcome
t h a t i s t h e r e v e r s e o f o u r i n t e n t i o n . T h e fear
o f b e i n g u n s t e a d y p r e c i p i t a t e s all sorts o f
unconscious modifications—locked neck,
g r a b b e d t o e s , s u c k e d - i n ass, h e l d s h o u l d e r s ,
c l e n c h e d j a w s . T h e s e a r e all i n r e s p o n s e
t o o u r fear o f b e i n g u n a b l e t o c o n t r o l o u r
m o v e m e n t or are d o n e to avoid ridicule or
embarrassment.
Integrated m o v e m e n t centers around the
c o n c e p t of l e a n i n g forward so that gravity
r a t h e r t h a n e f f o r t i n i t i a t e s a c t i o n . For m a n y
p e o p l e , t h e s u g g e s t i o n t o l e a n o r fall f o r w a r d ,
instead of creating a relaxation response,
starts a p r o c e s s o f t i g h t e n i n g i n t h e b o d y .
T h e result is a g r a b b i n g p o i n t (or several).
This holding is unnecessary. The whole body
c a n b e i n a fluid s t a t e a t all t i m e s . T h e r e a s o n
s o m e o n e d o e s n ' t a l l o w h i m s e l f t o " f a l l " for-
w a r d i n t o m o v e m e n t i s t h a t h e d o e s n ' t trust
his structure.
O f t e n t h i s l a c k o f t r u s t starts w i t h a r a t i o n a l
fear. W h e n w e a r e s m a l l a n d l e a r n i n g t o w a l k
t o o early, w e c a n ' t l e n g t h e n t h e j o i n t s t o t h e

point where leaning forward is comfortable.
T h e c h i l d f i n d s s o m e w a y t o p u l l its b a l a n c e
b a c k . Later, i n t h e a d u l t , t h e s a m e k i n d o f
r e a c t i o n persists. T h i s i s p a r t i c u l a r l y e v i d e n t
in sports. In skiing, for e x a m p l e , it is essential
to lean forward. There is m o r e control in the
tips o f t h e skis, m o r e lift i n t u r n i n g , a n d less
c h a n c e o f falling d o w n o n steep o r b u m p y
slopes. T h e r e is also m o r e m o b i l i t y because of
a greater c o n t r o l in t h e knees. M o s t b e g i n n i n g
o r i n t e r m e d i a t e skiers, h o w e v e r , d o n o t l e a n
f o r w a r d . W h e n t h e y fall, t h e y g e n e r a l l y fall
b a c k w a r d . T h e y sit d o w n . T h i s i s t h e r e a c t i o n
we taught ourselves in c h i l d h o o d . T h e after-
the-fact e x p l a n a t i o n is t h a t we are afraid to
fall f o r w a r d b e c a u s e w e ' r e a f r a i d w e m i g h t h i t
our heads. Not true. We're m u c h m o r e likely
t o fall f o r w a r d o n t o h a n d s a n d k n e e s .
We're not taught to walk as children, and
we're n o t taught to breathe. T h e m o s t c o m -
m o n tendency of anyone frightened is to
hold his or her breath. An e x a m p l e is j u m p -
ing i n t o cold water. W i t h t h e initial s h o c k
of t h e cold, our t e n d e n c y is to gasp, to draw
the breath into the lungs and to hold it there.
The whole body tightens and is unable to
adjust to t h e coldness of t h e water. Letting
t h e breath out allows t h e b o d y to relax; t h e
w a t e r n o l o n g e r feels a s c o l d . S i m i l a r l y , w h e n
we experience physical pain, gasping and
h o l d i n g t h e b r e a t h are c o m m o n , b u t t h e y
o n l y serve t o r e t a i n p a i n .
Figure 11-1
EMOTIONS AND THE FASCIAL WEB 47
Ideally, a n y p h y s i c a l s e n s a t i o n c a n b e
experienced through the body the way a
s h i v e r g o e s f r o m t h e f e e t all t h e w a y t o t h e
crown of t h e head. Holding t h e breath is a
w a y o f s t o p p i n g t h a t p h y s i c a l flow. P e r h a p s
we do this because we don't want to experi-
ence the sensation or the emotion (emotions
are physically e x p e r i e n c e d ) . W h e n we are in a
state of fear or c a u t i o n , we usually try to stop
things so we can think about them, explain
t h e m , get ourselves c o m f o r t a b l e . This t o o is
w h e n we stop our breath; we have difficulty
maintaining our r h y t h m of breathing and
thinking at the same time.
As we h a v e said, r e s p o n s e p a t t e r n s t h a t are
repetitive a n d u n c o n s c i o u s tend to b e c o m e
c h r o n i c . In t h e case of t h e breath, w h a t we
see is a p a r t i a l h o l d i n g . M a n y p e o p l e h a v e a
stored reservoir of air in t h e lower part of t h e
chest; t h e lower ribs m o v e very little or n o t at
all. As a r e s u l t , t h e r e is a t e n d e n c y to b a r r e l or
r o u n d o u t in t h e lower chest. A s e c o n d area
w h e r e there is little breath activity is in t h e
u p p e r t i p o f t h e l u n g s . T h e ribs j u s t u n d e r t h e
collar b o n e s a n d h i g h u p inside t h e a r m p i t are
u n e x p l o r e d t e r r i t o r y — m o s t o f u s d o n o t feel
o r m o v e t h e s e t o p m o s t ribs. T h e tips o f t h e
lungs extend up to this region, so we should
b e able t o m o v e t h e s e ribs freely w i t h every
breath. Being restricted at t h e t o p a n d t h e
b o t t o m o f t h e rib c a g e , w e r a r e l y e x p e r i e n c e
a full b r e a t h .
48 THE ENDLESS WEB
O n e w a y t o e s t a b l i s h a full b r e a t h i s t o
concentrate on the exhale. As you come to
t h e e n d o f y o u r u s u a l e x h a l e , a l l o w m o r e air
to leave t h e lungs. This does n o t m e a n push-
i n g t h e air o u t w i t h t h e a b d o m e n , b u t r a t h e r
allowing t h e rib cage to relax, especially t h e
t o p m o s t a n d lowest ribs. Put y o u r h a n d s o n
y o u r l o w e r ribs j u s t a b o v e t h e a b d o m e n . Feel
t h e m o v e m e n t o f t h e s e ribs a s y o u b r e a t h e ,
concentrating on the exhale. The exhale
b e c o m e s t h e active part of t h e breathing
cycle; the inhale occurs spontaneously.
Holding t h e breath is a pattern m o s t of us
use to ward off u n w a n t e d feelings. To s o m e
e x t e n t , w e are t a u g h t t o h i d e e m o t i o n . For
example, exasperated parents sometimes do
almost anything to stop their children from
crying. T h e crying m a y b e reasonable. For o n e
t h i n g , i t i s a v e r y g o o d w a y o f l e t t i n g all t h e
air o u t o f t h e l u n g s , a n d i t i s a l s o a w a y o f
letting a physical problem work through the
b o d y . W h e n a c h i l d h a s t o s t o p its c r y i n g , i t
must tighten or cringe—tense up. Another
c o m m o n message to children is to stop that
feeling, stop t h a t activity, stop t h a t noise.
W h e n a child must stop doing something,
a r r e s t its m o m e n t u m , its o n l y r e c o u r s e i s
t o h o l d s o m e p a r t o f its b o d y — i t s b r e a t h o r
b a c k or jaw. T h i s is t h e m o m e n t (in a c h i l d
or adult) w h e n t h e e m o t i o n gets stored in
t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue.
Usually we don't k n o w that we're holding
our breath, any more than we know when we
m a k e other habitual gestures. They're u n c o n -
s c i o u s , a n d as J u n g says in h i s Collected Works,
" T h e u n c o n s c i o u s is really u n c o n s c i o u s . "
T h e s e responses are so h a b i t u a l t h a t t h e y ' r e
p a r t o f o u r s e l f - i m a g e , p a r t o f w h a t is. W e
don't learn t h e m the same way we learn to
read or to c o o k or to do algebra. We learn
by c o p y i n g our peers, our siblings, our elders.
Patterns that we have absorbed unconsciously
are harder t o c h a n g e . T h e y are m o r e i n g r a i n e d
i n our c h a r a c t e r s t h a n t h o s e t h a t are a b s o r b e d
knowingly, by conscious learning.
Evaluating bodies, we tend to focus on
the physical things that have gone w r o n g —
illnesses, accidents, ways we got pushed out
of s h a p e . T h i s is a h a b i t , a p o i n t of view, an
attitude that is shared by most people. In
general, we tend to take notice only w h e n
we're hurt. I k n o w about my ankle because
t h a t little twinge r e m i n d s me t h a t I n e e d to
b e c a r e f u l o f it. I t h i n k a b o u t m y s h o u l d e r
because it catches every time I m o v e my arm
in a c e r t a i n w a y .
Pain is o n e way the body c o m m u n i c a t e s
to us. We h a v e o t h e r kinds of physical aware-
n e s s , b u t t h e y t o o are u s u a l l y n e g a t i v e — w e
h a v e p o r t i o n s o f o u r b o d i e s t h a t w e d o n ' t like.
This is a different kind of c o m m u n i c a t i o n .
O n e is a direct message in terms of pain or
sensation; t h e other is an emotional message,
a judgment.
W h e n s o m e t h i n g h u r t s , w e first c h e c k t o
be sure t h a t n o t h i n g is injured or b r o k e n . If
there is no injury, we try to put t h e pain out
o f m i n d . I n a way, t h i s i s life s u p p o r t i v e . I f m y
a n k l e h u r t s a n d t h a t ' s all I t h i n k a b o u t , I ' m
n o t going to get m u c h d o n e . But there is a
problem. If I shut off sensation in my ankle
so I d o n ' t feel p a i n , I shut out o t h e r sensa-
tions f r o m my ankle as well. N o w I h a v e a
body image that doesn't include my ankle,
perhaps doesn't include my hip, and so forth.
My sense of vitality is diminished. T h e same
kind of process occurs w i t h respect to e m o -
tional pain.
People h u n c h their shoulders or hold t h e m
back in response to being told not to slump.
This kind of holding pattern puts the body
i n t o a p o s i t i o n t h a t is strained, t h a t is n o t
i n h e r e n t i n its o r i g i n a l p h y s i c a l d e s i g n . I t
results in a similar kind of d e a d e n i n g of
awareness. People are rarely aware of t h e
strain in their posture. Over t i m e , t h e strain
b e g i n s t o t e l l . A s w e a g e , w e feel all sorts o f
aches and creaks.
T h e n there is the chronic pain. Constant
low-level back pain is c o m m o n . This is often

t h e result o f a p r e c e p t t a u g h t t o t h e v e r y
y o u n g t h a t l i t t l e b o y s ( a n d girls) d o n ' t w i g g l e
t h e i r rear e n d s . E v e n w h e n t h e h o l d i n g p a t -
tern has originated in t h e child, t h e awareness
o f r e s t r i c t i o n a n d p a i n c a n start a t a n y a g e .
T h e s e r e s t r i c t i o n s arise f r o m g e n e r a l a t t i t u d e s
in t h e culture. T h e r e are also individual kinds
of contraction and holding.
(A personal note from o n e author: " O n c e ,
for e x a m p l e , w h e n I was w a l k i n g up o n e of
t h e s t e e p streets i n S a n F r a n c i s c o , m y k n e e
started to twinge. S o o n t h e pain was so severe
t h a t I felt I w o u l d n ' t b e a b l e t o r e a c h t h e n e x t
street corner. N o r c o u l d I find a c o n v e n i e n t
p l a c e t o sit d o w n . A n d t h e n I s u d d e n l y real-
ized t h a t i n t h e t e n s i o n o f t h e c l i m b a n d t r y -
i n g to get w h e r e I w a s g o i n g in a h u r r y , I h a d
b e e n h o l d i n g m y j a w c l a m p e d . W h e n I let m y
jaw relax, t h e k n e e pain w e n t away a n d I was
a b l e t o get u p t h e h i l l . " A m o v e m e n t c o n n e c -
tion between jaw and knee seems obscure, but
there it was. It is an e x a m p l e of t h e c o m m o n
phenomenon of how movement at one end
of the body constrains the other end, even
though the rationale behind the c o n n e c t i o n
is n o t clear at t h e m o m e n t . )
T h e sensation of pain is a signal t h a t s o m e -
thing is going on that isn't right. T h e m o r e
we're unaware of our bodies, t h e m o r e we
n e e d a g u i d e t o let u s k n o w h o w a n d w h e r e
t h i n g s n e e d t o get b a c k t o t r u e . U n f o r t u n a t e -
ly, w e u s u a l l y t h i n k o f p a i n a s t h e c a u s e o f t h e
problem. T h e n t h e "logical" response is to try
t o get rid o f t h e p a i n . T h e a r e a t h a t h u r t s i s
not necessarily t h e cause of t h e pain; t h e
body as a w h o l e is out of balance and o n e
place is taking t h e brunt of t h e strain. M o s t
of us h a v e a w e a k l i n k , a p l a c e t h a t t w i n g e s ,
aches, or contracts whenever we experience
stress. A l m o s t a n y e m o t i o n a l o r p h y s i c a l
t r a u m a will g i v e rise t o p a i n i n t h i s stress site,
even t h o u g h t h e t r a u m a is n o t to t h a t area.
We react as systems to a n y situation. A
blow, an e m o t i o n a l upset, whatever trouble
we get i n t o reverberates t h r o u g h t h e o r g a n i s m
EMOTIONS AND THE FASCIAL WEB 49
as a w h o l e . It simply gets stuck at our weak
link; this stoppage is the sensation of pain.
T h e cause, t h e initial event, is often unre-
l a t e d . For e x a m p l e , i f y o u b r e a k a l e g o r s p r a i n
a n a n k l e , c o m p e n s a t i o n sets i n a t t h e h i p a n d
b a c k t o f a v o r t h a t leg. A n y f u t u r e p a i n o r
p r o b l e m i n t h e leg, u n r e l a t e d t o t h e o r i g i n a l
accident, reinforces t h e initial c o m p e n s a t o r y
habit. In time it is impossible to determine
w h i c h is cause a n d w h i c h is effect. It is m o r e
accurate to describe physical problems in
t e r m s o f a r e a s o f a c u t e o r less a c u t e s e n s a t i o n .
Physical a n d e m o t i o n a l awareness are c o n -
n e c t e d . W e feel e m o t i o n s physically. I m a g i n e ,
for e x a m p l e , t h e characteristic shiver t h a t is
fear. A v a r i a t i o n o f t h i s i s t h e d e l i g h t e d t h r i l l
of terror in a h o r r o r m o v i e or on a roller
coaster. It is probably true that t h e physical
manifestation of e m o t i o n is a secondary p h e -
n o m e n o n , a response to the actual e m o t i o n .
And yet this response, this expression of the
e m o t i o n a l impulse, is part a n d parcel of the
e m o t i o n itself. H u m a n b e i n g s s e e m t o b e
feedback systems. There is an initial germ of
awareness. It is expressed intellectually, e m o -
t i o n a l l y , p h y s i c a l l y , o r all t h r e e , a n d t h i s t h e n
feeds b a c k i n t o t h e system t o b e e n h a n c e d ,
muted, redirected, etc.
The physical response to e m o t i o n is
t h r o u g h t h e soft tissue. T h e fascia is t h e e m o -
tional body. That's a metaphysical concept;
w e c o u l d c a l l i t m e t a - a n a t o m y . Ideally, f e e l -
i n g s a r e felt i n t h e t o t a l b o d y — e m o t i o n s
travel t h r o u g h t h e fascial w e b . W e t h e n in-
terpret t h e physiological sensation as anger,
affection, love, interest, a n d so forth.
Proprioception is t h e ability to sense
one's own physical being. Emotion and
energy also have a physical c o m p o n e n t t h a t
w e are i n c l u d i n g i n t h i s t e r m . I t i s t h i s p h y s -
ical p r o p r i o c e p t i o n t h a t w e i n h i b i t w h e n
e m o t i o n or e n e r g y or structural e v e n t s are
inconvenient. O n e such type of inhibition
is transferring awareness from o n e modality
t o a n o t h e r . For e x a m p l e , p e o p l e w h o d o n o t
50 THE ENDLESS WEB
wish to recognize that they have an e m o -
tional pain frequently transform it into phys-
ical pain, as in a t e n s i o n h e a d a c h e .
Our goal is to clarify t h a t w h i c h is physical
and to allow that w h i c h is emotional to be
seen as s u c h . It is always easier to deal w i t h
a s i t u a t i o n i n its o w n m o d a l i t y . P h y s i c a l p a i n ,
for e x a m p l e , is w h a t y o u feel w h e n y o u break
your arm. It is n o t appropriate to try to deal
with a broken arm in terms of your resent-
m e n t at the person w h o pushed you.
On the other hand, the reason your neck
can't straighten and lengthen m a y be because
of the shock of being continually bullied in
c h i l d h o o d . Physical w o r k will o n l y partially
open that problem unless there is recognition
that there m a y be an e m o t i o n a l origin. W h e n
w e c a n see e m o t i o n a l s i t u a t i o n s clearly, w e
are t h e n in a p o s i t i o n to m o v e t h r o u g h a n d
away from t h e m .
W h a t makes the pain seem physical is that
it does include a structural c o m p o n e n t . An
e m o t i o n a l l y held part of t h e b o d y b e c o m e s
rigid a f t e r b e i n g h e l d t i g h t l y o v e r y e a r s .
S h o u l d e r s t h a t are h u n c h e d f r o m fear are
difficult to distinguish f r o m shoulders t h a t
are h u n c h e d a f t e r a b a d fall. B o t h h a v e b e -
c o m e a part of t h e structure a n d part of t h e
physical m a k e u p of the body. Conversely,
it is hard n o t to experience a m i x t u r e of
depression and anxiety w h e n a bad back
o r a c h r o n i c h e a d a c h e flares u p .
Physical and e m o t i o n a l sensations overlap
and influence each other. It is important to
distinguish t h e m in terms of a choice of ther-
apy. I n t h e e x a m p l e o f t h e b r o k e n a r m , t h e r e
is a lingering fear ( e m o t i o n ) t h a t t h e a r m is
fragile. In physical fact, t h e h e a l e d break has
m a d e t h e a r m s t r o n g e r ; all t h a t r e m a i n s i s
t o let g o o f t h e e m o t i o n a n d m o v e t h e a r m
freely.
We have shown h o w a body functions and
s o m e o f t h e h i s t o r y o f it's g r o w t h . W e h a v e
" f l e s h e d o u t " t h e c o n c e p t o f a c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue b o d y a n d given images a n d descriptions
of h o w this concept c a m e into being and how
it works itself o u t in an actual physical body.
I n t h e n e x t s e c t i o n , w e use t h a t i n f o r m e d
perception to look at and analyze body
contour.
 PART THREE

Body Retinaculae
(Bands/Straps)
TWELVE
The Chest Band
Implications for Movement and Behavior
I n o r d e r t o feel a l i v e a n d c o m f o r t a b l e , w e
n e e d free flow, w h e t h e r we c a l l it a free f l o w
of energy or of m o v e m e n t . This freedom is
visible physically in b o d y c o n t o u r : it is possi-
ble to infer f r o m s o m e o n e ' s shape t h e state
of his or her energy a n d ease of m o v e m e n t .
The most obvious aspect of the body is
proportion. An example is the balance
between the top and b o t t o m halves of the
body. We o f t e n say t h a t a m a n ' s h e a d is t o o
small for his shoulders, t h a t a w o m a n ' s h i p s
are t o o w i d e , t h a t a kid's legs a r e t o o s k i n n y .
A s e n s e of p r o p o r t i o n is a m a t t e r of a e s t h e t i c
judgment; standards vary from o n e culture
to another.
Aesthetic proportion is o n e way of inter-
preting body contour. A silhouette outline
shows t h e hills a n d valleys o f t h e body. T h e
h i l l s refer t o b u l g e s a n d t h e v a l l e y s t o t i g h t
places where surface tissue appears stuck to
underlying tissue. Theoretically, an ideal b o d y
h a s a m o r e o r less s m o o t h c o n t o u r . W h e n
m u s c l e s are n o t b e i n g u s e d , t h e y s h o u l d b e
able to relax a n d thus create no m a r k e d
bulging. Muscles contract and thicken as
t h e y are u s e d ; a s t h e y r e l a x , t h e a r e a f l a t t e n s .
I n a n area t h a t d o e s n o t f l a t t e n , t h e r e a r e
often a c c u m u l a t i o n s of c o n n e c t i v e tissue a n d
fat t h a t h a v e b e c o m e c e m e n t e d i n t o p l a c e
over t h e muscle tissue.
Besides i n d i v i d u a l v a r i a t i o n s i n c o n t o u r ,
t h e r e are a l s o p a t t e r n s t h a t are m o r e o r less
c o m m o n t o all b o d i e s . T h e s e p a t t e r n s a p p e a r
a s s t r a p s — b a n d s t h a t w e see r u n n i n g h o r i z o n -
tally a r o u n d t h e body, a l m o s t like retaining
b e l t s h o l d i n g in t h e s o f t t i s s u e (Figs. 12-1 &
12-2). T h e s e a r e r e l a t i v e l y i n d e p e n d e n t o f t h e
m u s c l e a n a t o m y o f t h e body. T h e y are u n e x -
pected a n d u n e x p l a i n e d , b u t t h e y are visible
soft tissue structures. T h e c o n t o u r patterns
w e d i s c u s s i n t h i s s e c t i o n a r e a series o f s e v e n
such bands. As we describe these individually,
we talk m o r e about w h a t t h e y i m p l y about
b o t h m o v e m e n t and behavior.
Straps represent a f u n c t i o n a l c o n n e c t i n g
structure t h r o u g h t h e b o d y w h e r e t h e r e are
no traditional anatomical connections from
f r o n t to b a c k . We describe t h e straps as b e i n g
just u n d e r t h e skin because t h a t is w h e r e we
see t h e m . A s t h e b o d y m o v e s , t h e y s e e m ,
h o w e v e r , t o g o all t h e w a y t h r o u g h a s w e l l
as a r o u n d t h e surface. T h e y m a y be visualized
as planes through the body.
T h e s e straps o n t h e s u r f a c e o f t h e b o d y a r e
similar in function to t h e armor of an arma-
dillo. T h e s e g m e n t a t i o n of the armor holds
e a c h p a r t rigid w i t h r e s p e c t t o its n e i g h b o r i n g
section while nevertheless permitting some
m o v e m e n t . Similarly, i n t h e h u m a n body, t h e
straps preserve e x t e r n a l structure, p r e v e n t i n g
too deep an infolding as the body bends. To
s o m e degree, this is probably an effective way
o f s h o r i n g o u r s e l v e s u p . I t i s a p a t t e r n w e see
i n all h u m a n b e i n g s .
S t r a p s s e e m t o arise i n m u c h t h e s a m e w a y
as tendons and ligaments, which they appear
to resemble in structure. T h e telltale sign of
t h e p r e s e n c e of a s t r a p is a f l a t t e n i n g or d e -
pression running horizontally through the
b o d y surface. It m a y be c o n t i n u o u s or inter-
rupted—like a dotted line. W h a t defines these
as restrictive b a n d s is their inflexibility; t h e y
break t h e flow of m o v e m e n t .
T h e m o s t obvious strap, evident i n a l m o s t
e v e r y o n e , is a h o r i z o n t a l depression in m i d -
chest, just b e l o w the nipples. Seen f r o m t h e
front, this is located at the junction of the
upper insertion of t h e rectus a b d o m i n i s
54 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 12-1
Body Retinaculae: The Seven Body Bands of the Torso
1. The lowest band in the torso (pubic band)
extends from the pubic bone in front across the
groin (which is thereby shortened), around the
hip bones (the greater trochanter of the
femur), and across the buttocks, ending at the
junction of the sacrum and coccyx.
2. The band across the lower abdomen
(inguinal band) is frequently more prominent in
men. It connects the two bony projections of
the pelvic bones in front (the anterior superior
spines of the ilia). It usually dips slightly down-
ward in front, like an inverted arch, resembling
an internal jock strap or chastity belt. Its lower
margin tends to include the inguinal ligament,
connecting the band downward to the region
of the pubic bone. This band extends laterally
along the upper margin of the large wings of
the pelvic bones (ilia), ending at the lumbo-
sacral junction.
3. The third band crosses the abdomen
(belly/umbilical band) and is perhaps the most
variable in location. It may cross at the umbili-
cus (sometimes creating a crease in the abdomi-
nal wall extending out on either side of the
umbilicus), or it may lie midway between the
umbilicus and the midcostal arch (tying
t o g e t h e r the two sides of the costal arch). In
either case, it will extend laterally to form an
arch across the abdomen to the lower ribs on
each side—particularly to the free tip of the
eleventh rib. It travels backward along the
lower ribs, ending at the junction of the tho-
racic and lumbar vertebrae.
4. The fourth band is in the area just below
the nipples (chest band) and is visually the most
apparent. It is usually a non-moving depressed
area on the chest; the skin seems glued down
onto the ribs and muscle. Laterally, it extends
muscle and the lower insertion of the pecto-
ralis m a j o r m u s c l e (Fig. 12-3). T h e b a n d is
slightly higher as it m o v e s around to t h e back
b e c a u s e t h e ribs c h a r a c t e r i s t i c a l l y a r e a n g l e d
downward in front. The back extension of
this strap seems to be t h e dorsal h i n g e , a
functional division of the chest (thorax). T h e
dorsal h i n g e is visible as a c h a n g e in m o v e -
m e n t pattern between upper and lower halves
along the lower border of the pectoralis major,
across the mid-lateral chest, and down the lat-
eral margin of the latissimus dorsi where it
begins to run parallel to the scapula toward the
arm. The strap appears to tie the lower tip of
the scapula to the back ribs and ends at the dor-
sal hinge of the spine. When this strap is pro-
nounced, there is not only a depressed mid-
chest, but an inability to expand the ribs side-
ways in breathing.
5. The fifth strap at the shoulders (collar
band) involves the clavicle and is part of the tis-
sue gluing the clavicle to the first and second
ribs in front. It can be felt as a pad of tissue just
below and deep to the collar bone (clavicle). It
extends laterally to the tip of the shoulder, with
some fibers fanning down into the armpit. The
strap continues toward the back on the inside
and outside of the upper border of the shoulder
blade (scapula), and ends at the junction of cer-
vical and thoracic vertebrae.
6. The area below the chin (chin band) is an
area of concentration of fibers and padding
which includes the hyoid bone and the base of
the jaw, passing just below the ear, and ending
where the base of the skull joins the first cervi-
cal vertebra (atlas).
7. The top band (eye band) is the most diffi-
cult to visualize. It originates on the bridge of
the nose, travels across the eye sockets and
above the ears, and ends at the back of the skull
just above the occipital crest (the bump at the
back of the skull).
Reprinted from Rolf Lines, The Journal of the
Rolf Institute, 1 9 9 5 , with permission.
NOTE: For the body retinaculae, we have used
the terms " b a n d " and "strap" interchangeably.
of the chest, hinging between the fifth and
s i x t h (or s i x t h a n d s e v e n t h ) t h o r a c i c v e r t e -
b r a e . T h i s d i v i s i o n o f t h e rib c a g e i n t o t w o
parts was apparent in our dissections. T h e
a n g l e o f t h e ribs c h a n g e d v i s i b l y a n d rela-
t i v e l y a b r u p t l y ; t h e q u a l i t y o f t h e t i s s u e dif-
fered as well.
I n f r o n t , t h e s t r a p starts a b o u t a n i n c h
a b o v e t h e l o w e r t i p o f t h e s t e r n u m . T h i s also

A B
Figure 12-2
Body Straps: (A) side view; (B) front view
d e f i n e s t h e c o n n e c t i o n f r o m o n e side o f t h e
body to the other. We tend to ignore this
right-to-left relationship across t h e s t e r n u m ,
yet it is an i m p o r t a n t o n e , reinforcing a n d
often c e m e n t i n g side-to-side variations in
m o v e m e n t . Because there is little m u s c l e
THE CHEST BAND 55
t i s s u e o v e r t h e s t e r n u m a n d ribs, i t i s e a s i e r
t o see w h e r e t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e h a s b e c o m e
glued to t h e b o n y surface.
T h e b a n d a t its d e e p e s t l e v e l i n v o l v e s
t h e u n d e r l y i n g ribs a n d t h e intercostal m u s -
c l e s , r e s t r i c t i n g full e x p a n s i o n o f t h i s p a r t o f
t h e rib c a g e i n b r e a t h i n g . S u p e r f i c i a l l y , t h e
m u s c l e s t h a t are visibly i n h i b i t e d in t h e i r
m o v e m e n t are t h e rectus a b d o m i n i s a n d t h e
56 THE ENDLESS WEB

pectoralis major. T h e rectus a b d o m i n i s spans

A
B
Figure 12-3
Mid-chest strap: (A) front view; (B) side view.
The arrows denote the major lines of force of the
muscles involved in the movement between pelvis
and arms. Ideally, movement flows through the
muscles in sequence. This flow is interrupted by
the mid-chest strap. Its location is defined by the
major lines of force of the muscles.
f r o m t h e p u b i c b o n e t o t h e m i d d l e ribs o f t h e
c h e s t . I t c r o s s e s t h e l o w e r m a r g i n o f t h e rib
c a g e ( c o s t a l a r c h ) a n d o f t e n a d h e r e s t o it.
In fact, there is a heavy t h i c k e n i n g on t h e
underside of the rectus a b d o m i n i s at the
costal arch, giving the appearance that the
m u s c l e e x t e n d s o n l y f r o m t h e b o t t o m part
o f t h e rib c a g e t o t h e p u b i c b o n e .
By anatomical design, relaxation of the
r e c t u s a b d o m i n i s a l l o w s t h e f r o n t o f t h e rib
c a g e t o lift. T h e a b d o m e n t h e n l e n g t h e n s
f r o m t h e p u b i c b o n e t o t h e ribs. T h e r e c t u s
a b d o m i n i s also provides vertical stability to
counterbalance the action of the long muscles
of t h e back. W h e n it is h e l d tightly, there is a
shortening between the mid-chest and the
p u b i c b o n e . T h e result is a folding in of t h e
a b d o m i n a l region a n d a depression at the
l o w e r m a r g i n o f t h e rib c a g e . T h i s i s t r u e
w h e t h e r t h e h o l d i n g is caused by a postural
h o l d i n g (sit-ups or a s u c k e d - i n b e l l y ) or a
structural h o l d i n g (stuck c o n n e c t i v e
tissue).
Immediately contiguous with the upper
a t t a c h m e n t of t h e rectus a b d o m i n i s is the
lower margin of the pectoralis major muscle.
T h i s a t t a c h e s a t t h e m i d d l e ribs, n e a r t h e ster-
n u m , traveling f r o m there t o t h e upper part
of the arm b o n e (humerus). W h a t we have,
t h e n , a t t h i s s u p e r f i c i a l s o f t t i s s u e level o f
t h e body, is a vertical pull f r o m t h e mid-ribs
d o w n w a r d a n d a diagonal pull f r o m t h e m i d -
ribs u p w a r d . T h e o v e r l a p o f t h e s e t w o pulls i s
at t h e s t e r n u m a n d includes t h e lower a n d
m i d d l e p a r t o f t h e rib c a g e . Ideally, e a c h o f
t h e s e t w o m u s c l e s i s s h e a t h e d i n its f l e x i b l e
e n v e l o p e of c o n n e c t i v e tissue, allowing it
t o s h i f t a s t h e b o d y m o v e s f r o m side t o side,
walks, etc. T h e m u s c l e tissue of t h e rectus
a b d o m i n i s a n d t h e pectoralis m a j o r is sepa-
rate, b u t their c o n n e c t i v e tissue forms a
continuous, segmented web, allowing the
m o v e m e n t o f o n e m u s c l e t o b e reflected i n t o
the other.
 THE CHEST BAND 57

T h e s u p e r f i c i a l m u s c l e a n d c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue p a t t e r n h e r e m a y be i m a g e d as a Y w i t h a
broad double base. M o v e m e n t is transmitted
vertically a n d diagonally across t h e chest.
W h e r e there is habitual restriction, t h e effect
on m o v e m e n t is progressive. W h e r e c o n n e c -
tive tissue i s o r i g i n a l l y o n l y l i g h t l y h e l d
down, bodily activity t h e n tends to drag t h e
margins of the two adjacent muscles closer
together, causing t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue to
thicken.
A s t h e strap c o n t i n u e s a r o u n d t h e s i d e ,
going toward t h e back, it crosses t h e upper
margin of t h e latissimus dorsi, a broad m u s c l e
a r i s i n g f r o m all t h e s p i n e s o f t h e v e r t e b r a e
from about T6 to the sacrum. Above, it nar-
rows i n t o a t e n d o n t h a t r u n s a l o n g t h e l a t e r a l
outside margin of t h e shoulder blade (scap-
ula). It ends in an a t t a c h m e n t to t h e a r m
bone (humerus). The attachments of the pec-
toralis m a j o r a n d t h e latissimus dorsi o n t h e
a r m are a d j a c e n t . T h e y c o u n t e r b a l a n c e e a c h
other and determine the openness of the
armpit. The Y form on the front of the body
(rectus a b d o m i n i s a n d pectoralis m a j o r m u s -
cles) is t h u s b a l a n c e d by a V f o r m ( l a t i s s i m u s
dorsi m u s c l e ) on t h e b a c k (Fig. 12-4).
T h e h o r i z o n t a l c o m p r e s s i o n t h a t w e are
calling a strap crosses f r o m m i d - s t e r n u m
a r o u n d to t h e side, overlapping t h e space
where the pectoralis m a j o r and the latissimus
dorsi m u s c l e s a p p r o a c h e a c h o t h e r . T h e s e
m u s c l e s s h o u l d b e free t o slip v e r t i c a l l y w i t h
r e s p e c t t o e a c h o t h e r , l e a v i n g t h e a r m full
range o f m o v e m e n t . W h e n t h e y are c a u g h t
up in a restriction, t h e a r m p i t is c o m p r e s s e d .
T h e strap h e r e i s v e r y m u c h like t h e b o d i c e
o f a dress w i t h a n E m p i r e w a i s t l i n e . A n o t h e r
image that comes to m i n d is the scaffolding
of the b o t t o m edge of a brassiere. T h e strap Figure 12-4
restricts lateral rib m o v e m e n t a s w e l l a s The " Y " of the front and the "V" of the back.
m o v e m e n t t o raise t h e a r m s .
F r o m t h e lateral m a r g i n o f t h e p e c t o r a l i s t h e ribs a n d t h e m u s c l e s o f t h e b a c k , a n d
m a j o r , t h e strap t h e n c r o s s e s t h e l o w e r t i p o f ends approximately at t h e dorsal h i n g e . W h e n
the scapula. It c o n t i n u e s across t h e b a c k of t h e strap is h e a v y a n d tight, it inhibits t h e
58 THE ENDLESS WEB
m o v e m e n t o f t h e s c a p u l a . Ideally, t h e s c a p u l a
is suspended a n d c a n " f l o a t " freely over t h e
ribs a s t h e a r m m o v e s . F o r e x a m p l e , w h e n
you reach the arm forward and up, the
scapula drops. As the reach continues, the
scapula t h e n floats upward. W h e n there is a
restriction by a band, neither the downward
nor the upward m o v e m e n t of the scapula is
possible without exertion and the recruitment
of e x t r a n e o u s m u s c l e (Fig. 12-5).
As t h e strap runs f r o m front to back, it
crosses over a n u m b e r of additional deeper
muscles as well as t h e superficial o n e s we
h a v e described. T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue asso-
c i a t e d w i t h all o f t h e s e h a s d i r e c t i o n a l p u l l s
that modify the horizontal quality of the
s t r a p . T h i s i s p a r t i c u l a r l y t r u e a t t h e sides.
T h e r e are pulls u p i n t o t h e armpit, d o w n
toward t h e lower lateral m a r g i n of t h e rib
cage, a n d t o w a r d t h e pelvis. T h e result is a
t o r q u i n g t h a t p u l l s t h e s t r a p a w a y f r o m its
main path around the chest.
This, then, is the physical description of
t h e mid-chest strap—the nipple binder. We
h a v e c o v e r e d its p a t h i n s o m e a n a t o m i c a l
detail t o s h o w t h e m u s c l e a n d c o n n e c t i v e
tissue p a t h w a y s by w h i c h it influences t h e
body. T h i s b r o a d effect is probably a reason
t h a t b r e a t h i n g d y s f u n c t i o n s are so widespread
and influence every aspect of the body.
H o w d o straps c o m e i n t o b e i n g ? T h e
reasons are generally m u l t i p l e a n d c u m u l a -
t i v e . First, r e s t r i c t i o n s t e n d t o set i n a s w e g o
through the challenges of growing up. They
a r e like s e e d s i n a p e a r l . S o m e t i m e w e s u c c e s s -
fully incorporate t h e m with m i n i m a l c o n n e c -
tive tissue disturbance. O t h e r times we grow
successive c o n n e c t i v e tissue layers to c u s h i o n
a n d protect ourselves from t h e irritation. T h e
seed m a y be physical or e m o t i o n a l in origin.
We h a v e described several scenarios of physi-
cal origin.
A s s o m e girls first b e g i n t o d e v e l o p b r e a s t s ,
they try to hide t h e m . T h e y cave in at t h e
sternum a n d h u n c h their shoulders, creating
stress a t t h e d o r s a l h i n g e . P u d g y a d o l e s c e n t
boys also c a n be uptight about nipples and
breast tissue, a n d t h e y h u n c h over for t h e
s a m e reason. An aberrant pattern takes h o l d
i n t h e b o d y w h e r e t h e r e i s t h e desire t o h o l d
d o w n , c o n t r o l , hide. C o n t r o l is really t h e
m o s t descriptive term here.
T h e r e are a limited n u m b e r of ways to
effect control in the body. W h i l e emotional
rationales underlying a n y given structure
vary, t h e p h y s i c a l h o l d i n g falls i n t o p a t t e r n s .
T h e s e p a t t e r n s a r e w h a t w e see a s s t r a p s . I n
m i d - c h e s t , t h e strap m a y b e caused b y a n
accident, by a desire to hide t h e breasts, by
a desire n o t to b r e a t h e , by t h e n e e d n o t to
l o o k d i f f e r e n t f r o m e v e r y b o d y else, o r b y res-
p i r a t o r y d i s e a s e . All t h e s e d i f f e r e n t c a u s e s
manifest in t h e b o d y as a similar pattern.
T h e c h e s t s t r a p ties i n w i t h t h e f a m i l i a r
g e s t u r e o f h o l d i n g t h e a r m s t o t h e side t o
guard t h e armpits. Armpits are sensitive a n d
t h e p r o t e c t i v e g e s t u r e i s s i m i l a r i n all i n d i v i d -
uals. As t h e strap b e c o m e s tighter a n d m o r e
f i r m l y e s t a b l i s h e d , d i f f e r e n t parts o f t h e b o d y
get drawn in. T h e pressure of hiding t h e
a r m p i t s r e i n f o r c e s t h e t i g h t n e s s o f t h e strap
a n d i n h i b i t s t h e l a t e r a l (side) e x p a n s i o n o f
t h e w h o l e t o p o f t h e rib c a g e .
F o r e x a m p l e , i n b a b y p i c t u r e s a t less t h a n
a year old, o n e child's shoulders were very
narrow and high, obscuring the neck. The
a r m s w e r e c l o s e l y p u l l e d i n t o t h e sides o f t h e
body, protecting t h e armpits. As this child got
to be about eight or nine, he went through
a period of b e i n g a "sulky c h i l d . " This gave
impetus to the h u n c h e d - u p physical pattern.
As an adult, his chest seemed too narrow in
p r o p o r t i o n t o t h e rest o f h i s b o d y . T h e e f f e c t
of b o d y w o r k was dramatic: his chest got four
c o a t sizes bigger. T h e b o d y w o r k d i d n ' t give
h i m t h e n e w chest; it merely allowed h i m
to use w h a t was there.
A m o r e e m o t i o n a l l y based way of express-
ing what we m e a n is that the blueprint of the
s t r u c t u r a l p a t t e r n starts i n t h e b a b y , b e c o m e s
 T H E C H E S T B A N D 59

Figure 12-5
This array of shoulder movements provides comparison of three very different body types. The positions of
the scapulae have been outlined. Notice the great differences in muscle recruitment at the elbow, neck, and
along the spine.
60 T H E E N D L E S S W E B
established as the character type, and t h e n
i s e m b e d d e d a s a n a t t i t u d e i n t h e a d u l t . It's
n o t s o m u c h t h a t t h e c o n t r a c t i o n s start i n
a n y o n e place a n d t h e n spread outward. T h e
pattern as a w h o l e is sketched in a n d t h e n
becomes reinforced and more pronounced
w i t h age a n d use. J u d g i n g f r o m t h e t w o babies
t h a t we dissected, t h e p a t t e r n is laid d o w n in
utero. As early as in t h e n e w b o r n , we have the
b e g i n n i n g s o f f i b r o u s c o n c e n t r a t i o n s . Later,
if aberrant t e n s i o n s are m a i n t a i n e d , these
b e c o m e like a b r o a d t e n d o n . T h e s t r u c t u r e
s o m e t i m e s looks like t e n d o n in dissection;
it certainly feels like t e n d o n u n d e r t h e skin.
But i n " n o r m a l " a n a t o m y n o t e n d o n s are
described in that location.
T h e restrictions inhibit our evolution to
an " u p r i g h t s t a n c e . " Shoulders get raised as
t h e chest sinks d o w n a n d t h e head c o m e s
f o r w a r d . O r t h e h e a d m a y c o m e f o r w a r d first,
a n d t h e o t h e r s f o l l o w . D e c i d i n g w h i c h i s first
cause is difficult a n d usually n o t necessary.
T h e b o d y has certain places where it can most
e a s i l y c o n t r o l its o w n m o v e m e n t . T h e s e c r e a t e
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c p a t t e r n s o f i n h i b i t i o n regardless
of cause.
T h e straps are n o t e x a c t l y t h e s a m e i n all
individuals. There is s o m e variation in place-
m e n t a n d shape. T h e strap is t h e structure as
a w h o l e . Individual variations pull it d o w n in
o n e place, tighten it in another. T h e attach-
m e n t s o f t h e strap, t h e differences i n e m p h a -
sis, m a y b e t h e d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n s o m e o n e
w h o is barrel-chested and s o m e o n e w h o is
very n a r r o w f r o n t - t o - b a c k a n d wide side-to-
s i d e . W e e m p h a s i z e a g a i n t h a t t h e strap i s
n o t a s t r u c t u r e p e r s e . It is a l o c a l c h a n g e
in the balance between fiber and matrix
organization within the total connective
tissue bed.
THIRTEEN
The Inguinal Band and the Structure and Function of
the Vertebral Column in Relation to the Bands

A n o t h e r visually o b v i o u s strap is w h a t m i g h t A
be called t h e chastity belt or i n g u i n a l strap
w h e n s e e n f r o m t h e f r o n t (Fig. 13-1). It is
a connection between the top front b o n y
p r o t u b e r a n c e s o f t h e h i p b o n e ( t h e ASIS o r
anterior superior spines of t h e ilia). This c o n -
Costal Rectus
n e c t i o n i s like a h a l f - m o o n s h a p e , c u r v i n g arch/ abdominus
m.
downward from these protuberances. The
rectus a b d o m i n i s m u s c l e inserts o n t h e p u b i c .Inguinal

b o n e so t h a t t h e strap crosses t h e lower part 'band

of this muscle. T h e strap b r o a d e n s across t h e Inguinal

ligament "
lower a b d o m e n . In m a n y people it includes
1

Pubic
n o t o n l y f a s c i a l fibers b u t fat d e p o s i t s a s w e l l . tbone

These c a n e x t e n d deep i n t o t h e pelvis, filling

the pelvic bowl.
T h i s k i n d o f fat i s a t y p e o f c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue. Its cells h a v e b e c o m e e n g o r g e d w i t h a n
a c c u m u l a t i o n of fat droplets. T h e r e is very
little i n t e r c e l l u l a r m a t r i x i n t h i s k i n d o f t i s s u e .
T h e fibers are c r o w d e d i n b e t w e e n t h e c e l l s .
Because of this lack of intercellular matrix,
t h e fat tissue h a s b e c o m e i n f l e x i b l e . I t i s B
therefore an effective inhibitor of energy
and movement.
T h e strap across t h e groin is particularly
apparent in people w h o perform constant
r e p e t i t i v e e x e r c i s e s s u c h a s sit-ups a n d l e g
lifts. G y m n a s t s , f o r e x a m p l e , t e n d t o h a v e
an almost horizontal line across t h e groin,
f o r m i n g a shelflike ridge in t h e lower a b d o -
m e n . T h i s c a n b e felt a s a t o u g h m a r g i n A.S.I.S.
halfway between the belly button and the Sacral
pad' , Inguinal
pubic bone. The a b d o m e n immediately above band

t h e ridge i s n o t i c e a b l y m o r e p l i a b l e , less rigid i Inguinal

ligament
to the touch. -.Pubic
bone
O n e o f o u r f r e q u e n t l a m e n t s is, " N o m a t t e r
h o w m u c h I d i e t , I n e v e r s e e m t o g e t rid o f
m y b e l l y ; i t still sticks o u t . " T h e b u l g e , h o w - Figure 13-1
ever, h a s n o t h i n g t o d o w i t h a n e e d t o d i e t . Inguinal band: Front and side views.
62 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 13-2 Figure 13-3
It is t h e b o d y ' s w a y of e s c a p i n g t h e restric-
tions resulting from tightness above (chest
strap) a n d t i g h t n e s s b e l o w (groin strap). Or
t h e tightness m a y b i n d at mid-belly; we talk
a b o u t a strap there in Section 15.
In general, t h e r e are t w o a b e r r a n t a b d o m i -
nal patterns, each with variations. O n e is the
individual whose lower belly is held in; his
back t h e n b e c o m e s taut and his upper belly
b u l g e s (Fig. 13-2). T h e o t h e r p a t t e r n i s t h e
person w h o t i g h t e n s t h e area b e t w e e n t h e
l o w e r m a r g i n o f t h e rib c a g e a n d t h e b e l l y
b u t t o n . Here, t h e upper a b d o m e n b e c o m e s
tight a n d t h e area b e l o w t h e belly b u t t o n
p r o t r u d e s (Fig. 13-3). W h i c h e v e r p a r t is b e i n g
held, t h e o t h e r m u s t of necessity stick out;
t h e tissue has to go someplace. N o t o n l y t h e
soft tissue b u t also b r e a t h needs space. People
breathe predominantly in the upper or lower
a b d o m e n . In either case, t h e h o l d i n g inter-
feres w i t h t h e f r e e f l o w o f b r e a t h , e n e r g y , a n d
movement.
T h e inguinal strap c o n t i n u e s a r o u n d t h e
sides o f t h e h i p s . I t s e e m s t o c r o s s just b e l o w
t h e u p p e r e d g e o f t h e h i p b o n e (crest o f t h e
ilium). This creates a t e n s i o n across the b o n e
a n d pulls t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue i n t o folds.
T h e s e folds c o m e i n t o b e i n g m u c h t h e way
pulling on a c o r n e r of a sheet creates deep
pleats in t h e fabric. Similarly, pulls across t h e
b a c k o f t h e u p p e r p e l v i s a n d t h e s a c r u m give
rise t o t e n d o n - l i k e s t r u c t u r e s a c r o s s t h e l o w e r
b a c k . T h e s e c a n feel l i t e r a l l y like s m a l l r o p e s
or cables under t h e skin. In s o m e individuals,
i t a l m o s t feels a s t h o u g h t h e s e r o p e s h a v e
k n o t s i n t h e m . T h e y f o r m a stressed c o n n e c -
tion across t h e upper margin of the sacrum
a n d t h e l o w e r l u m b a r v e r t e b r a e , t y i n g left
a n d r i g h t sides t o g e t h e r .
M o s t "lower back p a i n " appears to c o m e
from this region. These ropes tying together
t h e t h r e e b o n e s ( s a c r u m a n d t w o ilia), i n h i b i t
sacroiliac m o v e m e n t . This i m m o b i l i t y across
t h e sacrum is t h e m a j o r contributor to lower
b a c k s y n d r o m e . C h i l d r e n typically s h o w a lot
of m o v e m e n t across t h e sacrum. This m o v e -
m e n t o f t e n d i s a p p e a r s i n l a t e r life, p r o b a b l y
i n t h e t e e n s . W e all s e e m t o w a n t / n e e d t o
control pelvic m o v e m e n t .
T h e i n g u i n a l b a n d b l e n d s i n t o t h e fascial
and/or fatty pad normally present on the
s a c r u m . W h e n this is t o o thick, it adds to t h e
i m m o b i l i t y of t h e area. T h e b a n d thereby is
continued down to the tailbone (coccyx). In
d e s i g n , it r e s e m b l e s a j o c k s t r a p or d a n c e r ' s
belt. T h e b o t t o m part e x t e n d s d o w n b e t w e e n
t h e legs t o t h e V - s h a p e d b o n y b a s e o f t h e
p e l v i s . H e r e i t b l e n d s w i t h t h e fat a n d f i b r o u s
tissue t h a t is t h e n o r m a l filling of t h e space
b e t w e e n t h e legs ( b e t w e e n t h e c o c c y x , p e l v i c
rami, and pubic bone). W h e n the V of the
rami is compressed and too narrow, particu-
l a r l y i n m e n , t h i s t i s s u e c a n feel like c e m e n t
a n d i t o f t e n b e c o m e s a filler t h r o u g h t h e
w h o l e b a s i n o f t h e p e l v i s . T h u s straps are n o t
o n l y surface p h e n o m e n a b u t traverse t h e
body space.
 THE INGUINAL BAND AND THE VERTEBRAL COLUMN 63

T h e f r o n t o f t h i s b a n d i s e a s y t o see a n d
feel a n d i s m u c h t h e s a m e i n all p e o p l e ,
a l t h o u g h it varies in degree of t e n s i o n . In
back, in addition to t h e surface ropes t h a t run
parallel a c r o s s t h e u p p e r m a r g i n o f t h e p e l v i s ,
t h e r e i s o f t e n a d e e p e r set o f t e n s i o n s n e a r t h e
t o p a n d side o f t h e s a c r u m . T h i s i s a s s o c i a t e d
with t h e fascia o f t h e gluteal m u s c l e s a n d
runs f r o m t h e surface to deep in t h e pelvis,
Fascia of
d o w n t o t h e b o n e . M a n y m e n are t o o n a r r o w -erector spinae
at t h e base of t h e pelvis, b e t w e e n t h e legs. jlumbo-dorsal
fascia)
T h i s results i n a n a b d o m e n t h a t i s p r o p o r t i o n -
ally t o o w i d e i n f r o n t . T h e h i p b o n e l o o k s a s .Sacroiliac
t h o u g h it wings out. This again adds to a wide junction

abdominal contour. Fascia of

In m e n , t h e c o n n e c t i o n across t h e front of
t h e g r o i n s e e m s like a b a n d t r y i n g t o h o l d t h e
lower a b d o m e n together. In w o m e n , t h e s a m e
kind of narrowness is m o r e c o m m o n in back,
across t h e sacrum. I n b o t h cases, t h e t e n s i o n
on t h e outside of t h e pelvis produces a corre-
sponding tension on t h e inside. There is a
c o m p l e t e set o f m u s c l e s o n t h e i n s i d e o f t h e
pelvis a s w e l l a s o n t h e o u t s i d e . T h e c o n n e c -
t i v e tissue o f t h e o u t s i d e m u s c l e s ( s u r f a c e )
relates t h e m o v e m e n t o f t h e lower b a c k
r e g i o n t o t h e o u t s i d e ( l a t e r a l side) o f t h e
leg (Fig. 13-4).
T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue o f t h e psoas e x t e n d s
from the inside lower back to t h e inside (me-
dial side) o f t h e t h i g h a t t h e lesser t r o c h a n t e r
(Fig. 13-5). T h e t w o f a s c i a l p l a n e s ( s u r f a c e
and deep) b a l a n c e e a c h other. Tightness in
o n e will b e reflected i n t h e o t h e r w i t h every
m o v e m e n t of t h e leg or pelvis.
In walking, the most p r o m i n e n t l y involved
muscle structure f r o m inside t h e pelvis is t h e
i l i o p s o a s a n d its a s s o c i a t e d f a s c i a . W e w i l l
discuss t h e p s o a s m u s c l e i n S e c t i o n 1 9 . T h e
iliacus, t h e o t h e r part o f t h e iliopsoas c o m -
plex, lines t h e inside of t h e b o w l of t h e pelvis.
It diagonally crosses t h e p u b i c b o n e a n d
a t t a c h e s o n t h e i n n e r p a r t o f t h e leg a t t h e
lesser t r o c h a n t e r . W h e n t h e p e l v i s i s b o u n d
tightly in back, t h e anterior superior spines
-•gluteus
maximus m.
Jlio-tibial
tract
Figure 13-4
The connective tissue of the surface muscles
relates the movement of the lower back region
to the outside (lateral side) of the leg.
of t h e ilium w i n g out in front. T h e iliacus
then tightens and is too short to function
with ease. T h e b r i m of t h e pelvis is pulled
forward and d o w n toward the pubic b o n e .
W h e n t h e iliacus is very short, t h e inside of
t h e leg i s h e l d t o o tightly i n t o t h e h i p socket.
T h e r e s u l t o f all t h i s i s a t e n s i o n a r o u n d t h e
p u b i c b o n e . A b a n d of strain (inguinal strap)
across t h e lowest part of t h e a b d o m e n
attempts to balance that internal shortness,
often resulting in a heavy fatty c o n n e c t i v e
tissue b a n d o n top o f t h e p u b i c b o n e .
In m e n , b o t h sexual f u n c t i o n and feelings
a b o u t castration are c o n n e c t e d t o t h i s b a n d .
64 THE ENDLESS WEB

Restriction in the groin and pubic region

o f t e n serves t o b l o c k o r d a m p e n s e x u a l e n j o y -
m e n t . It's a l m o s t a s t h o u g h t h e p e n i s i s h u n g
through the band, so that the tightness of the
b a n d c a n b l o c k t h e o r g a s m i c w a v e t o t h e rest
of t h e body. This limits sexual e n j o y m e n t to
t h e penis. A n o t h e r e l e m e n t in sexual blocking
is m e n ' s castration worries. These seem to be
centered n o t around the scrotum, but at a
m o r e lateral region of t h e groin where, before
birth, t h e testes leave t h e protection of t h e
b o d y . T h e y d e s c e n d b e t w e e n t h e t h i n layers
o f t h e lower a b d o m i n a l wall d o w n i n t o t h e
s c r o t u m b y w a y o f t h e i n g u i n a l c a n a l (Fig.
13-6).
T h e inguinal canal is t h e target of a variety
of problems, particularly in m e n . Inguinal
hernias s e e m to be t h e result of excessive
strain a n d postural h o l d i n g on an area that
is vulnerable and unprotected. We have found
that lessening the tightness of the groin b a n d
Figure 13-5 reduces t h e severity of t h e hernia or elimi-
This drawing from Dr. Ida Rolf's book on Rolfing n a t e s it. T h e g r o i n a r e a i s t i g h t i n m o s t m e n ,
illustrates the psoas and iliacus muscles on the w h o o f t e n h a v e a " d o n ' t t o u c h " signal there
inside of the pelvis. The connective tissue of these
such as ticklishness.
inside muscles of the pelvis connects the inner
abdomen and inside lower back to the inside For b o t h m e n a n d w o m e n , t h e b a n d often
(medial side) of the thigh. shows up in the breathing pattern; abdominal
m o v e m e n t f r o m t h e b r e a t h g o e s a s far d o w n
a s t h e b a n d i n g , n o t all t h e w a y d o w n t o t h e
p u b i c b o n e . I n w o m e n , t h e strap i s m o r e c o m -
m o n l y focused deeper in t h e lower a b d o m e n ,
shelving u n d e r n e a t h t h e ovaries a n d func-
Pathway of
tionally separating t h e ovaries from t h e gen-
-"testes' d e s c e n t
inguinal
b e f o r e birth
i t a l s . T h i s is a l a r g e f a c t o r in p r e m e n s t r u a l
canal
(pathway of s y n d r o m e a n d the reason PMS so often does
spermatic
Inguinal l i g a m e n t
cord)
H (inferior j u n c t i o n of n o t yield to medication. T h e banding tends to
internal a n d external
abdominal obliques) be deep a n d shelflike, so that a c c o m m o d a t i o n
i
of the necessary changes in posture caused by
pregnancy is inhibited. In pregnancy, the
w e i g h t o f t h e b a b y rests d o w n i n t o t h i s shelf,
c a u s i n g i t t o b e c o m e t h i c k e r a n d less r e s i l i e n t .
After b i r t h , t h e t h i c k e n e d b a n d r e m a i n s .
T h e p e l v i c s t r a p w i d e n s i n b a c k , o f t e n ris-
Figure 13-6 ing as h i g h as t h e twelfth rib, where it m e s h e s
Inguinal band and descent of testes. w i t h t h e fascia o f t h e m u s c l e s a l o n g t h e spine.
 THE INGUINAL BAND AND THE VERTEBRAL COLUMN 65

A s w e h a v e said, t h e b a n d a t m i d - c h e s t b l e n d s
with t h e fascia of t h e dorsal h i n g e in t h e
(1) Junction at
region of t h e sixth dorsal vertebra. Clearly, lambda/
sphenoid
therefore, t h e structural i n h i b i t i o n created by
the bands influences spinal integration a n d (2) Occipital-cervical

m o v e m e n t . In turn, restriction of m o v e m e n t
at the junctions of the vertebral c o l u m n - ( 3 ) Cervico-dorsal

increases t h e tightness of t h e bands. Interfer-

e n c e in spinal f u n c t i o n leads to characteristic
changes in posture and physical behavior. We
(7) Dorsal hinge
t h e r e f o r e digress t o d e s c r i b e s o m e a s p e c t s o f
the structure and f u n c t i o n of t h e vertebral
column in relationship to the bands.
T h e muscles a n d fascia t h a t r u n longitudi-
nally f r o m t h e n e c k to t h e s a c r u m are a c o m -
(4)Lumbo-dorsal
plex interweaving of layers. T h e y stabilize t h e
variety of m o v e m e n t s of t h e different b o n y
vertebrae that m a k e up the spinal c o l u m n .
A l t h o u g h t h e vertebrae are similar in s h a p e , . ( 5 ) Lumbo-sacral

t h e y are d i f f e r e n t i n d e t a i l s o f d e s i g n a n d size.
These differences imply differences in range
and direction of m o v e m e n t . In general, the
b a n d s relate to j u n c t i o n s of t h e spinal col-
u m n , places where t h e vertebrae c h a n g e
shape. T h e s e j u n c t i o n s are b e t w e e n t h e h e a d
and neck (occipito-cervical), between the
neck and chest (cervico-dorsal), between chest
and lower back (lumbo-dorsal), b e t w e e n lower
back and sacrum (lumbo-sacral), and between
the sacrum and tailbone (sacro-coccygeal).
T h e d o r s a l h i n g e i s Ida Rolf's a d d i t i o n t o t h i s
list (Fig. 13-7).
T h e change in vertebral shape at t h e dor-
sal h i n g e i s m o r e s u b t l e ; t h e c h a n g e i n m o v e -
m e n t pattern is m o s t visible in a living, m o v -
ing body. T h e reason for this a p p a r e n t l y is
that the change in function and morphology
here entails t h e soft tissue a n d o u t l y i n g b o n e s
as well as t h e vertebrae t h e m s e l v e s . T h i s is
s o m e w h a t true everywhere along t h e spine,
of course, but it is m o r e i m p o r t a n t in t h e
upper chest. T h e additional stabilizing influ-
e n c e f r o m t h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e a n d its s o f t tis-
sue c o n n e c t i o n s t o t h e s e v e r t e b r a e m o d i f i e s
their m o v e m e n t .
•(6)Sacro-coccygeal
Figure 13-7
Junctions of the spine.
On the inside of t h e body, just in front
o f t h e s p i n e , lies t h e a u t o n o m i c n e r v o u s sys-
t e m (ANS). T h i s runs l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r o m t h e
b a s e o f t h e s p i n e u p i n t o t h e h e a d . A l o n g its
l e n g t h t h e r e are a n u m b e r o f s p i n a l p l e x i .
T h e s e are i n t e r r u p t i o n s i n t h e flow o f i n f o m a -
t i o n a l o n g t h e system. T h e y serve m u c h t h e
same function as a busy t e l e p h o n e e x c h a n g e ;
t h e y are places w h e r e n e u r a l messages c a n get
t r a n s m i t t e d in diverse directions. G e n e r a l l y
s p e a k i n g , t h e ANS n e r v e p l e x i a r e l o c a t e d n e a r
t h e spinal j u n c t i o n s t h a t we listed a b o v e . It is
interesting to n o t e that these places of m a x i -
m u m m o v e m e n t o f t h e spine are associated
w i t h c e n t e r s o f m o s t c o m p l e x ANS a c t i v i t y .
W h e n t h e r e is ease of m o v e m e n t at t h e s e
junctions there can be stimulation of the
nervous impulses that control metabolic
activity.
66 THE ENDLESS WEB

As the embryo is enfolded in the w o m b ,

its b a c k d e s c r i b e s a C c u r v e (Fig. 13-8). As we
h a v e said, t h i s is n o t a s m o o t h c u r v e ; it is a
series o f b e n d s i n t h e b a c k . T h e s e b e n d s are
l o c a t e d a t w h a t will b e c o m e t h e s p i n a l j u n c -
tures. T h e e m b r y o n i c C curve o p e n s after
birth as t h e child explores a n d learns to
stretch a n d l e n g t h e n . Ultimately, there is a
c h a n g e in t h e direction of s o m e of t h e angles,
creating t h e snake-like f o r m of an adult
upright spinal c o l u m n .

A Bonnie Bainbridge Cohen's Develop-

B C
mental M o v e m e n t Sequences* graphically
Figure 13-8
The embryonic C curve (A) straightens as the
infant begins to walk (B) and later assumes the *See B o n n i e Bainbridge C o h e n , Sensing, Feeling, and
Action: The Experiential Anatomy of Body-Mind Centering
normal adult curves (C).
(Northampton, Massachusetts: Contact Editions, 1 9 9 3 ) .

A B C D

Figure 13-9
Developmental movement sequences: (A)
intrauterine folding; (B) contralateral creeping; (C)
crawling; (D) standing.
 THE INGUINAL BAND AND THE VERTEBRAL COLUMN 67

demonstrate h o w these flexures interact w i t h

m o v e m e n t . As she describes t h e sequence, in - (1) J u n c t i o n at
t h e first d a y s a f t e r b i r t h t h e n e w b o r n e x t e n d s lambda /
sphenoid
its h e a d . S o o n i t raises t h e h e a d , t h e n p u s h e s
(2) Occipital-cervical
o f f w i t h its h a n d s . Full m o b i l i t y i n c r e a s e s
with homolateral m o v e m e n t s — f i s h l i k e swing-
-(3) Cervico-dorsal
i n g f r o m side t o side. T h e n c o n t r a l a t e r a l
creeping a n d rocking prepare t h e b o d y for
crawling (Fig. 13-9).
(7) Dorsal hinge
These m o v e m e n t s correspond to t h e activa-
t i o n of b o t h t h e spinal flexures a n d t h e asso-
c i a t e d ANS p l e x i : (1) j u n c t i o n a t t h e s p h e n o i d
(see S e c t i o n 1 4 o n t h e e y e b a n d , b e l o w ) ; (2)
j u n c t i o n b e t w e e n h e a d a n d n e c k ; (3) j u n c t i o n
(4)Lumbo-dorsal
b e t w e e n n e c k a n d c h e s t ; (4) j u n c t i o n b e t w e e n
c h e s t a n d l o w e r b a c k ; (5) j u n c t i o n b e t w e e n
l o w e r b a c k a n d s a c r u m ; (6) j u n c t i o n b e t w e e n
(5)Lumbo-sacral
s a c r u m a n d c o c c y x ; (7) j u n c t i o n a t d o r s a l
h i n g e (Fig. 13-10). C o h e n h a s n o t e d t h a t
-(6)Sacro-coccygeal
w h e n a part of this s e q u e n c e is o m i t t e d in
childhood, there can be dysfunction, and
that this dysfunction is correctable even in Figure 1 3 - 1 0
the adult as t h e missing m o v e m e n t pattern is Spinal junctions.
practiced. There is often resistance to activat-
i n g s o m e o r all o f t h e s e s p i n a l j u n c t i o n s . T h e they compress the b o d y at spinal junctions.
r e a s o n s r e l a t e t o m a n y life t r a u m a s . O n e o f T h e straps c r e a t e a s y s t e m o f t r a n s v e r s e r e i n -
t h e m o s t j o l t i n g c a n c o m e very early i n life. forcing structures w h e r e w e d o n ' t w a n t t o (or
D a n g l i n g a n e w b o r n b y its f e e t a t b i r t h s h o c k s can't) trust t h e u n d u l a t i o n s of an upright
t h e safety of t h e curve w i t h a l m o s t a s n a p p i n g spine. Their t e n d e n c y is to pull us forward
m o v e m e n t . T h e resulting position as t h e child and d o w n in front. Kinesthetically, this is
hangs head back and spine locked in a back- sensed as resistance to the feeling of openness
ward curve causes an acute w r e n c h i n g a n d that comes with being upright. It isn't that
ripping of fragile fascial c o n n e c t i o n s . T h i s t h e s p i n e ( a n d t h e b o d y ) c o n t r a c t s ; it's t h a t
is very similar in effect to a w h i p l a s h i n j u r y it refused to o p e n u p . E m o t i o n a l l y , we feel
in an auto accident. t h a t s a f e t y lies i n t h e c u r l e d - i n - o n - o n e s e l f
M o s t people u n c o n s c i o u s l y try to retain p o s i t i o n . It's r e a l l y a r e m e m b e r e d safety. T r u e
s o m e part of their fetal curve. T h e b o d y a d u l t s t a b i l i t y a n d s a f e t y lie i n b e i n g u p r i g h t ,
straps are a w a y o f f o s t e r i n g t h i s b e c a u s e flexible, a n d resilient.
FOURTEEN
The Eye Band and Chin Band

T h e r e are t w o straps t h a t restrict m o v e m e n t o f

t h e h e a d — a c h i n strap a t t a c h e d at t h e j u n c -
t i o n b e t w e e n t h e atlas a n d t h e o c c i p u t a n d
a n o t h e r strap t h a t seems to go right across t h e
e y e s like a m a s k . B e c a u s e o f t h e t e n s i o n t h a t
these straps spread t h r o u g h t h e h e a d , m o s t o f
u s a r e n ' t a b l e t o s e n s e t h e b a l a n c e o f t h e cra-
n i u m a s a w h o l e . H a b i t u a l t e n s i o n i n t h e sur-
f a c e t i s s u e o f t h e skull c h a n g e s t h e r e l a t i o n s
o f t h e b o n e s . T h e b o n e s i n v o l v e d are n o t o n l y
t h e larger e x t e r n a l b o n e s o f t h e cranial vault
a n d jaw, b u t a l s o a c o m p l e x a r r a n g e m e n t o f
delicate b o n e s centering a r o u n d t h e eyes a n d
b a c k t h r o u g h t h e skull a t e y e l e v e l . T h e s t r a p -
like t e n s i o n f r o m t h e surface generalizes to
t h e s e b o n e s . T h e areas indirectly affected
include the brain stem, the limbic system, Figure 14-1
and the pituitary a n d pineal glands. Eye strap.
T h e e y e s t r a p lies r o u g h l y a c r o s s t h e e y e s
a n d a b o v e t h e ears (Fig. 14-1). I n t h e b a c k , i t
is at about the main junction of bones of the
skull. Starting at t h e f r o n t m i d l i n e , this b a n d
crosses t h e muscles o n t h e bridge o f t h e nose,
the circular muscles ringing t h e eye sockets,
t h e u p p e r m u s c l e s t h a t let y o u w i g g l e y o u r
Frontal
e a r s , a n d t h e t e m p o r a l i s m u s c l e a n d its f a s c i a
Lacrimal
a t t a c h i n g t o t h e jaw.
T h e eye socket is c o m p o s e d of a fusion of a
n u m b e r o f b o n e s (Fig. 14-2). T h e u p p e r p o r - Sphenoid
Zygomatic
tion is the frontal b o n e , w h i c h continues on
as t h e m a j o r b o n e of t h e forehead. Medially,
Ethmoid
t h e r e are lacrimal a n d e t h m o i d b o n e s , w h i c h
also f o r m t h e upper medial part of t h e nasal
Maxillary
cavity. T h e lower part of t h e orbit is a c o n t i n -
u a t i o n of t h e maxilla (upper jaw). Laterally
there is the zygomatic bone, which continues
a s a b o n y a r c h t o w a r d t h e ear. P o s t e r i o r l y ( t h e Mandible

back of the orbit) there is the sphenoid b o n e ,

w h i c h also forms part of a shelf below t h e
b r a i n . T h e s e b o n e s are tied t o g e t h e r b y Figure 14-2
sutures t h a t a n a t o m i s t s consider to be Bones of the eye socket.
 THE EYE BAND AND CHIN BAND 69

Anterior tiny increments of movement, they neverthe-

fontanelle
less s i g n i f i c a n t l y a f f e c t f a c i a l e x p r e s s i v e n e s s a s
Posterior
fontanelle well as t h e free use of t h e senses—sight, hear-
ing, smell, taste.
Anterolateral Tension across t h e orbit of t h e eye c a n
fontanelle
result in a n a r r o w i n g of t h e entire facial
r e g i o n . T h e b o n e s o f t h e o r b i t are s q u e e z e d
Posterolateral together. There is chronic tension in the eye
fontanelle
s o c k e t a n d o n t h e e y e b a l l itself. G o o d v i s i o n
relies o n m i n u t e m u s c u l a r a d a p t a t i o n s f o r
Figure 14-3 n e a r a n d far v i s i o n . A s w e s a i d , c o n n e c t i v e
Fontanelles are locations of non-fusion between tissue is t i g h t e n e d — l o s e s a d a p t a b i l i t y —
bones in the fetal and infant skull. The dotted line w h e n its a s s o c i a t e d b o n e s are c o m p r e s s e d .
embryologically is the site of the first flexure of
Prolonged immobility and compression in
the body.
the socket distort t h e shape a n d adaptability
o f t h e e y e b a l l itself. T h i s m a y a c c o u n t f o r a
n u m b e r o f c o m m o n visual problems. W h e n ,
t h r o u g h h a b i t u a l t e n s i o n s , t h e eyes are fixed
Frontal i n o n e attitude, t h e free range o f e m o t i o n a l
Ethmoid
expression is also d i m i n i s h e d .
This t o p m o s t b a n d relates t o t h e suture
-Sphenoid
c a l l e d l a m b d a (at t h e p o s t e r i o r f o n t a n e l l e ) .
T h i s is n o t as o b v i o u s l y a spinal flexure as are
'Temporal t h e vertebral flexures. In e m b r y o l o g i c a l terms,
it is t h e fusion of t h e apical (topmost) b o n e s .
I n f a c t , e m b r y o l o g i c a l l y t h i s i s t h e site o f t h e
first f l e x u r e of t h e b o d y (Fig. 14-3).
•Parietal We have talked about the sphenoid b o n e
in relationship to t h e eye socket. T h e sphe-
Occipital
n o i d c a n also be considered t h e h u b of t h e
b o n y skull w h e n s e e n f r o m a b o v e (Fig. 14-4).
I t i s s h a p e d like a b u t t e r f l y w h o s e w i n g s r e a c h
t o t h e s u r f a c e o f t h e h e a d i n t h e flat a r e a j u s t
Figure 14-4
l a t e r a l t o t h e e y e s . B e c a u s e o f its l o c a t i o n , t h e
Notice the juncture between the sphenoid and
occipital bones at the base of the skull. This inter- s p h e n o i d c a n get locked in place as a result of
face is the focus of most cranial manipulation. tensions from t h e surface. W h e n t h e eye b a n d
tightens, the sphenoid can't move. Converse-
immovable joints. ly, w h a t h a p p e n s o n t h e i n s i d e o f t h e h e a d i s
William Sutherland,* the originator of reflected on t h e surface.
cranial osteopathy, realized t h a t slight inter- O n t h e c o v e r o f The Protean Body b y D o n
osseous m o v e m e n t s , w h i c h he termed the J o h n s o n / there is a drawing of the sphenoid
b r e a t h i n g o f t h e skull, a r e n e c e s s a r y f o r t h e f l o a t i n g i n t h e air. S e e n like t h i s , i n i s o l a t i o n
h e a d t o f u n c t i o n . A l t h o u g h t h e s e are v e r y f r o m t h e rest o f t h e b o n e s o f t h e c r a n i u m , i t

*See William G. Sutherland, The Cranial Bowl (Meridian, t S e e D o n J o h n s o n , The Protean Body (New York: Harper &
Idaho: The Cranial Academy, 1 9 4 8 ) . Row, 1 9 7 7 ) .
70 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 14-5
Chin and collar straps.
is easily m i s t a k e n for t h e b o n y pelvis. This
similarity is m o r e t h a n visual. In fluid b o d y
m o v e m e n t , s p h e n o i d a n d pelvis m o v e i n
concert and reciprocally If one doesn't move,
t h e o t h e r i s i n h i b i t e d i n its m o v e m e n t , a s h a s
been demonstrated in Sutherland's cranial
osteopathic work. A further relationship
b e t w e e n s p h e n o i d a n d t h e b o n y p e l v i s lies
i n t h e fact t h a t t h e y b o t h h o u s e i m p o r t a n t
e n d o c r i n e g l a n d s . T h e p i t u i t a r y g l a n d lies i n
an indentation at the center of the sphenoid.
The gonads develop within the protection of
t h e b o n y pelvis.
Cranial osteopaths have m a d e the obser-
vation that the sphenoid rocks. There is s o m e
controversy about whether this m o v e m e n t is
t h e result of an i n h e r e n t b o d y r h y t h m or a
response to the r h y t h m of the breathing. In
either case, the m o v e m e n t is observable and
palpable. We have seen this rocking reflected
b e t w e e n pelvis a n d s p h e n o i d . W h e n o n e o f
the endpoints of this flow can no longer
r e s p o n d freely, t h e o t h e r e n d p o i n t i s a l s o
restricted, inhibited, or immobilized.
T h e strap just under a n d including t h e c h i n
(Fig. 14-5) is r e l a t e d to t h e j u n c t u r e of t h e
h e a d w i t h t h e first t w o v e r t e b r a e o f t h e n e c k .
This is the juncture of the occiput with the
a t l a s a n d a x i s . I t i s v e r y m u c h like t h e k i n d o f
c h i n strap advertised in t h e b a c k pages of an
o l d - t i m e f a s h i o n m a g a z i n e , d e s i g n e d t o lift
sagging or double chins. It surrounds and
binds d o w n a floating b o n e on the front of
the neck called the hyoid. This U-shaped
b o n e defines the angle between the chin and
the throat. The hyoid anchors many of the
so-called strap m u s c l e s of t h e throat. It is t h e
keystone of the bridge b e t w e e n breastbone
( s t e r n u m ) a n d t h e a n g l e o f t h e jaw.
Like a n y o t h e r place o f m u s c l e a t t a c h m e n t ,
t h e h y o i d is a focus of tissue buildup w h e n
there is habitual t e n s i o n . It is tugged down-
w a r d w h e n t h e s t r a p m u s c l e s o f t h e t h r o a t are
o v e r l y t e n s e (Fig. 14-5). T h i s is s e e n as a d o u -
ble c h i n .
The band continues from the hyoid and
u n d e r t h e c h i n i n a n upward p a t h across t h e
a n g l e o f t h e jaw. I t f r e q u e n t l y f o r m s a p a d o n
t h e a n g l e o f t h e jaw, j u s t b e l o w t h e ear. W h e n
t h e b a n d is particularly tight, an increasingly
d e n s e a n d d e e p p a d o f tissue v i r t u a l l y i m m o -
b i l i z e s t h e a n g l e o f t h e jaw. T h e j a w i s b o t h a
sliding a n d a hinged joint. W h e n the jaw is
strapped back, t h e sliding m o t i o n is limited
a n d m a y d i s a p p e a r . As we see it, t h i s is a
m a j o r factor underlying temporo-mandibular
joint (TMJ) problems.
The continuation of the band thickens
around the mastoid process b e h i n d and below
t h e e a r a n d g o e s o n t o restrict t h e j u n c t i o n
b e t w e e n t h e occiput, atlas, a n d axis. W h e n
this h a p p e n s , n o d d i n g b e c o m e s a n effort a n d
the head's gliding response to walking is
bound down.
T h e a c t u a l j u n c t i o n o f t h e skull w i t h t h e t o p
t w o v e r t e b r a e i s c o v e r e d b y a h e a v y fascial p a d

about an inch thick. This is o n e example
where a natural p a d d i n g in t h e b o d y c a n serve
a s p a r t o f a s u r f a c e b a n d s u c h a s w e are d e s c r i b -
i n g . T h e d i f f i c u l t y arises w h e n t h e t e n s i o n i s
excessive a n d b e c o m e s a tight surface strap.
Extreme tension at the back of the head
p u s h e s t h e skull b o n e s t o o far f o r w a r d o v e r
the neck bones, giving the appearance of a
v e r y flat b a c k o f t h e h e a d . A s t h e b a n d c o n -
tracts a n d distorts t h e p o s i t i o n o f t h e h y o i d ,
Figure 14-6
Upper body bands.
I II I 1 YI HAND AND C H I N HAND 71
this generalizes tension into t h e back of t h e
tongue. We don't think of the tongue being
tense, but it can be. Moreover, the condition
of the esophagus and trachea is under the
influence of these tensions. Voice students,
for e x a m p l e , learn to release these t e n s i o n s
a n d c o n t r o l t h e s e tissues w i t h m i n u t e
awareness.
Visualization of the upper body bands on
p h o t o g r a p h s i s s h o w n i n Figure 1 4 - 6 .
FIFTEEN
The Collar Band, Umbilical Band, and Groin Band
Like t h e c h i n s t r a p , t h e n e x t s t r a p — t h e c o l l a r
strap (Fig. 15-1)—is of g r e a t i m p o r t a n c e to
singers, w h e t h e r o p e r a o r s h o w e r s i n g e r s . I t
involves primarily t h e base of the throat, t h e
upper tip of t h e lungs, a n d t h e upper m a r g i n
of t h e shoulders. W h e n this strap is very
t i g h t , its m o s t s t r i k i n g f e a t u r e is a t i g h t n e s s
underneath the Adam's apple where the two
clavicles (collarbones) m e e t t h e s t e r n u m
(breastbone). T h e m o s t c o m m o n result i s
compression around the base of the neck.
T h e c o l l a r b o n e s are t i g h t l y g l u e d d o w n t o
t h e u p p e r ribs i n f r o n t a n d t i g h t l y h e l d t o t h e
upper margins of t h e shoulder blades (scapu-
lae) i n t h e b a c k . D e e p h o l l o w s a t t h e b a s e o f
t h e n e c k , just b e h i n d t h e c o l l a r b o n e s , are
evidence of t e n s i o n w h e n this strap h a s
b e c o m e too tight.
In front, t h e strap seems to e n c l o s e t h e
w h o l e length of t h e c o l l a r b o n e as well as t h e
two u p p e r m o s t ribs. It includes a small m u s c l e
called the subclavius. This c o n n e c t s the m i d -
dle s e c t i o n o f e a c h c o l l a r b o n e t o t h e first a n d
s e c o n d ribs a n d c o n t i n u e s a s l i g a m e n t s t o t h e
sternum and coracoid process, medially a n d
laterally, r e s p e c t i v e l y . T h i s s m a l l m u s c l e i s
active in respiration w h e n t h e c o l l a r b o n e
m o v e s i n relation t o t h e ribs. W h e n t h e fas-
cial c o v e r i n g o f t h e m u s c l e i s t h i c k e n e d , t h e
subclavius is i m m o b i l i z e d b e t w e e n t h e t w o
bones.
T h e collar strap c o n t i n u e s a l o n g t h e clav-
icle t o t h e t i p o f t h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e ( a c r o -
m i o n ) . T h i s p r o j e c t s like a b o n y s h e l f o v e r
the t o p m o s t part of t h e arm b o n e (humerus).
W h e n there is a heavy pad on top of the
acromion, any m o v e m e n t is inhibited
b e t w e e n clavicle a n d scapula a n d acts as a
brake o n t h e lateral (sideways) m o v e m e n t
of the arm. T h e clavicle articulates with t h e
a c r o m i o n just in front of t h e shoulder joint.
T h i s is t r a d i t i o n a l l y d e s i g n a t e d as a s l i g h t l y
movable joint, w h i c h can be a misleading
c o n c e p t . For e x a m p l e , in a w h e e l w i t h ball
bearings, t h e ball bearings m o v e o n l y slightly.
But if o n e is stuck, t h e larger m o v e m e n t of
t h e wheel stops or eccentrically grinds d o w n
its c o m p o n e n t s .
T h e strap c o n t i n u e s t o w a r d t h e b a c k a l o n g
the inner and outer margin of the scapula. It
ends b y spreading o u t over t h e area o f t h e
dowager's h u m p — f r o m t h e upper medial tip
of the scapula to the cervicothoracic j u n c t i o n .
T h i s s t r a p a t t h e b a s e o f t h e t h r o a t , like t h e
o t h e r straps, c a n be c o m p a r e d to a p i e c e of
c l o t h in w h i c h part of t h e weaving is very
tight a n d part of it is very loose. T h e tightest
area b i n d s t h e clavicle a n d t h e u p p e r part of
t h e s c a p u l a . T h e l o o s e r e x t e n s i o n s b r o a d e n its
influence out i n t o the upper part of t h e arm,
pulling the arm in closer to the b o d y and
Fascia of _
scalene m
Hyoid bone
Collar
strap .Fascia of
strap m.
• Clavicle
Coracoid
Acromion
process
Scapula •Sternum
Figure 15-1
The collar strap.
74 THE ENDLESS WEB
r o t a t i n g i t s l i g h t l y o u t o f its s o c k e t . O t h e r
fibers e x t e n d i n t o t h e a r m p i t , c l o s i n g t h e
a r m p i t a n d c o m p r e s s i n g t h e upper ribs. T h e s e
c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f fibers w e c a l l s t r a p s n o t
o n l y c i r c l e t h e b o d y o n its s u r f a c e b u t h a v e
a third dimension going deep inside, crossing
t h e b o d y like a shelf. In t h e collar strap, t h e
shelf c a n be seen on t h e surface of t h e body.
It crosses over t h e o f t e n - h o l l o w spot in t h e
base of the neck containing the scalene mus-
c l e s (Fig. 15-1). T h e u n d e r s i d e o f t h e s c a l e n e s
c a n a n d o f t e n does h a v e a fascial c o n n e c t i o n
to t h e upper tip of t h e lungs. Very few of us
are aware t h a t lungs e x t e n d so h i g h up in t h e
body, a n d a m i n i s c u l e n u m b e r of us m a k e use
of this upper tip of our respiratory capacity.
Two characteristic m o v e m e n t patterns rein-
force t h e tightness of this strap—compressing
the armpits and h u n c h i n g the shoulders.
Armpit c o m p r e s s i o n is a k i n d of guarding,
protecting the body because of ticklishness,
habitual anxiety, protecting t h e breasts, etc.
Shoulders pulled up c a n also be a response
to perpetual anxiety, or it can be carrying the
weight of the world on your shoulders. Mind-
set v e r y q u i c k l y b e c o m e s b o d y s e t . B o t h r e s u l t
i n l a c k o f m o b i l i t y i n t h e u p p e r ribs a n d a
kind of breathless feeling.
Like t h e o t h e r s , t h e collar strap is present
i n all b o d i e s t o o n e d e g r e e o r a n o t h e r . S o m e -
times it is visible as a light b a n d i n g on t h e
s u r f a c e . S o m e t i m e s i t i s less v i s i b l e b u t c a n b e
felt as a very tight b a n d a l m o s t at b o n e level.
Very d e e p h o l l o w s in t h e body, areas t h a t are
ticklish or painful to t h e touch, and marked
c h a n g e s i n c o l o r a r e all i n d i c a t i o n s o f c h a n g e
in c o n n e c t i v e tissue fluidity a n d b o d y
flexibility.
Functionally, t h e straps overlap. For e x a m -
ple, t h e eye strap a n d t h e c h i n strap pull o n
e a c h o t h e r i n t h e r e g i o n j u s t b e h i n d t h e ear.
Both act on t h e m o v e m e n t of t h e jaw a n d
t h e tipping of t h e head. W h e r e strong vertical
m u s c u l a r a n d fascial pulls cross t h e b a n d s , t h e
s t r a p t h e n b e c o m e s l o c a l l y d e n s e r b o t h i n its
h o r i z o n t a l direction a n d in t h e vertical cross-
b a n d i n g s . W h e n b o t h pulls are unusually
s t r o n g , t h e w h o l e area b e c o m e s a t h i c k e n e d
mass of tissue.
This k i n d of i n t e r a c t i o n also occurs
b e t w e e n t h e c h i n strap a n d t h e collar strap,
and it strongly influences the front of the
throat. Four muscles ( c o m m o n l y termed the
strap muscles) a t t a c h t h e h y o i d b o n e t o t h e
u p p e r t i p o f t h e b r e a s t b o n e . T h e larger ster-
n o c l e i d o m a s t o i d overlies these a n d provides
a direct vertical c o n n e c t i o n between t h e
t w o s t r a p s . C h r o n i c t e n s i o n i n t h e fascia
surrounding these muscles brings the front
p a r t o f t h e t w o straps c l o s e r t o g e t h e r , a s c a n
be seen in people w h o "lead with their
chins."
T e n s i o n i n t h i s area a f f e c t s s p e e c h a s
well as m o r e c o m p l e x vocalizations such as
singing or playing a wind instrument. Any
stressful s i t u a t i o n c a n s e r v e t o t i g h t e n t h e
t h r o a t a r e a . W h e n a n g r y , o n e ' s v o i c e m a y rise
o r w o r d s m a y n o t c o m e o u t . I n grief w e g e t
" a l l c h o k e d u p . " T h i s i s a t least p a r t o f t h e
m e c h a n i s m t h a t u n d e r l i e s fear o f p u b l i c
speaking.
T h e c h e s t s t r a p (see S e c t i o n 1 2 ) i n t e r a c t s
w i t h t h e c o l l a r s t r a p v i a t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
of t h e pectoralis m a j o r ; this c a n cause a verti-
cal c o m p r e s s i o n on t h e upper chest. Reduced
r a n g e o f m o t i o n i n t h e s h o u l d e r ( c o l l a r strap)
correlates with lack of m o v e m e n t in the up-
per ribs a n d shortness of breath. Tightness
f r o m b o t h o f t h e s e straps i n t o t h e a r m p i t
inhibits freedom of m o v e m e n t of the arm
at t h e shoulder joint f r o m above and below.
T h e strap associated with t h e u m b i l i c u s
(Fig. 15-2) i n t h e f r o n t a n d t h e l u m b o - d o r s a l
hinge in the back tends to make the body
look as t h o u g h it were divided into an upper
a n d a l o w e r h a l f . It is v a r i a b l e in its p o s i t i o n
r e l a t i v e t o t h e u m b i l i c u s . I t c a n r u n just u n d e r
t h e s m a l l c a r t i l a g e a t t h e b o t t o m o f t h e ster-
n u m (the x i p h o i d process), a few i n c h e s
 THE COLLAR BAND, UMBILICAL BAND, AND GROIN BAND 75

above the umbilicus. It m a y run directly

across t h e u m b i l i c u s , f o r m i n g a deep i n d e n -
tation e x t e n d i n g o u t to either side. Or it m a y
e x t e n d across t h e a b d o m e n an i n c h or so
b e l o w t h e u m b i l i c u s (Fig. 15-3).
T h e b a n d c o n t i n u e s t o w a r d t h e sides, i n
m o s t cases a little b e l o w t h e arch of t h e ribs.
It seems to run b o t h inside a n d outside t h e
ribs, g e n e r a l l y p u l l i n g t h e free e n d s o f t h o s e
11th&12th,
ribs d e e p i n s i d e t h e b o d y . I n d o i n g s o , i t m a y ribs •Umbilicus
compress t h e a c t i o n of t h e lateral part of t h e
•Umbilical
d i a p h r a g m . T h e strap c o n t i n u e s t o t h e b a c k
strap
by way of t h e twelfth rib i n t o t h e l u m b o -
dorsal j u n c t i o n , o f t e n i m m o b i l i z i n g t h e free
tips o f t h e t e n t h a n d e l e v e n t h r i b s . T h e r e i s
s o m e s e m b l a n c e of this strap in e v e r y o n e . At
t h e sides, i t i s a c o m p o n e n t o f t h e v e r y c o m -
m o n t e n s i o n c e n t e r e d o n t h e free m a r g i n s o f Figure 15-2
t h e l o w e r r i b s . T h e t i p o f t h e e l e v e n t h rib i s Note that the area of the eleventh and twelfth ribs
pulled deep into the b o d y in m o s t people. is the lumbo-dorsal junction.

Ideally, t h e e l e v e n t h rib lies j u s t b e l o w a t h i n

sheath of muscle and skin and establishes the
width of the lower chest in t h e back. H o w
deeply it is pulled into t h e b o d y seems to
influence t h e position of t h e strap (and vice
v e r s a ) . I t i s p o s s i b l e f o r t h e t w e l f t h rib t o b e
deflected d o w n almost to t h e rim of t h e
p e l v i s . S i m i l a r l y , t h e e l e v e n t h rib c a n b e
pulled d o w n toward t h e pad o n t h e crest
of the hip bone.
Costal
T h e free r i b s — t e n t h , e l e v e n t h , a n d t w e l f t h arch
Umbilical
—are attached to the diaphragm and establish ^trap
Umbilicus (variable
its w i d t h a n d r a n g e o f m o v e m e n t . T h e u m b i l -
locations)
ical s t r a p i s t h u s c l o s e l y a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e
d i a p h r a g m o n t h e side. T h e r e s u l t o f t i g h t n e s s
in t h e strap is a d i a p h r a g m t h a t is f u n c t i o n -
ally a n d s t r u c t u r a l l y t o o n a r r o w a n d c o n s e -
quently overworked. Breathing capacity is
more labored and the diaphragm begins to
a c t like a r e t a i n i n g s h e l f a c r o s s t h e b o d y . A n
e x t r e m e version of this is k n o w n as a pigeon
breast.

T h e pubic or groin strap is t h e lowest strap Figure 15-3

i n t h e a b d o m e n (Fig. 15-4). I t m a y b e s e e n o n The location of the umbilical strap is variable
76 THE ENDLESS WEB

the front of the body in the dense pad of

c o n n e c t i v e tissue on t h e surface of t h e pubic
b o n e . It c o n t i n u e s sideways a r o u n d t h e body,
crossing the groin. A diagonal heavy ligament
(the inguinal ligament) connects the anterior
superior spines o f t h e h i p b o n e t o t h e lateral
points of the pubic b o n e . This is crossed by
t h e h o r i z o n t a l p u l l o f t h e p u b i c b a n d . After i t
crosses t h e inguinal ligament, t h e b a n d c o n -
t i n u e s l a t e r a l l y o v e r t h e g r e a t e r t r o c h a n t e r (at
the top of the thigh bone), mixing with the
b u i l d u p o f fat a n d f i b r o u s t i s s u e s o o f t e n
f o u n d o v e r t h a t p r o t u b e r a n c e . T o t h e rear,
it runs deep to the lower border of the gluteus
m a x i m u s (Fig. 15-5), e n d i n g a t t h e j u n c t i o n
of the sacrum with the tailbone (coccyx). Figure 15-4
Posteriorly, it c o n t r i b u t e s to (and s o m e t i m e s Groin strap, anterior view (also showing inguinal
forms) t h e gluteal fold. It blends into t h e strap and ligament).
heavy pad f o u n d on t h e ischial tuberosities
(sitting b o n e s ) .
S t r o n g cross-pulls are associated w i t h this
b a n d . In the center front, there is a vertical
c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e rib c a g e a n d t h e
pubic crest associated w i t h t h e rectus abdo-
m i n i s a n d its c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e (Fig. 15-6).
This vertical retaining b a n d for t h e front of
t h e b o d y is very c o m m o n l y h y p e r t o n e d (over-
strong). T h i s relates to o u r cultural preference
f o r a flat b e l l y a n d t o o u r t e n d e n c y t o o v e r e x -
ercise. T h e act of habitually sucking in t h e
belly itself s h o r t e n s t h e front of t h e body.
O n e i t h e r side o f t h e p u b i c b o n e , cross-
pulls o n t h e b a n d t e n d t o b e s o m e w h a t Figure 15-5
o b l i q u e . O n e arises f r o m t h e l o w e r m a r g i n Groin strap, posterior view.
of the oblique muscles of the abdomen as
t h e y c o m e d o w n t o f o r m t h e i n g u i n a l liga- as a V-shaped t h i c k e n i n g on t h e inside of
m e n t . As t h e strap crosses t h e greater t h e legs, a l o n g t h e p u b i c r a m u s . T h e strap
t r o c h a n t e r o f t h e f e m u r , t h e r e are p u l l s f r o m i s s p l i t — p a r t o f i t g o e s b e t w e e n t h e legs a n d
b e l o w , c o m i n g f r o m t h e leg, a n d f r o m a b o v e , part goes a r o u n d t h e legs.
c o m i n g f r o m t h e crest o f t h e hip b o n e . T h e p u b i c strap is a c o m p l e x weaving in
As was t h e case in t h e collar strap, s o m e a n d out of t h e b o n y structure at the base of
o f t h e fibers o f t h e p u b i c b a n d run d e e p t o t h e a b d o m e n . T w o internal cross-structures
t h e h i p j o i n t r a t h e r t h a n a c r o s s its o u t e r sur- are l o c a t e d h e r e — t h e pelvic a n d urogenital
f a c e , a l t e r i n g t h e w a y t h e f e m u r tits i n t o t h e diaphragms. The internal extension of the
h i p socket. In addition, parts of t h e strap exist p u b i c strap is c o n t i n u o u s w i t h t h e c o n n e c t i v e
 THE COLLAR BAND, UMBILICAL BAND, AND GROIN BAND 77

tissue of b o t h of t h e s e . In turn, these dia-

p h r a g m s are p e n e t r a t e d by, a n d c o n t i n u o u s
with, the musculature of the rectum, urethra,
and vagina (Fig. 15-7).
The location of the tailbone is important
because it is o n e e n d of support for t h e h a m -
m o c k c a l l e d t h e p e l v i c f l o o r . I t i s a l s o , a t its
connection with the sacrum, the endpoint of
t h e p u b i c strap. Unfortunately, t h e t a i l b o n e
is one of the most vulnerable and accident-
prone locations in t h e body. Children repeat-
e d l y fall b a c k w a r d o n t o t h e i r t a i l b o n e s . I n
l a t e r life, a c c i d e n t s i n v o l v i n g b i c y c l e s , r o l l e r
skates, a n d m a n y t e a m sports s e e m s o m e h o w
t o f o c u s o n t h e t a i l b o n e a n d its a p t i t u d e f o r
getting j a m m e d . In general, we don't consider
t h i s d a m a g e — n o b o n e i s b r o k e n , i t i s n ' t seri-
ous. But this can be o n e of the longest lasting
kinds of imbalance in the body. A w r e n c h e d
tailbone has no support to pull it b a c k i n t o
Figure 15-6
Groin strap with rectus abdominis. position; no o n e has ever seen a plaster cast
on a tailbone. Most doctors, bodyworkers,
a n d sports trainers d o n ' t t h i n k t h e c o c c y x is
very i m p o r t a n t . To us, seen a n a t o m i c a l l y , it
is r e m i n i s c e n t of t h e tip of an arrow. T h e V-
shaped sacrum is t h e arrowhead, a n d t h e ver-
t e b r a l c o l u m n i s t h e s h a f t . T h e c o c c y x , like
t h e arrow tip, guides t h e direction of m o v e -
ment; the spine compensates by flexion,
extension, and rotation. W h e n the pubic
strap t i g h t e n s d o w n , it reduces flexibility,
c e m e n t i n g t h e c o c c y x i n t o a fixed attitude.
T h e pelvic a n d p u b i c straps h a v e very
h e a v y vertical i n t e r c o n n e c t i o n s in front a n d
back. In front this is partly the c o n t i n u a t i o n
of t h e lower rectus a b d o m i n i s fascia as it tra-
verses t h e a p r o n o f t h e pelvic strap t o w a r d t h e
pubic strap. It has sideways ramifications that
thicken the inguinal ligament. In the back,
t h e t w o straps are c o n n e c t e d by a h e a v y pad
on b o t h the inside and the outside of the
sacroiliac j u n c t i o n . This configuration, with
the connections in front and back, and the
Figure 15-7 straps b e t w e e n , gives a m o d i f i e d " j o c k s t r a p "
The pelvic and urogenital diaphragms. or "chastity belt" under t h e skin.
78 THE ENDLESS WEB

Figure 15-8
 BODY RETINACULAE (B A N D S / S T R A P S) 79

Figure 1 5 - 9
 PART FOUR

Anatomy and Function

SIXTEEN
Proprioception
Internal Body Awareness
M o v e m e n t can be evaluated from the outside
by a trained observer. It is evaluated f r o m t h e
inside by proprioception. This is t h e internal
physical sensation of position in three-dimen-
sional space. Most of us c a n sense our bodies
to s o m e degree. W h e n we t u n e in, however, it
is surprising h o w m a n y parts of our bodies we
d o n ' t f e e l . For e x a m p l e , m o s t p e o p l e w a l k
around with one shoulder higher than the
other, o n e eyebrow higher t h a n t h e other, etc.
Yet w e are rarely a w a r e o f t h i s . W e a r e s t a r t l e d
w h e n s o m e o n e points it out, and usually find
it difficult to sense e v e n t h e n . W i t h s o m e
effort, w e m a y feel o u r f e e t , b u t f i n d i t i m p o s -
sible t o s e n s e o u r a n k l e s . W e m a y b e a b l e t o
r e a c h o u r l o w e r legs, b u t s o m e h o w c a n ' t g e t
a sense of our i n n e r thighs.
T h e older w e get, t h e m o r e w e t e n d t o limit
our body sense to w h a t hurts. Children often
seem to have a pleasurable sense of their b o d -
ies. T h r o u g h t r a i n i n g , a c c i d e n t s , a n d u n w e l -
c o m e sensations, adults learn n o t to take
pleasure in their bodies. Everything f r o m
cultural taboos t o u n w a n t e d e m o t i o n s a n d
painful memories (physical a n d e m o t i o n a l )
t e a c h a d u l t s t o b e less a w a r e o f t h e i r b o d i e s .
Proprioception is the conscious part of
body awareness. There is also an u n c o n s c i o u s
aspect of t h e body, and it is here that cultural
b o d y i m a g e s are t h e m o s t p r o f o u n d l y i n f l u e n -
t i a l . V i c t o r i a n i d e a s o f " n i c e n e s s " still e x i s t i n
t h e m o d e r n g u i s e o f o k a y - n e s s . It's o k a y t o
feel m y s h o u l d e r s ; it's less o k a y t o feel m y
b r e a s t s , a l t h o u g h it's m o r e o k a y t o feel m y
breasts w h e n I'm a l o n e t h a n w h e n I ' m i n
public, and this is again different from breast
s e l f - e x a m i n a t i o n . Little c h i l d r e n are t a u g h t
t h a t it's o k a y , e v e n w o n d e r f u l , t o t i e y o u r
s h o e l a c e s a n d b r a g a b o u t it. It's m u c h less
o k a y t o zip y o u r fly a n d b r a g a b o u t t h a t . It's
okay as a teenager to be athletic and to show
o f f y o u r p h y s i c a l p r o w e s s . It's n o t o k a y t o
swank your hips or push out your breasts.
W h e n w e g i v e u p t h e f r e e d o m t o feel o u r
bodies in this way, it is n o t a f r e e d o m easily
regained. T h e teenager w h o chooses n o t to
feel m o v e m e n t i n h i s o r h e r h i p s m a y f i n d a s
an adult t h a t t h e r e is a loss of sexual feeling.
Pelvic m o v e m e n t , sexual identity, a n d t h e
like a r e l o a d e d a r e a s o f a w a r e n e s s . E v e n i f w e
turn to s o m e t h i n g neutral, such as throwing a
ball, p r o p r i o c e p t i o n o f t h e m o v e m e n t will b e
defined by body image, m o v e m e n t image,
accidents, and physical structure.
Proprioception is the summation of our
physical history into the m o m e n t of present
a c t i v i t y . As I t h r o w a b a l l , I m a y f e e l my w r i s t
s n a p p i n g a s t h e b a l l i s r e l e a s e d b u t h a v e less
awareness of h o w my elbow extends. I m a y
feel m y a r m a s I t h r o w , b u t n o t h o w m y a r m
c o n n e c t s to my back or h o w my back is sup-
p o r t e d t h r o u g h m y pelvis a n d legs. I n t h e
Midwest, t h e t e r m for this kind of w h o l e b o d y
e n g a g e m e n t is " b o d y English." Every physical
act reverberates t h r o u g h t h e w h o l e body, a n d
t h i s c a n b e c o n s c i o u s l y felt. P r o p r i o c e p t i o n ,
then, is sensing the mechanics of m o v e m e n t .
W h e r e there is a gap in proprioception, there
is a habitual i n h i b i t i o n of m o v e m e n t . This is
a n c h o r e d i n t h e f l e s h b y loss o f e l a s t i c i t y i n
t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e , a r e d u c t i o n i n its a b i l i t y
t o s t r e t c h a n d t h e n r e t u r n t o its o r i g i n a l
shape. Releasing these contractions in the
c o n n e c t i v e tissues is a m a t t e r of physical or
mental awareness.
T h e straps i n h i b i t p h y s i c a l r e s p o n s i v e n e s s
a n d proprioception. An i m a g e of h o w a strap
w o u l d feel p r o p r i o c e p t i v e l y i s a w o m a n i n t h e
84 THE ENDLESS WEB
early part of this c e n t u r y wearing a corset.
S h e h a s little o r n o articulation o f m o v e m e n t
between the top and b o t t o m halves of her
b o d y . A s s h e w a l k s , u n d u l a t i o n f r o m h e r legs
t h r o u g h her waist i n t o h e r chest a n d shoul-
ders i s i n h i b i t e d . W h e n w e d o n o t f e e l m o v e -
m e n t in t h e waist or at t h e t o p of t h e pelvis,
a similar structure under t h e skin occurs.
C o n n e c t i v e tissue c a n h a r d e n t o t h e p o i n t
w h e r e i t a c t s like a c o r s e t . W e t e n d n o t t o f e e l
this as a restriction. If we did, it w o u l d be
irritating. Instead, w e simply feel t h e c o m -
forting familiarity of n o t being able to m o v e
our waists. It is n o t always possible to release
structures like this b y physical m e a n s a l o n e .
A Rolfer c a n set t h e stage for t h e release, b u t
u n t i l t h e individual is ready to feel m o v e m e n t
t h r o u g h t h e area, t h e o n l y t h i n g a Rolfer c a n
do is allow the person to b e c o m e m o r e pre-
cisely aware of t h e area of h o l d i n g . T h e let-
ting go is done by the client.
P r o p r i o c e p t i o n is filtered t h r o u g h percep-
t u a l s t y l e . T h e r e a r e p e o p l e w h o are p r e d o m i -
n a n t l y visual a n d t h o s e w h o are auditory.
V i s u a l i z e r s t e n d t o see a n d k n o w a b o u t t h e i r
external physical image. Auditory types c o m -
pare what t h e y perceive physically to verbal
d e s c r i p t i o n s a n d are m o r e o f t e n aware o f
internal structure and imbalances.
O f t e n p e o p l e a r e u n w i l l i n g t o o c c u p y all
of their potential space. T h e y don't use their
full c h e s t , t h e full p o t e n t i a l o f t h e i r rib c a g e ,
o r a full p e l v i s . U n c o n s c i o u s l y , t h e y s h o r t e n
the body, develop curvatures of the spine,
p u l l t h e legs i n t o t h e h i p , s h o r t e n t h e n e c k .
W o m e n often have thin arms; there m a y be
an unwillingness to demonstrate the potential
or power that is available in arms and shoul-
d e r s . M e n o f t e n h a v e t h i n legs, p e r h a p s a
t i g h t e n i n g o f t h e legs i n r e s p o n s e t o a t i g h t -
e n i n g of t h e pelvis.
W h e n p e o p l e b e c o m e aware o f these gaps
in proprioception and the accompanying
h a b i t u a l attitudes, t h e y are surprised. A l m o s t
invariably, people sense their h e a d as being
m u c h smaller t h a n t h e actual physical struc-
ture. We usually feel our arms to be shorter
t h a n t h e i r l e n g t h , o r o u r legs, p a r t i c u l a r l y t h e
t h i g h b o n e s , as shorter t h a n t h e y are. Possibly
this reflects p s y c h o l o g i c a l a s s u m p t i o n s about
o u r c a p a c i t y . T h e r e is a l s o a p h y s i c a l result
o f this kind o f attitude. W h e n I'm n o t aware
o f t h e full s p a c e i n m y h e a d , t h e skull b o n e s
c o m p r e s s . This shows as a narrowness at t h e
temples, creating a head that is too long and
too deep.
O n e indicator of the difference between
reality a n d internal image is t h e sense of un-
familiarity w h e n we're faced by a three-way
mirror. We m a y be a c c u s t o m e d to our frontal
i m a g e , b u t feel surprise a t o u r p r o f i l e a n d
e v e n m o r e a t o u r s h a p e i n b a c k . It's w o r t h
n o t i n g h e r e , t o o , t h a t w e are a " d o i n g " s o c i -
ety, o r i e n t e d t o w a r d w h a t i s i n f r o n t o f u s . A s
w e see o u r s e l v e s i n a m i r r o r , i t i s c o m m o n t o
m a k e automatic adjustments to "look better."
We are apt to a s s u m e a " b e t t e r " posture, pull
our shoulders back, stand up "straighter."
W e are r a r e l y a t rest i n f r o n t o f a m i r r o r .
Static proprioception b e c o m e s more c o m -
p l e x i n m o v e m e n t . Normally, w e are i n m o v e -
ment, and in m o v e m e n t the limitations of a
structure b e c o m e m u c h m o r e apparent. Struc-
t u r a l a b e r r a t i o n s a n d p r e f e r e n c e s are f u n d a -
m e n t a l l y a m a t t e r o f h o l d i n g s o m e p a r t rigid.
W h e n the body moves, it must move around
t h e h e l d place. W h e n t h e h i p i s restricted, for
e x a m p l e , effort has to be e x p e n d e d to hold it
rigid w h i l e w a l k i n g . M o v e m e n t s s u c h a s w a l k -
ing d o w n t h e street or up steps, or eating at a
t a b l e all s h o w c h a r a c t e r i s t i c b o d y h a b i t s .
P r o p o r t i o n a n d b a l a n c e are t h e keys t o
m o v e m e n t . Anomalies in physical proportion
or balance, whether seen from the outside or
s e n s e d i n t e r n a l l y , are s i g n s o f t h e c o n n e c t i v e
tissue pattern u n d e r t h e skin, reflecting t h e
c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e s t r u c t u r e w e h a v e b e e n talk-
i n g a b o u t — t h e surface b o d y straps, vertical
holdings, diaphragms, a n d shelves through
the body.
SEVENTEEN
Upper Body
T h e r e are m a n y ways t o analyze h u m a n struc-
ture. Osteopaths, orthopedists, physiatrists,
a n d c h i r o p r a c t o r s see p e o p l e i n t e r m s o f b o n e
p l a c e m e n t — h o w s t r a i g h t t h e s p i n e is, h o w
well t h e a l i g n m e n t s t a c k s u p f r o m h e e l t o ear.
General medical practitioners generally evalu-
ate h e a l t h in terms of t h e soft t i s s u e s — m u s -
cles, b l o o d a n d n e r v e s u p p l y , i n t e r n a l o r g a n s .
W e are p r o p o s i n g a n o t h e r perspective—evalu-
a t i o n o f t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d o f t h e b o d y .
This includes the conformation of muscle and
b o n e but is not limited to these.
T h e straps w e h a v e d e s c r i b e d g i v e a s e n s e
of h o w c o n n e c t i v e tissue c a n create structures
that overlap and interconnect. T h e direction
of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue is n o t d e t e r m i n e d by
any one muscle or muscle group. Our purpose
is to give an image of p h y s i o g n o m y t h a t is
m o r e inclusive, m o r e directly related to t h e
experience of structure a n d to m o v e m e n t .
In order to discuss structure, we analyze t h e
b o d y r o u g h l y i n t e r m s o f its u p p e r a n d l o w e r
halves. T h e easiest w a y t o b e g i n talking a b o u t
the upper body is to look at the position of
t h e ribs. I n m o s t p e o p l e , t h e ribs a n g l e t o o
s h a r p l y d o w n w a r d i n f r o n t . I d e a l l y t h e ribs
would hang more horizontally, although nor-
mally there is always s o m e slight angle.
The typical b o d y configuration that a c c o m -
p a n i e s d e p r e s s i o n o f t h e u p p e r ribs i n c l u d e s a
sunken and flattened upper chest, elevated
shoulders, a n d a head thrust forward. These
t h r e e g o t o g e t h e r . I f t h e u p p e r ribs w e r e raised
in front, the shoulders would automatically
drop and the head c o m e back to a m o r e
upright position. Likewise, if t h e focus is on
bringing the head back, it is necessary to
allow m o r e space for t h e b r e a t h t o c o m e u p
i n t o t h e u p p e r ribs. O r i f t h e s h o u l d e r s r e l a x ,
space i s m a d e for t h e h e a d t o c o m e b a c k a n d
t h e ribs i n f r o n t t o c o m e u p w a r d . F o r e a c h
person, t h e initial c h a n g e is different. But for
o n e of these habits to be modified, the other
two m u s t c h a n g e as well.
The position of the head, upper chest, and
s h o u l d e r s i s n o t s e p a r a t e f r o m t h e rest o f t h e
b o d y . W h e n t h e u p p e r ribs a r e c o m p r e s s e d ,
v e r y o f t e n t h e l o w e r ribs a r e o v e r e x p a n d e d .
The extreme of this is the pear-shaped body,
i n w h i c h t h e l o w e r r i b s flare o u t w a r d w h i l e
t h e u p p e r ribs are so c o m p r e s s e d t h a t t h e
shoulders are d r a w n t o g e t h e r a n d narrow.
It is t h e soft tissue c o n f i g u r a t i o n s t h a t give
rise t o t h e s e s i l h o u e t t e s . A m o r e d e t a i l e d a n a t -
o m y of the chest and upper back is needed to
flesh o u t o u r p o i n t . T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue
c o n f o r m s to t h e muscle. In fact, it would be
m o r e a c c u r a t e t o s a y t h a t t h e c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue guides t h e m u s c l e pathways. F u r t h e r m o r e ,
it is c o n v e n i e n t to say t h a t m u s c l e a t t a c h e s to
b o n e , b u t this is n o t strictly true. T h e c o n n e c -
tive tissue e x t e n s i o n s a r o u n d m u s c l e s (ten-
dons, aponeuroses) continue on as the
c o n n e c t i v e tissue covering of b o n e (perios-
t e u m ) . B o n e a n d m u s c l e lie e m b e d d e d w i t h i n
t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue w e b .
In the front of the chest, the major mus-
cle of t h e outer layer is t h e pectoralis major,
t h e " p e c s " that muscle builders attempt to
d e v e l o p (Fig. 17-1). It is a l a r g e f a n - s h a p e d
muscle covering the majority of the upper
c h e s t , e x t e n d i n g f r o m t h e m i d d l e ribs u p
a l o n g t h e side o f t h e b r e a s t b o n e a n d t h e m i d -
dle half of t h e c o l l a r b o n e . T h e fan converges
across the shoulder in front, a n d ends by
attaching to the humerus an inch or two
below the shoulder joint.
In the back, there is t h e trapezius, t h e
w e i g h t l i f t e r ' s " s t r a p s " (Fig. 17-2). T h i s o r i g i -
n a t e s f r o m t h e b a c k o f t h e skull a n d r u n s
86 THE ENDLESS WEB

a l o n g t h e b a c k o f t h e s p i n e s o f all t h e n e c k
vertebrae and the upper seven or eight chest
v e r t e b r a e . It, t o o , i s f a n - s h a p e d , c o n v e r g i n g
on an a t t a c h m e n t to t h e tip of the shoulder
Fascia of called t h e a c r o m i o n . T h e a c r o m i o n is a b o n y
Fascia of trapezius m.
sternocleido- shelf that can be palpated at the corner of the
mastoid m. junction between the shoulder and the arm.
Fascia of T h e l o w e r p a r t o f t h e t r a p e z i u s , a s i t crosses
pectoralis t h e shoulder blade (scapula), also attaches to
major m.
t h e a c r o m i o n as well as to t h e scapular spine.
In t h e b a c k , a n o t h e r large fan-shaped mus-
cle flows up f r o m below, called t h e latissimus
Fascia of
• latissimus dorsi—the weightlifter's "lats." It attaches to
dorsi m.
t h e s p i n e s o f t h e l o w e r c h e s t v e r t e b r a e a s well
as to t h e spines of the lumbar vertebrae down
to t h e sacrum. T h e point of this fan converges
upward, obliquely crossing over the lower tip
of t h e shoulder blade. It t h e n runs along the
lateral m a r g i n of t h e shoulder blade a n d ends
Figure 17-1 b y a t t a c h i n g t o t h e h u m e r u s (arm b o n e ) just
Anterior arm and shoulder fascia.
b e h i n d the a t t a c h m e n t of the pectoralis
major.
These three muscles make up what we
c a l l t h e e x t e r n a l m u s c l e a n d c o n n e c t i v e tissue
layer of t h e chest, relating t h e chest to t h e
shoulder and arm, to the head, and to the
l o w e r b a c k . T h e n e x t layer, w h i c h serves t o
Fascia of stabilize t h e position of t h e shoulder blade,
Fascia of
trapezius m.
deltoid m. is m o r e d i f f i c u l t to v i s u a l i z e as a layer. In t h e
Acromion f r o n t , u n d e r n e a t h t h e p e c t o r a l i s m a j o r , lies
t h e p e c t o r a l i s m i n o r (Fig. 17-3). T h i s is a n a r -
row small muscle that attaches to the middle
Scapula ribs a n d a n g l e s u p w a r d t o a t t a c h o n t h e c o r a -
Septum (dotted line) c o i d p r o c e s s . T h i s h o o k - l i k e p r o j e c t i o n for-
ward from t h e inside of the shoulder blade
Fascia of
latissimus c a n b e felt just u n d e r n e a t h t h e collar b o n e ,
dorsi m.
i n t h e d e p r e s s i o n b e t w e e n t h e larger a r m
m u s c l e s a n d t h e sides o f t h e ribs.
T h e p e c t o r a l i s m i n o r a c t s like a l e v e r o n
t h e coracoid process, m o v i n g t h e shoulder
b l a d e . T h e c o r a c o i d p r o c e s s i s v e r y m u c h like
Figure 17-2 a h o o k on a suspended metal plate (the scap-
Posterior arm and shoulder fascia. ula). W h e n the h o o k is tugged near the top,
 UPPER BODY 87

t h e l o w e r b o r d e r o f t h e p l a t e i s raised like a Coracoclavicular

ligament &
drawbridge. If the pectoralis m i n o r in front Subclavius m.

is habitually tight, t h e pull on t h e c o r a c o i d

p r o c e s s results i n w h a t w e c a l l " w i n g e d " Coracoid.
process
s c a p u l a e i n t h e b a c k (Fig. 17-4). T h e m e d i a l
margin of t h e shoulder blade will project Coracobrachialis .Pectoralis
m. minor m.
outward.
Two other attachments to the coracoid
p r o c e s s are c o n n e c t e d d o w n i n t o t h e a r m . Biceps m.
(short head)
T h e short head of the biceps brachii (com-
m o n l y called simply t h e biceps) crosses b o t h
the shoulder and the elbow joints. Thus,
tightness in this muscle on the front of the
a r m will a l s o r e p o s i t i o n t h e s c a p u l a . T h e c o r a -
cobrachialis is a shorter m u s c l e t h a t spans
from the coracoid process to t h e inside of t h e
humerus about halfway d o w n the arm, rein-
forcing t h e action of t h e biceps on the scapula
(Fig. 17-3). Figure 17-3
A ligament from the coracoid process to The deeper layer of the chest muscles; the arrows
indicate the line of force of these muscles. The
the underside of t h e clavicle contains t h e
focus here is on the coracoid process of the
subclavius muscle, a small muscle w h o s e
scapula and therefore includes lines of force of
function is traditionally considered m i n i m a l . the relevant arm muscles.
C a l l e d t h e c o r a c o c l a v i c u l a r l i g a m e n t (Fig.
17-3), its f u n c t i o n is p r o b a b l y a f a c t o r in t h e
n o r m a l p o s i t i o n i n g o f t h e s c a p u l a . T o us, t h i s
is n o t a l i g a m e n t , b u t a t e n d o n t h r o u g h
w h i c h the subclavius muscle is attached to
the coracoid process. T h e action of t h e sub-
clavius t h r o u g h this c o n n e c t i v e tissue a t t a c h -
m e n t i s n o t g r e a t i n t e r m s o f m o v e m e n t . Its
i m p o r t a n c e lies i n t h e w a y i t s t a b i l i z e s t h e
fascial s h e a t h o f t h e c h e s t a s a w h o l e . T h e r e i s
a n a n a l o g o u s s t r u c t u r e i n t h e leg. T h i s i s t h e
m u s c l e a n d a t t a c h e d fascial bridge called t h e
t e n s o r f a s c i a lata a n d i l i o t i b i a l b a n d . T h e
b a n d i s a lateral t h i c k e n i n g o f t h e f a s c i a c o v -
ering t h e t h i g h as a w h o l e (the fascia lata).
The action of t h e comparatively small tensor
Figure 17-4
m u s c l e serves t o s t a b i l i z e t h e w h o l e o f t h e In this pose, the pectoralis minor is contracted; the
thigh (Fig. 17-5). result is a "winged" scapula.
88 THE ENDLESS WEB

By identifying the muscles that connect

to t h e c o r a c o i d process, we c a n visualize
t h e fascial i n v o l v e m e n t s . F r o m t h e coracoid
process, t h e r e are strong c o n n e c t i o n s to t h e
m i d d l e ribs, t o t h e r a d i u s a n d u l n a o f t h e
Tensor forearm, to the humerus of the upper arm,
fasciae
Gluteus and to t h e middle clavicle. Tension on any or
latae
maximus all o f t h e s e w i l l r e s u l t i n a d e g r e e o f i m m o b i -
lization between the upper chest and the arm
a n d the position of t h e scapula in the back.
M o v e m e n t t h r o u g h a fascial p l a n e is always
broader t h a n m o v e m e n t by an individual
Ilio-tibial
muscle.
tract
O n t h e b a c k , t h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e i s sus-
p e n d e d i n t h r e e p l a c e s . O n its s u r f a c e , t h e
t r a p e z i u s c o n n e c t s t o its m o s t l a t e r a l t i p , pri-
m a r i l y a t t h e a c r o m i o n . A t a d e e p e r layer, t h e
r h o m b o i d s a n d t h e levator scapulae form a
b r o a d s h e e t o f a t t a c h m e n t t o t h e m e d i a l ridge
o f t h e s p i n e . A l s o i n t h i s d e e p e r layer, t h e t w o
teres muscles, m a j o r a n d m i n o r , c o n n e c t t h e
Figure 17-5
s c a p u l a r t r i a n g l e t o t h e u p p e r a r m (Fig. 17-6).
Connections between knee and hip.
T h e s c a p u l a i s t h u s s u s p e n d e d f r o m all o f
its s i d e s : f r o m t h e h e a d b y w a y o f t h e t r a p e z -
ius, f r o m t h e t h o r a c i c s p i n e b y w a y o f t h e
r h o m b o i d s a n d levator, a n d from t h e upper
a r m b y w a y o f t h e teres. T h e elasticity o f t h e
c o n n e c t i v e tissue of e a c h of these allows t h e
s h o u l d e r t o f l o a t o n t o p o f t h e rib c a g e . T h e
Levator . Trapezius t i g h t n e s s of a n y of t h e s e will e n g e n d e r tight-
scapula - m.
m. , Supraspinal n e s s i n t h e o t h e r s a n d will fix t h e s h o u l d e r
blade. T h i s , in turn, will reduce t h e flexibility
Rhomboids. Teres minor/ of the neck and head, the upper back, and
m. infraspinatus
the arm.
R h o m b o i d s a n d teres b e t w e e n t h e m form
a sling t h a t stabilizes t h e m o v e m e n t of t h e
lower part of t h e scapula. W h e n the arm

Teres
m o v e s sideways, t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e
major arm b o n e a n d t h e scapula widens and the
v Trapezius m.
teres s h o u l d b e able t o l e n g t h e n . W h e n the
m.
m u s c l e s r e a c h t h e limit of their elasticity, t h e
s h o u l d e r b l a d e will start t o m o v e s i d e w a y s . Its
m o v e m e n t is stabilized by t h e elasticity of t h e
Figure 17-6 r h o m b o i d s . If the shoulder blade is winged
Scapular suspension. o u t , t h e t e r e s m u s t t h e n a l s o t r y t o stabilize
 UPPER BODY 89

the lower margin of t h e shoulder blade to

p r e v e n t i t f r o m m o v i n g t o o far o u t , a w a y
f r o m t h e flat o f t h e r i b s . T h e t e r e s w e r e n o t
designed for this purpose, a n d so t h e y
shorten. T h e surrounding c o n n e c t i v e tissue
b e c o m e s overtense. W h e n t h e teres lose elas- Rhomboid m.'s
ticity, t h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e i s d r a g g e d a l o n g
with every arm m o v e m e n t .
M a n y people's teres are m u c h t o o s h o r t
and tight. T h e o t h e r half of t h e sling for t h e
s c a p u l a , t h e r h o m b o i d s , t h e n a r e less u s e d
and b e c o m e flaccid. Higher up, t h e levator
scapulae b e c o m e s extremely tight, f o r m i n g a
heavy pad. T h e a t t a c h m e n t of the levator on External iSerratus
the upper middle corner of the scapula is that abdominal anterior m.
oblique m.
p l a c e w h e r e , i f y o u press i t o n a l m o s t a n y o n e ,
h e o r s h e will s i g h , " O h , t h a t h u r t s s o g o o d ! "
A n o t h e r m u s c l e o f t h e m i d d l e layer, t h e
serratus a n t e r i o r , c o n n e c t s t h e l o w e r r i b s
t o t h e u n d e r s i d e o f t h e s c a p u l a (Fig. 17-7).
B o t h serratus a n t e r i o r a n d s u b s c a p u l a r i s lie
Figure 17-7
b e t w e e n t h e rib c a g e a n d t h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e .
The subscapularis (not shown) lines the under-
T h e serratus a t t a c h e s o n t h e l o w e r ribs a n d
surface of the scapula. Its direction of pull is
angles upward toward the medial border of roughly perpendicular to that of the serratus
t h e scapula, a t t a c h i n g just a d j a c e n t to t h e anterior.
attachment of the rhomboids. The subscapu-
laris l i n e s t h e u n d e r s i d e o f t h e s h o u l d e r b l a d e ,
w i t h its fibers c o n v e r g i n g t o w a r d t h e f i b r o u s
capsule of the shoulder joint. These f o r m
a n o t h e r r e c i p r o c a l set o f s l i n g s , f l o a t i n g t h e
Fascia of
s h o u l d e r b l a d e b e t w e e n t h e ribs a n d s h o u l d e r trapezius m.
joint. Normally, t h e f u n c t i o n of t h e serratus
anterior seems to be to stabilize t h e shoulder Acromion Clavicle
Fascia of
b l a d e a s t h e a r m s w i n g s o v e r h e a d . Its f a s c i a deltoid m.
often glues t h e m u s c l e t o t h e p e r i o s t e u m a n d
fascia o f t h e ribs a n d i n t e r c o s t a l m u s c l e s .
Two small muscles on t h e outer surface of
the scapula, the supraspinatus a n d infraspina-
Septum
tus (Fig. 17-6) f u r t h e r r e f i n e t h e m o v e m e n t of
the shoulder blade in relation to the shoulder
j o i n t . T h e s e lie o n t h e s u r f a c e o f t h e s c a p u l a ,
above a n d below t h e scapular spine. In pal-
Figure 17-8
p a t i o n , t h e y o f t e n f e e l like b o n e w h e n t h e
The deltoid fascia interweaves with the septum
shoulder blade is in trouble. dividing the anterior (biceps) and posterior (tri-
We have been talking about h o w the ceps) areas of the arm.
90 THE ENDLESS WEB
s h o u l d e r b l a d e i s s u s p e n d e d i n its r e c i p r o c a t -
ing m u s c u l a r slings. T h e a r m a n d shoulders
also relate in this way. H a n g i n g d o w n , t h e
arm swings from t h e shoulder blade. W h e n
we reach up, t h e reverse is t r u e — t h e shoulder
blades h a n g from the arm.
T h e m a j o r surface c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n
shoulder and arm is the deltoid muscle,
w h i c h covers the shoulder joint. This muscle
acts like a c o n t i n u a t i o n of t h e trapezius, e m -
b r a c i n g its a t t a c h m e n t o n t h e c l a v i c l e , a c r o -
m i u m , a n d s c a p u l a r s p i n e (Fig. 17-8). It
e x t e n d s muscular a c t i o n of t h e trapezius
f r o m t h e h e a d a n d n e c k across t h e shoulder
and down into the middle of the upper arm.
A t a d e e p e r layer, t h e b i c e p s b r a c h i i a n d
the coracobrachialis b o t h suspend the arm
from the coracoid process of the shoulder
blade. In addition, there is the triceps brachii.
O f its t h r e e a t t a c h m e n t s , t w o c o n n e c t t o
t h e h u m e r u s itself a n d o n e — c a l l e d t h e l o n g
h e a d — c o n n e c t s to the outside margin of
t h e shoulder blade just b e l o w t h e shoulder
joint.
These three muscles govern the lengthen-
ing out of the arm from the shoulder blade.
T h e arm should be able to lengthen as it is
raised u p w a r d a n d t o t h e side, s u c h a s w h e n
stretching your arms wide and up toward the
ceiling in t h e relaxing stretch that goes with
Figure 17-9
Shoulder and arm movement
depends on the continuity of fascia—(A) lateral shoulder, (B) anterior shoulder, (C) posterior shoulder.
a yawn. Note that in this kind of stretch, the
shoulder blade is suspended from the arms.
T h e r e are t w o m a j o r factors to consider in
arm m o v e m e n t — t h e m o v e m e n t of muscles
over t h e tip of the shoulder blade and m o v e -
m e n t i n t h e a r m p i t . Ideally, t h e a r m c a n b e
raised w i t h o u t elevating t h e shoulder blade,
w h i c h drops as a c o u n t e r b a l a n c e . In addition,
t h e a r m m u s t b e able t o freely m o v e away
f r o m b o t h t h e rib c a g e a n d t h e s h o u l d e r
blade.
T h e r e is no way t h a t we c a n freely use an
arm without opening the armpit, yet armpits
are t h e focus of a wide variety of e m o t i o n a l
c o n c e r n s . W e h a v e all sorts o f r e a s o n s w h y w e
d o n ' t w a n t to be, in effect, t h a t o p e n . Protec-
tive gestures, fearful gestures, h o l d i n g one's
b r e a t h , a n g r y g e s t u r e s all f o c u s o n t i g h t e n i n g
t h e a r m s d o w n t o t h e r i b s . T h e s e are g e s t u r e s
r e p r e s s i n g r e s p o n s e t o e m o t i o n . W e are i n h i b -
i t i n g w h a t w e w o u l d like t o d o w i t h o u r a r m s :
w a r d i n g o f f a n g e r , fear, r e s e n t m e n t , e t c .
Trapezius, deltoid, pectoralis major, a n d
latissimus dorsi are c o m m o n l y called t h e
extrinsic (outer) m u s c l e s of t h e shoulder area,
c o n n e c t i n g t h e a r m a n d trunk. T o simplify,
we c a n t h i n k of t h e trapezius a n d deltoid as
a single, functionally c o n t i n u o u s structure
(Fig. 17-9 A). T h e s e a r e t h e m u s c l e s t h a t raise
t h e a r m . T h e latissimus dorsi a n d pectoralis
 UPPER BODY 91

major, acting together, bring the arm down true of very small m u s c l e s as of larger sheet-
(Fig. 17-9 B & C). T h e s e m u s c l e s of t h e o u t e r like o n e s . Part o f t h e w a y h e a v y i m m o b i l e
(extrinsic) layer c o u n t e r b a l a n c e e a c h other. t i s s u e p a d s are c r e a t e d i s b y o u r i n s i s t e n c e o n
For e x a m p l e , w h e n t h e a r m i s r a i s e d t o t h e trying to use t h e muscle as a w h o l e instead of
side, d e l t o i d a n d t r a p e z i u s c o n t r a c t a s p e c - sequencing through the muscle as b o d y posi-
toralis m a j o r a n d latissimus dorsi relax, allow- tion d e m a n d s . A m a j o r source of c o n f u s i o n in
ing the arm to extend away from the body. As the practical application of kinesiology is that
t h e a r m returns t o t h e side, pectoralis a n d no muscle exists in isolation. T h e c o n n e c t i v e
latissimus contract as trapezius a n d deltoid tissue b e d provides c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n m u s -
lengthen. cle layers as well as b e t w e e n a d j a c e n t muscles.
T w o kinds o f m o v e m e n t are possible h e r e — These interfaces have t h e greatest potential
d r o p p i n g t h e a r m , w h i c h i s faster, o r s e q u e n - for adhesion, t h i c k e n i n g , a n d s h o r t e n i n g .
tially letting t h e a r m d o w n , w h i c h is slower. Elasticity of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e t w e e n
I n b o t h m o v e m e n t s , o n e set o f m u s c l e s c o n - structures is essential for an effective relation-
tracts. T h e difference b e t w e e n t h e two m o v e - ship b e t w e e n deep a n d superficial (intrinsic
m e n t s i s i n t h e c o u n t e r b a l a n c i n g set o f a n d extrinsic) m u s c l e layers. In t h e front,
m u s c l e s . W h e n t h e m o v e m e n t i s fast, t h e p e c t o r a l i s m i n o r lies u n d e r p e c t o r a l i s m a j o r .
o p p o s i n g m u s c l e s s i m p l y let g o a n d t h e c o n - Toward t h e center front, b o t h muscles affect
n e c t i v e tissue b e d e l a s t i c a l l y s t r e t c h e s . W h e n t h e a c t i o n o f t h e ribs. I n t h e shoulder, t h e
a m o v e m e n t is slow and controlled, t h e pectoralis m i n o r attaches to the coracoid
antagonist muscle lengthens sequentially.
It acts as a brake to m o d u l a t e t h e m o v e m e n t .
I n e i t h e r fast o r s l o w m o v e m e n t s , t h e u l t i -
m a t e limit o n t h e m o v e m e n t will b e t h e limit
of elasticity of t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue bed.
W h a t w e call s e q u e n c i n g i n m u s c l e m o v e -
m e n t i s a f a c t o r i n h o w t h e large flat s u r f a c e
m u s c l e s are u s e d . For e x a m p l e , a s t h e a r m i s
raised, t h e first m u s c l e a c t i v i t y starts a t t h e
portion of t h e trapezius b e t w e e n n e c k a n d
shoulder and continues down the deltoid.
As the arm comes further up, muscle activity
concentrates further d o w n t h e trapezius. T h e
continuing upward m o v e m e n t of the arm is
supported by the vertebrae because of the
a c t i o n of different parts of t h e trapezius.
Anatomical nomenclature occasionally
reflects t h i s s t e p w i s e u s e o f t h e s u r f a c e m u s -
cles b y d i v i d i n g t h e m i n t o s p e c i f i c a l l y n a m e d
sections.
Ideally, i n n o m o v e m e n t d o w e u s e all
fibers o f a m u s c l e s i m u l t a n e o u s l y . A t t h e
deeper layer of fascia a n d m u s c l e , s e q u e n c i n g
m o v e s t h r o u g h a series o f m u s c l e s r a t h e r t h a n Figure 1 7 - 1 0
through the plane of one muscle. This is as Common "knots."
92 THE ENDLESS WEB

mid-back place under

t h e lower tip of t h e
shoulder blade that is
so often painful.
Another mid-back
place on the spine that
is c o m m o n l y painful is
w h e r e t h e lower tip
o f t h e t r a p e z i u s crosses
the uppermost attach-
m e n t of the latissimus
to t h e v e r t e b r a . (Fig.
17-10). This spot
a l m o s t always c o n t a i n s
a s e n s i t i v e k n o t of tis-
s u e . T h i s i s i n t h e area
t h a t w e h a v e b e e n call-
ing t h e dorsal h i n g e .
T h e p a r t o f t h e latis-
simus toward the
h u m e r u s lies i m m e d i -
ately adjacent to the
Figure 17-11 teres m a j o r . T h e teres
m a j o r is a b r i d g e
process while the pectoralis m a j o r attaches to b e t w e e n t h e lower tip of the scapula and the
t h e h u m e r u s . W h e n t h e fascial p a d b e t w e e n a r m b o n e . T h e latissimus c o n n e c t s the arm
t h e t w o b e c o m e s less p l i a b l e , t h e m u s c l e s n o b o n e t o t h e lower b a c k a n d t h e pelvis. W e
longer operate individually. T h e y are u n a b l e f r e q u e n t l y see l a t i s s i m u s a n d t e r e s m a j o r
t o slide o n e a c h o t h e r . A s a r e s u l t , t h e s h o u l - b o u n d together, w i t h t h e result t h a t t h e lower
der b l a d e a n d t h e a r m are activated t o g e t h e r tip of t h e scapula is i m m o b i l i z e d . These inter-
in a n y gesture involving t h e front of t h e a c t i o n s are c o n c e p t u a l l y s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d a n d
chest. give a partial picture of t h e effect of t h e c o n -
I n t h e b a c k , t h e r e are t w o places w h e r e this n e c t i v e tissue o n m o v e m e n t b e t w e e n arm,
k i n d of c o n f u s i o n is likely to occur. T h e tra- s h o u l d e r blade, a n d ribs. For a m o r e c o m p l e t e
pezius overlies t h e r h o m b o i d s a n d levator a n d c o m p l e x view, w e r e c o m m e n d considera-
s c a p u l a e , a l t h o u g h h e r e t h e m u s c l e fibers r u n t i o n o f t h e e f f e c t o f c o n n e c t i v e tissue o n t h e
c r o s s w i s e t o e a c h o t h e r . A t t h e c e n t e r b a c k , all underside of t h e deltoid. This muscle overlies
attach to t h e vertebrae. T h e trapezius attaches a t t a c h m e n t s o f t h e teres m a j o r a n d m i n o r ,
laterally to t h e tip of t h e shoulder blade (acro- pectoralis major and minor, biceps brachii,
m i o n ) , while the r h o m b o i d s and levator scap- coracobrachialis, and infraspinatus.
ulae attach medially to the medial border of Our a n a t o m i c a l illustrations in this section
t h e scapula. W h e n t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d attempt to depict the interactions of muscle,
b e t w e e n these m u s c l e s loses elasticity, t h e b o n e , a n d c o n n e c t i v e tissue i n m o v e m e n t .
s h o u l d e r b l a d e c a n n o t r o t a t e . Its o n l y o p t i o n T h e i n t e r a c t i o n s w i t h t h e d e l t o i d are t o o c o m -
is to be shrugged u p . This is a factor in t h a t p l e x t o s h o w i n t w o d i m e n s i o n s (Fig. 17-11).
EIGHTEEN
Axial Skeleton

We have n o t yet talked about t h e long mus- t o t h e v e r t e b r a i m m e d i a t e l y a b o v e it.

cles o f t h e s p i n e , w h i c h a r e a l s o a p a r t o f t h e
soft tissue layers o f t h e u p p e r b o d y . C o l l e c -
tively, t h e s e are c a l l e d t h e e r e c t o r s p i n a e ,
a n d t h e y travel t h e l e n g t h o f t h e spine f r o m
t h e skull t o t h e s a c r u m (Fig. 18-1). I n b o t h
a p p e a r a n c e a n d s t r u c t u r e , t h e y are m u c h l i k e
a multistrand rope. T h e muscles closer to t h e
outer surface of t h e b o d y are longer; as we go
progressively deeper t h r o u g h t h e layers, m u s -
cle segments b e c o m e shorter a n d shorter. T h e
deepest muscular layer c o n n e c t s o n e vertebra
T h e h e a v y f a s c i a l s h e a t h c o v e r i n g all o f
t h e erector spinae is called t h e lumbo-dorsal
f a s c i a (Fig. 18-2). It c o n t i n u e s u p w a r d to t h e
n e c k a n d to t h e occipital ridge. Below, t h e
l u m b o - d o r s a l fascia is c o n t i n u o u s with t h e
sacral pad a n d e n d s o n t h e c o c c y x . T h i s fascia
is very heavy; it acts as an aponeurosis (broad
a t t a c h m e n t ) , c o n n e c t i n g t h e latissimus dorsi
t o t h e l o w e r h a l f o f t h e s p i n e . A b o v e , t h e fas-
c i a i s less h e a v y ; i t lies u n d e r t h e m i d d l e m u s -
cle layer ( r h o m b o i d s a n d levator scapulae).

Figure 18-1
In these schematics of the erector spinae, the arrows indicate the direction and length of muscle groups.
The most superficial muscle groups are the longest, while the deepest are very short.
94 THE ENDLESS WEB
U p p e r b a c k a n d s h o u l d e r p r o b l e m s are usu-
ally i n t e r c o n n e c t e d t h r o u g h this fascia, w h i c h
feels like a glass p l a t e w h e n it is in t r o u b l e .
In the lower back, restriction in the l u m b o -
dorsal fascia will s h o w as a l o n g i t u d i n a l rope-
l i k e rigidity, s o m e t i m e s m o d i f i e d b y a
cross-pull f r o m t h e latissimus dorsi.
At t h e deepest level, t h e r e is a c o n n e c t i v e
tissue c o n t i n u i t y t h a t includes t h e j o i n t cap-
sules a n d t h e p e r i o s t e u m t h a t e n s h e a t h s e a c h
b o n e . In t h e chest, this layer c o n t i n u e s b o t h
i n s i d e a n d o u t s i d e t h e rib c a g e a n d c o n t a i n s
t h e intercostal muscles b e t w e e n t h e ribs. This
fascia is c o n t i n u o u s with t h e fascia position-
ing the internal organs, not only surrounding
Figure 18-2
Continuity of fascia of erector spinae and gluteals.
t h e o r g a n b u t p e n e t r a t i n g t h r o u g h it. T h i s
is particularly apparent in the lungs, where
c o n n e c t i v e tissue surrounds t h e b r a n c h i n g
system of trachea, bronchi, bronchioles, and
even alveoli.
T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue o n t h e i n n e r surface
o f t h e ribs a n d i n t e r c o s t a l m u s c l e s i s c o n t i n u -
o u s w i t h a v e r t i c a l c o n n e c t i v e tissue s e p t u m
t h a t d i v i d e s t h e r i g h t a n d left sides o f t h e
c h e s t c a v i t y (Fig. 18-3). T h i s is c a l l e d t h e
mediastinum. It connects the underside of
t h e sternum (breastbone) to the vertebrae of
the chest region. The mediastinum contains
t h e heart. It should be elastic e n o u g h that
heart m o v e m e n t can be accomplished with-
out inhibition. Furthermore, this c o n n e c t i o n
between front and back of the chest must
also b e able t o adjust with e a c h breath. W h e n
there is t e n s i o n a n d vertical shortening of the
Figure 18-3
Continuity of fascia within the body cavity. The
diaphragms of the body cavity: one at the clavi-
cles, the respiratory diaphragm, the two pelvic
diaphragms.

mediastinum, both heart function and
b r e a t h i n g are h i n d e r e d . E x t e r n a l l y , t e n s i o n
in t h e m e d i a s t i n u m is visible as a c h e s t t h a t
is t o o thick from front to b a c k — a barrel chest.
In a chest that is t o o narrow from front to
back—a concave chest—the mediastinum and
h e a r t are p u s h e d o f f t o t h e left, w h i c h a g a i n
will c r e a t e t e n s i o n o n t h e h e a r t . D i s p l a c i n g
the heart t h e n constricts t h e lung and
restricts b r e a t h i n g .
A t its l o w e r m a r g i n , t h e m e d i a s t i n u m
is c o n t i n u o u s with t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue of
the diaphragm. The diaphragm is an approx-
imately horizontal curved layer of m u s c l e t h a t
divides t h e c h e s t c a v i t y f r o m t h e a b d o m i n a l
cavity. I t i s m a d e u p o f a h e a v y c i r c u l a r c e n -
tral t e n d o n s u r r o u n d e d b y a r i n g o f m u s c l e .
T h e m u s c l e flares o u t w a r d f r o m t h i s c e n t r a l
t e n d o n a n d blends into t h e muscle wall of
the chest and a b d o m e n .
The diaphragm attaches to the inner
m a r g i n o f t h e rib c a g e ( t h e c o s t a l a r c h ) a n d
extends sideways to t h e tips of t h e free ribs,
the t e n t h , eleventh, a n d twelfth. It crosses
t h e t i p o f t h e v e r y s h o r t t w e l f t h rib a n d t h e n
blends into the oblique muscles of the abdo-
men. The diaphragm is thus not quite hori-
zontal across t h e b o d y ; it has an o b l i q u e angle
downward to the back.
T h e a c t i o n o f t h e d i a p h r a g m i s like a sail
t h a t b e l l i e s in t h e w i n d (Fig. 18-4). Its m i d d l e
bellies u p i n t o t h e c h e s t c a v i t y w i t h e a c h
exhale (1); it flattens with every inhale (2).
W i t h e x h a l a t i o n e a c h rib i s raised b y r o t a t i n g
i n its j o i n t s w i t h t h e v e r t e b r a e . A s t h e ribs lift
a n d e x p a n d t h e c h e s t , air e n t e r s t h e l u n g s .
Ideally, t h e d i a p h r a g m i s l i f t e d a t its m a r g i n s
a s t h e ribs rise a n d e x p a n d s i d e w a y s w i t h
inhalation. In order for this to h a p p e n , t h e
abdomen must lengthen when inhaling.
Abdominal breathing is often depicted as
a pattern in which the a b d o m e n protrudes
in front with each inhale. M a n y disciplines
teach a type of a b d o m i n a l breathing that is
a n a t o m i c a l l y q u e s t i o n a b l e . For t h e a b d o m e n
AXIAL SKELETON 95
Figure 18-4
The action of the respiratory diaphragm.
t o p r o t r u d e i n t h i s way, i t m u s t s h o r t e n w h e n
inhaling. This is a learned pattern, o n e that
is m e n t a l l y c o n t r o l l e d . M o v e m e n t s t h a t are
m e n t a l l y controlled lack adaptive flexibility.
T h e tendency is to over-focus on what has
b e e n learned. In this case, t h e a b d o m e n is
m o v e d i n p r e f e r e n c e t o t h e ribs.
Exhaling involves the c o m b i n e d action
of t h e d i a p h r a g m a n d o n e layer of t h e inter-
costal m u s c l e s b e t w e e n t h e ribs. In a n o r m a l ,
unforced exhale, muscle action originates in
the diaphragm and continues to the abdomi-
n a l o b l i q u e s . T h i s b r i n g s t h e rib d o w n a n d
a l l o w s t h e d i a p h r a g m t o r e c o i l t o its n o r m a l
d o m e shape up i n t o t h e pleural (lung) cavity.
Air i s p u s h e d o u t o f t h e l u n g s . T h e s y s t e m
is n o t dependent on the presence of a lung.
Even people with only o n e lung can achieve
n o r m a l c h e s t m o v e m e n t o n b o t h sides.
Rib a c t i o n during b r e a t h i n g involves three
separate types of rib m o v e m e n t . T h e s e are
well described in m o s t a n a t o m y a n d physi-
o l o g y texts. W e w o u l d like t o e m p h a s i z e t h e
n e e d f o r e a c h rib t o m o v e s e p a r a t e l y a n d
freely. I f a n y o n e rib fails t o m a i n t a i n its p o r -
t i o n o f t h e chest c o n t o u r , a d j a c e n t ribs a n d
96 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 18-5
Diaphragms of the body cavity.
e v e n t u a l l y t h e w h o l e rib cage are distorted. If
t h i s p r o c e s s r e a c h e s a c r i t i c a l l e v e l , t h e r e is a
general c o n n e c t i v e tissue response. This c a n
be felt as an overall rigidity in t h e c o n n e c t i v e
t i s s u e o f t h e c h e s t , w h i c h f e e l s a l m o s t like a
strait j a c k e t u n d e r t h e s k i n .
Filling t h e space i n t h e n o t c h b e t w e e n t h e
clavicle in front a n d t h e h e a v y musculature
o f t h e n e c k a n d s h o u l d e r b l a d e i n t h e b a c k are
t h e s c a l e n e s (Fig. 18-5). T h e s e are t h e m u s c l e s
i n t h e d e p r e s s i o n o n e i t h e r side a t t h e b a s e o f
t h e n e c k . T h e y a t t a c h t o t h e upper ribs. T h e
lungs e x t e n d u p just u n d e r n e a t h t h e m . T h e
scalenes serve a f u n c t i o n a n a l o g o u s to t h a t
of t h e respiratory diaphragm, expanding and
contracting w h e n breath enters the upper tip
of the lung. Since the scalenes attach to the
processes of the n e c k vertebrae, tension in the
n e c k restricts b r e a t h i n g i n t h e u p p e r m o s t part
of the lungs. And tension in the neck has
reached endemic proportions in our
overachiever culture.
T h e neck can be seen as a continuation of
t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue structures of t h e chest.
All s t r u c t u r e s i n t h e n e c k h a v e a b r o a d e r c o n -
t i n u a t i o n below, m u c h in t h e way a plastic
bag is gathered t o g e t h e r with a twist at the
t o p . T h e deepest layer of t h e n e c k includes
the c o n t i n u a t i o n of the erector spinae; the
m i d d l e layer includes t h e scalenes. T h e outer-
m o s t surface layer consists of t h e trapezius
and the sternocleidomastoid.
The sternocleidomastoid extends from the
b a s e o f t h e skull j u s t b e h i n d t h e ear ( m a s t o i d
process) d o w n to t h e c o n n e c t i o n between the
clavicle a n d the breastbone (sternum). It often
b e c o m e s very p r o m i n e n t in older people from
o v e r u s e i n m o v i n g t h e h e a d . Ideally, t h i s pair
o f muscles o n l y stabilizes t h e m o v e m e n t s o f
nodding the head and turning the head from
side t o s i d e . W h e n t h e h e a d i s h a b i t u a l l y
p i t c h e d forward, as is t o o o f t e n t h e case, t h e
upper trapezius b e c o m e s a primary support of
the head. It is used to hold the head on, and
i t l o s e s m u c h o f its f u n c t i o n a l r o l e i n h e a d
movement. The sternocleidomastoid then
takes on almost t h e entire f u n c t i o n of t h e
trapezius.
T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue of t h e outer layer of
the neck is continuous with the connective
tissue of t h e jaw. T h e pad over t h e angle of
t h e j a w ties i n t o t h e s t e r n o c l e i d o m a s t o i d
(Fig. 18-6). I t c a n a c t a s a n i n h i b i t o r t o t h e
freedom of m o v e m e n t in the jaw and so
 AXIAL SKELETON 97

indirectly affect m o v e m e n t of t h e h e a d as a
whole. If you c l a m p your jaw as a habit, you
will a l s o b e c l a m p i n g y o u r h e a d . I f y o u c l a m p
y o u r j a w h a r d e n o u g h , i t will b e d i f f i c u l t t o
shake your h e a d " n o , " a n d also difficult to
shake your head " y e s . " T h e fascia o n t h e
underside of the jaw is continuous with that
of the tongue. T h e inside of the m o u t h and
t o n g u e are t h e r e b y i n c l u d e d i n r e s t r i c t i o n s
of t h e face a n d h e a d .
T h e erector spinae extend up to attach to
t h e b a s e o f t h e skull, m i n g l i n g w i t h t h e h e a v y
pad that is found on the back base of t h e
skull. O n t h e b a c k o f t h e n e c k , t h e f a s c i a o f
the sternocleidomastoid and trapezius is c o n -
tinuous w i t h t h e skullcap of c o n n e c t i v e tissue
on t h e h e a d . At t h e deepest level, a l o n g t h e
spines o f t h e n e c k vertebrae a n d u p o n t o t h e
b u m p o n t h e b a c k o f t h e skull, t h e r e i s a v e r y Figure 18-6
The connective tissue of the outer layer of the
h e a v y rope of c o n n e c t i v e tissue fibers. This is
neck.
k n o w n a s t h e l i g a m e n t u m n u c h a e (Fig. 18-7).
It fans out over t h e projection at the back of
t h e skull ( o c c i p u t ) , f o r m i n g a l m o s t a T s h a p e .
I t a c t s like a s e p t u m i n t h e b a c k o f t h e n e c k ,
dividing right a n d left halves o f t h e n e c k i n t o
s e p a r a t e c o m p a r t m e n t s . Its a c t i o n a s a s e p t u m
serves t o c o n n e c t t h e s u p e r f i c i a l a n d d e e p
layers o f m u s c l e t o e a c h o t h e r i n t h e b a c k .
This ligament b e c o m e s especially thickened,
almost bony, in people w h o habitually thrust
the head forward.
T h e septum of the l i g a m e n t u m n u c h a e is a
normal c o n n e c t i o n between outer and deeper
layers o f s o f t t i s s u e . T h e r e a r e s i m i l a r s e p t a
elsewhere in t h e body. T h e y provide addi-
Figure 18-7
tional strength because a l i g a m e n t is denser
The ligamentum nuchae forms a surface covering
a n d m o r e s t a b l e t h a n its f a s c i a l c o u n t e r p a r t .
for the muscles on both sides at the base of the
Septa also divide a n d c o m p a r t m e n t a l i z e f u n c - skull. It then dives deep to form a septum between
tion by separating myofascia. the right and left muscle masses.
NINETEEN
Pelvis and Upper Legs

T h e r e are several ways in w h i c h t h e shoulder tract e n d s o n t h e lateral protrusions o f t h e

a n d pelvis differ f r o m o n e a n o t h e r . Initially, tibia a n d fibula, b e l o w t h e knee. In n o r m a l
i n t h e first m o n t h o f e m b r y o n i c d e v e l o p m e n t , f u n c t i o n , t h e gluteus m a x i m u s acts between
b o t h a r m s a n d legs a r e e x t e n d e d d i r e c t l y o u t t h e b a c k p a r t o f t h e h i p a n d t h e l o w e r leg,
t o t h e sides. A u s e f u l i m a g e i s t h a t o f f a l l i n g bypassing t h e femur. Very often, however, as
spread-eagled backward i n t o water. T h e arms t h e gluteus m a x i m u s passes over t h e h i p , it
a r e o u t t o t h e sides w i t h p a l m s f o r w a r d . T h e sticks t o t h e g r e a t e r t r o c h a n t e r , c r e a t i n g a n
legs a r e s t r a i g h t o u t t o t h e sides w i t h t h e aberrant drag o n t h e femur.
inside arch of t h e foot facing forward. (This T h e small t e n s o r fascia lata attaches on
p o s i t i o n o f t h e legs i s n o t p o s s i b l e t o a n a d u l t t h e anterior superior iliac spine, w h i c h is t h e
structure.) By t h e t i m e a b a b y is born, t h e uppermost b o n y protrusion on the front of
a r m s a r e d o w n t o t h e sides, r e t a i n i n g a w i d e the pelvic curve. T h e muscle angles d o w n and
r a n g e o f m o t i o n . T h e legs h a v e c o m e d o w n s i d e w a y s , b l e n d i n g i n t o t h e fibers o f t h e i l i o -
b e n e a t h a n d in line with t h e trunk. T h e y are t i b i a l t r a c t . F r e q u e n t l y , t h e t e n s o r feels like
rotated so that the knee, w h i c h originally b o n e . This tiny muscle balances the backward
pointed headward, is n o w facing forward. pull of t h e massive gluteus m a x i m u s on the
T h i s m e a n s t h a t t h e m y o f a s c i a l w e b o f t h e leg ilio-tibial tract. By design, t h e a c t i o n of the
h a s r o t a t e d , c r e a t i n g s o f t t i s s u e spirals i n t h e m u s c l e i s all a l o n g t h e t r a c t , d o w n t o its
legs ( a n d t o a lesser d e g r e e i n t h e a r m s ) .
A functional difference between shoulder
a n d pelvic girdle is in t h e use of t h e l i m b s .
T h e m a j o r activity of t h e pelvis is weight-
bearing, while in the arms and shoulders it is
mobility. Pelvic m o b i l i t y has b e e n modified
because t h e n e e d for support has taken
precedence.
O n t h e outside o f t h e pelvis t h e r e are
three, possibly four muscles t h a t we classify
as superficial. T h e y attach to t h e outside of
t h e h i p a n d c o n t i n u e t o t h e l o w e r leg. T h e s e
are t h e gluteus m a x i m u s , t h e t e n s o r fascia
lata, a n d t h e sartorius. T h e rectus femoris is
t h e fourth candidate for this classification
(Fig. 19-1)
T h e gluteus m a x i m u s has a very wide
a t t a c h m e n t centrally, f r o m t h e posterior
margin of t h e ilium a n d from t h e sacroiliac
junction down to and including the tailbone.
T h e m u s c l e angles diagonally across t h e pelvis
d o w n t o w a r d t h e leg, e n d i n g i n t h e l o n g Figure 19-1
fibrous track called t h e ilio-tibial tract. This The suspension of the knee from the hip.

attachment below the knee. It is functionally
s h o r t e n e d w h e n its u n d e r s i d e i s s t u c k t o t h e
greater t r o c h a n t e r o f t h e f e m u r . W h e n t h i s
h a p p e n s , its e x t r e m e r i g i d i t y is a m e a s u r e of
t h e stress o n t h e m u s c l e .
T h e sartorius is a t t a c h e d on t h e tip of t h e
a n t e r i o r s u p e r i o r iliac s p i n e , i m m e d i a t e l y
a d j a c e n t t o t h e a t t a c h m e n t o f t h e t e n s o r fas-
cia l a t a . I t d i a g o n a l l y c r o s s e s t h e t h i g h i n a n
S shape, attaching to t h e tibia below t h e knee,
o n t h e i n s i d e o f t h e leg.
Just deep to t h e sartorius, t h e rectus
femoris attaches on t h e anterior inferior iliac
s p i n e . I t d e s c e n d s t h e f r o n t o f t h e leg i n a
straight line, b l e n d i n g i n t o t h e upper part of
the patellar t e n d o n above t h e k n e e . T h e t e n -
d o n c o n t i n u e s across t h e front of t h e k n e e to
the front of the tibia. T h e patella (kneecap)
sits w i t h i n t h e t e n d o n like a b o n y c u s h i o n
Figure 19-2
The psoas connects the lumbar spine (deep) with
the lesser trochanter of the femur (superficial).
PELVIS AND UPPER LEGS 99
o n t h e f r o n t o f t h e k n e e , like a p e b b l e i n a
s t r e a m . T h e patella itself is n o t a stationary,
w e i g h t - b e a r i n g b o n e . It is a m o d i f i c a t i o n of
t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e w i t h i n t h e p a t e l l a r liga-
ment (a sesamoid bone).
O n t h e i n s i d e o f t h e legs, t h e a d d u c t o r s a r e
the primary c o m p o n e n t of the V shape of the
i n n e r t h i g h . T h e gracilis i s t h e o n l y a d d u c t o r
t h a t crosses b o t h t h e k n e e j o i n t a n d t h e h i p
j o i n t . It is t h u s c l a s s i f i e d as a s u p e r f i c i a l leg
muscle. T h e other, deeper adductors cross
only the hip joint; they do not extend below
t h e k n e e . T h e gracilis is a b r o a d b a n d of m u s -
c l e t h a t , w i t h its f a s c i a , i s a t t a c h e d o n t h e
pubic ramus. It continues to the knee, coming
t o lie u n d e r n e a t h t h e s a r t o r i u s a n d a t t a c h i n g
to t h e medial projection of t h e tibia b e l o w
the knee joint.
O n t h e b a c k o f t h e leg are t h e h a m s t r i n g s .
T h r e e o f t h e s e m u s c l e s e x t e n d f r o m t h e sit-
ting b o n e (ischial tuberosity), w h i c h is a b o n y
projection of the hip b o n e in back and below.
Two hamstrings c o n t i n u e to the inside (me-
dial) side o f t h e k n e e ; t h e t h i r d a t t a c h e s l a t e r -
ally b e l o w t h e k n e e j o i n t .
T h e c o m b i n e d a c t i o n o f t h e l o n g super-
ficial m u s c l e s a f f e c t s b o t h t h e k n e e a n d t h e
h i p j o i n t s . Like t h e shoulder, t h e k n e e is a
s u s p e n d e d s t r u c t u r e . O n its l a t e r a l s i d e , p o s i -
t i o n a n d f u n c t i o n are d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e glu-
teus m a x i m u s , t h e t e n s o r fascia lata, a n d t h e
lateral h a m s t r i n g (biceps femoris). O n t h e
m e d i a l side of t h e k n e e , t h e r e is t h e interac-
t i o n o f t h e sartorius, gracilis, a n d t h e t w o
hamstrings (semitendinosus and
semimembranosus).
M e d i a l l y a n d l a t e r a l l y , t h i s s u p e r f i c i a l sus-
pension of the knee resembles two inverted
tripods. Medially, t h e s u s p e n s i o n s are f r o m
t h e a n t e r i o r superior iliac spine, p u b i c r a m u s ,
a n d ischial tuberosity. Laterally, t h e y are t h e
ischial tuberosity, t h e sacroiliac joint, a n d t h e
l a t e r a l side o f t h e a n t e r i o r s u p e r i o r i l i a c s p i n e .
It is our professional experience that knee
problems originate in the knee only w h e n
100 THE ENDLESS WEB

Lateral pelvic tilt there has b e e n direct trauma to t h e knee.

Figure 19-3
The tilt of the pelvis changes/is changed by the
t o n e of the psoas.
Figure 19-4
Psoas and iliacus fasciae c o m e t o g e t h e r at the
groin, forming the iliopsoas tendon. The iliacus
fascia is continuous with the deep pelvic fascia,
e.g. the obturator internus.
A knee that tracks straight forward implies
t h a t its a t t a c h e d m u s c l e s are i n e q u a l t e n s i o n .
U n e q u a l t e n s i o n i n t h e k n e e m u s c l e s origi-
nates in the hip, w h i c h t h e n modifies the
tracking of the knee. Over time, using a knee
in a d e v i a t e d p o s i t i o n will result in a " k n e e
i n j u r y " w h i c h has originated in t h e pelvis.
This analysis of knee injuries is borne out by
m a n y b o d y w o r k e r s , w h o r e p o r t b e s t results
ameliorating the knee problems of dancers
or runners when working with the hip.
A b i g surprise i n o u r c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f m u s -
cles as superficial or deep c o m e s w h e n we
c o n s i d e r t h e p s o a s (Fig. 19-2). T h i s w a s Ida
Rolf's f a v o r i t e m u s c l e ; o n e m i g h t t e r m i t t h e
Rolfer's m u s c l e . I t lies o n t h e i n s i d e o f t h e
b o d y and attaches inferiorly deep within the
leg. It is n e v e r t h e l e s s a m u s c l e t h a t crosses
m o r e t h a n two joints, and we therefore define
it as an extrinsic, superficial structure. On t h e
inside of t h e pelvic b o w l , t h e psoas is in fact
t h e m o s t superficial tissue. It crosses t h e
w h o l e o f t h e p e l v i s w i t h o u t a t t a c h i n g t o it.
T h e upper a t t a c h m e n t of t h e psoas is on
t h e lower thoracic and upper lumbar verte-
brae. It crosses t h e pelvic bowl at an angle,
f o r m i n g a l m o s t a n S s h a p e . I t flows d i a g o -
nally over t h e p u b i c b o n e just medial to t h e
a n t e r i o r s u p e r i o r i l i a c s p i n e . Its l o w e r a t t a c h -
m e n t is on the inside of the thigh, on an
i n n e r p r o j e c t i o n o f t h e f e m u r c a l l e d t h e lesser
trochanter. It can be palpated by placing your
f i n g e r o n t h e a n t e r i o r s u p e r i o r iliac s p i n e a n d
t h e n m o v i n g just medially. T h e a c t i o n o f t h e
p s o a s c a n b e p a l p a t e d i f y o u k i c k y o u r leg
while sitting. T h e psoas is a m a j o r factor in
t h e curve of t h e lower back (lumbar) region.
It t h e r e b y indirectly determines t h e vertical
tilt o f t h e p e l v i s . W h e n a p e l v i s i s t i l t e d side-
w a y s , t h e p s o a s will b e t i g h t e r o n o n e side
a n d m o r e f l a c c i d o n t h e o t h e r (Fig. 19-3).
T h e deeper layer of muscles in t h e h i p
affects only t h e hip joint. These muscles
b a l a n c e a n d s t a b i l i z e t h e leg a s o n e m o v e s

through t h e m sequentially in walking. In
a g e n e r a l way, t h e s e d e e p e r m u s c l e s f o r m
almost a circle of m u s c l e a n d fascia a r o u n d
the upper part of t h e femur. Their range of
m o v e m e n t is small b u t their s h o r t n e s s gives
t h e m a great m e c h a n i c a l a d v a n t a g e . T h e
extent of their effect is great because of their
fascial c o n n e c t i o n s u p i n t o t h e t r u n k a n d
d o w n i n t o t h e leg. T r o u b l e c o m e s w h e n t h e
superficial a n d d e e p m u s c l e l a y e r s are g l u e d
together.
T h e i l i a c u s m u s c l e lies d e e p t o t h e p s o a s
i n s i d e t h e p e l v i s (Fig. 19-4). It l i n e s t h e i n n e r
pelvic bowl. It attaches along t h e entire i n n e r
curve of t h e ilium, just b e l o w t h e crest. In
some people, the attachment extends medi-
ally t o t h e i n n e r side o f t h e s a c r u m a n d i s
thus o f t e n a factor w h e n t h e r e are sacroiliac
problems. T h e muscle c o n t i n u e s d o w n across
the pubic b o n e in a funnel shape, crossing
t h e hip b o n e n e x t t o t h e psoas. T h e iliacus
f o l l o w s t h e p a t h o f t h e p s o a s t o t h e lesser t r o -
chanter and often joins with it to form a c o m -
m o n t e n d o n . T h e iliacus lines t h e entire i n n e r
surface of t h e pelvic b o w l . A h a b i t u a l c o n t r a c -
tion in this muscle creates a feeling of spasm
on t h e inside of t h e pelvis. B o t h iliacus a n d
p s o a s are i n v o l v e d i n t h e p l a c e m e n t o f t h e
pelvis a n d l u m b a r s p i n e .
The term "lower back" includes the lumbar
s p i n e , t h e s a c r u m , a n d t h e t w o ilia. T h e ilia-
cus is a m a j o r i n n e r d e t e r m i n a n t of t h e place-
m e n t of the ilium; the psoas is a m a j o r inner
determinant of the placement of the lumbar
spine. W h e n t h e psoas is glued d o w n o n t o
t h e iliacus, i n d e p e n d e n t m o v e m e n t o f t h e s e
b o n e s , as well as of t h e m u s c l e s , is lost. T h e r e
i s n o t a free f l o w o f m o v e m e n t t h r o u g h t h e
lower back vertebrae, t h e pelvic bowl, or t h e
femur. T h e delicate rocking m o v e m e n t w i t h i n
t h e p e l v i s t h a t is e s s e n t i a l f o r a fluid s t r i d e is
lacking.
On the inside of the thigh, three adductor
muscles attach to the pubic ramus and the
f r o n t o f t h e p u b i c b o n e (Fig. 19-5). T h e y
PELVIS AND UPPER LEGS 101
Figure 19-5
The fascia of the adductor group (longus, gracilis,
magnus) is continuous up into the pelvic bowl and
influences the urogenital and pelvic diaphragms.
Tension is transmitted from inner thigh to pelvis
a n d / o r vice versa.
c o n t i n u e d o w n to t h e upper part of t h e inside
of the femur. Of these, the adductor longus is
m o s t c o m m o n l y o v e r u s e d . I t c a n b e felt a s a
h e a v y c o r d j u s t t o t h e s i d e o f t h e g e n i t a l s . Its
tightness is unrelenting; it almost never
relaxes.
T h e adductor longus attaches to the in-
side u p p e r t h i r d o f t h e f e m u r , j u s t b e l o w t h e
a t t a c h m e n t s o f t h e iliacus a n d t h e psoas. T h e
p e c t i n e u s , a n o t h e r a d d u c t o r , lies b e t w e e n t h e
a d d u c t o r l o n g u s a n d t h e psoas. I t c a n b e felt
on palpation of t h e groin region, in a depres-
sion b e t w e e n t h e t w o longer muscles. It is a
s h o r t , flat, o f t e n f a i r l y f l a c c i d m u s c l e d e s i g n e d
t o d r a w t h e leg m o r e t o w a r d t h e c e n t e r .
T h e largest of t h e adductors is t h e a d d u c -
t o r m a g n u s . I t arises a s a l a r g e m a s s f r o m t h e
w h o l e l e n g t h o f t h e p u b i c r a m u s . I t fills t h e
space d e e p t o t h e gracilis a n d e n d s b y wrap-
ping around the back of the femur, b e h i n d
a n d d e e p t o t h e h a m s t r i n g s (Fig. 19-6). T h e
adductor m a g n u s is t h e basis for t h e c h a r a c -
teristic shape t h a t is o f t e n seen on t h e i n n e r
102 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 19-6
A midthigh cross section illustrating the major
compartments: flexor, extensor (hamstrings),
adductor, and abductor (ilio-tibial tract). The rela-
tionships change higher and lower in the thigh.
Figure 19-7
The gluteus medius is influenced by the gluteus
maximus, which overlaps it. The fascia of the glu-
teus medius is continuous with that of the abdomi-
nal obliques at the iliac crest. This is the structural
basis for the more tenacious "love handles."
side o f t h e t h i g h . Like t h e p e c t i n e u s , i t i s u s u -
ally u n d e r d e v e l o p e d a n d underused. W h e n
t h e k n e e i s r o t a t e d o u t o f t r u e , t h e gracilis
takes over t h e f u n c t i o n of t h e adductor mag-
nus. T h e deeper muscle t h e n c a n n o t achieve
its t r u e t o n e a n d f u n c t i o n . I n a d d i t i o n , w h e n
t h e h a m s t r i n g s are s t u c k t o t h e a d d u c t o r m a g -
n u s , t h e u s u a l r e s u l t will b e s p a s m s o r c r a m p s
in t h e hamstrings that no a m o u n t of stretch-
ing c a n relieve.
At t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e l e v e l , t h e r e is a f a n -
shaped muscle called t h e gluteus medius on
t h e side of t h e p e l v i s (Fig. 19-7). Its u p p e r
a t t a c h m e n t is on t h e crest of t h e ilium. It
funnels downward and attaches on the top
of t h e greater t r o c h a n t e r of t h e femur. It is
partially covered by the upper margin of the
gluteus m a x i m u s . W h e n t h e upper border of
t h e gluteus m a x i m u s is stuck to t h e gluteus
medius, the head of the femur is pushed into
t h e h i p s o c k e t , i m p e d i n g t h e free s w i n g o f
t h e leg. A h a l l m a r k o f t h i s k i n d o f h o l d i n g o r
s h o r t e n i n g i s t h e t h i c k e n e d t i s s u e o n t h e side
o f t h e hips, o n t h e crest o f t h e ilium.
Underlying the gluteus m a x i m u s and
m e d i u s t h e r e i s a g r o u p o f s e v e n m u s c l e s , six
o f w h i c h a r e c l a s s i f i e d a s lateral r o t a t o r s o f t h e
l e g (Fig. 19-8). T h e t e r m " l a t e r a l r o t a t i o n " is
an anatomist's term, yet a m o v e of purely
lateral r o t a t i o n is a l m o s t never m a d e . T h e s e
m u s c l e s serve m o r e f u n c t i o n s t h a n purely
l a t e r a l r o t a t i o n o f t h e leg. All s e v e n m u s c l e s
a t t a c h like a f a n t o t h e b a c k p a r t o f t h e g r e a t e r
t r o c h a n t e r o f t h e f e m u r . W e will d i s c u s s o n l y
s o m e of t h e m in detail.
T h e lowest of t h e lateral rotators is t h e
quadratus femoris. It attaches on the lower
m a r g i n of t h e greater t r o c h a n t e r a n d contin-
ues to t h e pelvic ischial tuberosities. It forms
a part of t h e fold or crease of t h e buttocks,
underlying t h e posterior portion of the groin
b a n d . W h e n t h e q u a d r a t u s f e m o r i s a n d its
f a s c i a l c o v e r i n g a r e t i g h t , t h i s is v i s i b l e as a
m a r k e d d i m p l i n g b e l o w t h e pelvis, w h i c h
a c c o m p a n i e s a "flat ass."
 P E L V I S A N D U P P E R LEGS 103

A n o t h e r lateral rotator, t h e o b t u r a t o r inter-

n u s , lies h e a d w a r d o f t h e q u a d r a t u s f e m o r i s
(Fig. 19-9). Its e x t e r n a l p a r t is a t e n d o n t h a t
attaches on t h e greater t r o c h a n t e r a n d crosses
t h e b a c k part o f t h e pelvic b o n e , m i d w a y
b e t w e e n t h e ischial tuberosity a n d t h e tail-
b o n e . T h e m u s c l e i t s e l f fills t h e l o w e r i n s i d e
b o w l o f t h e p e l v i s , a t t a c h i n g a r o u n d t h e cir-
cular o p e n i n g called t h e obturator f o r a m e n .
The muscle body is on the inside of the
pelvis; its t e n d o n a t t a c h e s o n t h e o u t s i d e
o f t h e h i p . T h r o u g h its c o n n e c t i o n w i t h t h e
i n n e r tissue o f t h e p e l v i s , t h e o b t u r a t o r i n t e r -
n u s i s very likely t o b e c o n n e c t e d w i t h m e n -
strual o r p r e m e n s t r u a l t e n s i o n a n d c r a m p s
in w o m e n . A very tight obturator internus in
m e n tends to show as an extreme narrowness Figure 19-8
o f t h e pelvis a t t h e b o t t o m , w i t h a c o r r e s p o n - The rotators of the hip include the piriformis,
ding winging-out of the upper margin of the quadratus femoris, internal and external obtura-
tors, and the superior and inferior gemelli. For
pelvis.
clarity we have omitted the lines of force of the
T h e piriformis, also a lateral rotator, minute gemelli; the obturator externus is not visi-
attaches to t h e b a c k part of t h e greater ble from this angle. We are including the lines of
trochanter, slightly above t h e obturator in- force of the gluteus minimus to complete the pic-
ternus. It angles headward to attach to t h e ture of this fascial layer.

underside of the sacrum. T h e piriformis

crosses i n t o t h e p e l v i s t h r o u g h t h e g r e a t e r
sciatic f o r a m e n , a l o n g w i t h t h e large sciatic
nerve. W h e n this muscle is cramped or chron-
i c a l l y t e n s e d , i t f r e q u e n t l y g i v e s rise t o t h e
pain that is called sciatica.
T h e gluteus m i n i m u s is n o t included as a
lateral r o t a t o r i n c l a s s i c a l a n a t o m y . T o u s , t h i s
fan-shaped m u s c l e c o m p l e t e s t h e larger fan of
t h e l a t e r a l r o t a t o r g r o u p . I t lies d e e p t o t h e
gluteus medius a n d attaches o n t h e outside
of the ilium to t h e upper part of t h e greater
trochanter.
Tightness in t h e lateral rotators as a group
provides the dimple in the back of the but-
t o c k s t h a t l o o k s s o c u t e t o s o m e p e o p l e . Ac-
tually, b o d i e s w i t h t h a t d i m p l e t e n d t o w a l k
w i t h a w a d d l e , w i t h f e e t a n d legs s p l a y e d s i d e -
ways. An a t t e m p t to correct t h e situation by
Figure 19-9
f o r c i n g t h e feet t o p o i n t s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d i s Note the relation of the fascia of the obturator
n o t s u c c e s s f u l b e c a u s e t h e p r o b l e m arises i n internus to the deep pelvic fascia.
104 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 1 9 - 1 0
Fascial continuity: adductors -> obturator internus
-> iliacus -> internal abdominal obliques ->
diaphragm.
t h e tightness o f tissue i n t h e h i p . W h e n t h e
h i p is tightly b o u n d , forcing t h e feet to track
straight forward puts a t o r q u e i n t o t h e leg
that peaks at the knee.
In discussing m o v e m e n t of the arm at the
shoulder (Section 17), we described the nec-
essary s e q u e n c i n g of muscles as t h e a r m is
r a i s e d . All m u s c l e s s h o u l d n o t f u n c t i o n s i m u l -
taneously. Each must be called into action as
the arm reaches the angle where that muscle
( o r p a r t o f t h e m u s c l e ) h a s its e f f e c t . T h i s
allows for precise c o n t r o l c o m b i n e d w i t h
flexibility in t h e shoulder joint.
In t h e h i p , t h e usual c o n c e p t is t h a t t h e leg
m u s t b e tightly h e l d s o t h a t m o v e m e n t will
be stable. In actuality, sequencing of muscle
u s e i s n e c e s s a r y f o r s t a b i l i t y i n t h e leg a s w e l l
as the shoulder. As o n e muscle or group of
muscles is called into action to induce move-
m e n t o f t h e leg, t h e o p p o s i n g m u s c l e o r m u s -
cle group should relax a n d lengthen. Muscles
are h e l d in readiness (tonus) a n d c a n t h e n
contract or lengthen as needed.
I t i s d i f f i c u l t f o r m o s t o f u s t o a l l o w t h e leg
t o m o v e i n d e p e n d e n t l y i n its p e l v i c s o c k e t .
Ideally, w e s h o u l d b e a b l e t o s w i n g t h e leg i n
t h e h i p j o i n t w h i l e t h e p e l v i s r o c k s . You c a n
t e s t t h i s b y s t a n d i n g s i d e w a y s o n a stair w i t h
o n e leg a n d a l l o w i n g t h e o t h e r leg t o s w i n g
o v e r t h e l o w e r stair. U s u a l l y t h e l e g c a n m o v e
o n l y a s a u n i t w i t h t h e w h o l e side o f t h e h i p .
In walking, this fascial tightness in t h e h i p
results in a gait t h a t is initiated in t h e lower
b a c k , b y p a s s i n g t h e h i p j o i n t — a s t r u t t i n g gait.
T h e shape on t h e inside of t h e pelvic bowl
( p e l v i s a n d s a c r u m ) is like t w o b o w l s , a larger
bowl on t o p of a smaller o n e . T h e upper,
greater bowl, w h i c h is t h e i n n e r surface of
t h e ilium, is lined by t h e iliacus m u s c l e a n d
its f a s c i a . T h e l o w e r , s m a l l e r b o w l i s l i n e d o n
its sides b y t h e o b t u r a t o r i n t e r n u s a n d its fas-
c i a . S i n c e t h e t w o b o w l s are c o n t i n u o u s , i t
is easy to visualize t h e fascial c o n t i n u i t y
between the obturator internus and the
iliacus (Fig. 19-10).
About halfway d o w n t h e lower bowl, a
sling-like a r r a n g e m e n t of m u s c l e a n d fascia
divides it i n t o upper a n d lower parts. This
i s t h e p e l v i c floor, a l s o c a l l e d t h e p e l v i c dia-
p h r a g m . A b o v e t h i s d i a p h r a g m lies t h e b l a d -
der, r e c t u m , a n d i n w o m e n t h e u t e r u s a n d
 PELVIS AND UPPER LEGS 105

ovaries. T h e margins of t h e pelvic d i a p h r a g m

are c o n t i n u o u s w i t h t h e o b t u r a t o r i n t e r n u s
fascia. (Fig. 19-11).
T h e pelvic diaphragm is c o m p o s e d of four
muscles. T h e p u b o c o c c y g e u s is t h e largest of
these. It connects the back of the pubic b o n e ,
behind the pubic symphysis, to the inside of
the second or third segment of the coccyx.
F a n n i n g o u t f r o m this m u s c l e are t h e ilio-
coccygeus, the ischiococcygeus, and the coc-
cygeus. Collectively, these are o f t e n referred
to a n a t o m i c a l l y as t h e levator a n i . We refer
to t h e m in this text as the pelvic diaphragm.
Blended into the muscles of the pelvic
d i a p h r a g m are t h e s p h i n c t e r m u s c l e s o f t h e
anus, bladder, a n d i n w o m e n t h e vagina.
There is a m u t u a l b a l a n c e b e t w e e n these
sphincter muscles a n d t h e sling m u s c l e s of
t h e pelvic floor m e n t i o n e d above. T h e t o n e o f
Figure 19-11
one is reciprocally determined by the t o n e of The margins of the pelvic diaphragm are conti-
the other. W h e n the lumbar spine is angled nous with the obturator internus fascia.
t o o sharply forward or backward, t h e tilt of
t h e p e l v i s will f o l l o w suit. T h e s o f t t i s s u e o f females, the perineum is bisected by the
t h e p e l v i c d i a p h r a g m will s h o w t h e stress. o p e n i n g t o t h e v a g i n a . T h e labia m a j o r a are
T h e t o n e of this diaphragm is a m a j o r factor frequently almost glued to the b o n e s of the
in healthy reproductive and elimination rami. This means that the opening to the
systems. v a g i n a i s r e l a t i v e l y rigid a n d l a c k s t h e
Below t h e pelvic diaphragm, filling t h e resilience a n d flexibility that is i m p o r t a n t for
space horizontally b e t w e e n t h e V-shaped sex and childbirth.
bones of the pubic rami, is the urogenital T h e area b e t w e e n t h e ischial tuberosities
diaphragm, also k n o w n as t h e p e r i n e u m . a n d t h e tailbone is referred to as t h e ischio-
In males it contains the perineal muscles, rectal fossa. T h e urogenital d i a p h r a g m does
including the muscles at the base of the penis. n o t e x t e n d t h i s far b a c k . T h e o n l y m u s c l e
T h i s area i s o f t e n c o m p r e s s e d b y c l e n c h i n g c o n t a i n e d in this area is t h e e x t e r n a l s p h i n c -
the muscles of the buttocks, w h i c h has an ter of t h e anus. T h e r e m a i n d e r of t h e area is
effect on t h e f u n c t i o n of t h e penis. In filled w i t h a f a t p a d .
TWENTY
The System of Horizontal and Vertical Myofascial Structures

W h a t we h a v e tried to do in our considera-

tion of the muscles of the body is to show
h o w m u s c l e s a n d c o n n e c t i v e tissue interact,
focusing in t h e greatest detail on the trunk
a n d pelvis. We use m u s c l e a n a t o m y to orient
ourselves in t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue bed. T h e
c o n n e c t i v e tissue is responsible for t h e c o n t i -
nuity of m o v e m e n t through the body.
T h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue is responsible for
establishing t h e spaces of the b o d y by m e a n s
o f w h a t w e h a v e c a l l e d t h e d i a p h r a g m s (Fig.
20-1). T h e s e a r e h o r i z o n t a l m y o f a s c i a l s t r u c -
tures t h a t cross t h r o u g h t h e body. T h e lower-
m o s t t w o o f t h e s e d i a p h r a g m s are i n t h e
pelvis. T h e urogenital d i a p h r a g m is below,
w i t h t h e p e l v i c d i a p h r a g m s l i g h t l y a b o v e it.
There is t h e respiratory diaphragm in t h e
trunk separating the abdominal cavity from
t h e chest cavity. We h a v e also m e n t i o n e d
the scalene muscles at the base of the neck
a s a c t i n g like a d i a p h r a g m a f f e c t i n g t h e t o p
Figure 20-1
of the lungs.
The connective tissue establishes the spaces of the
In addition to this system of horizontal body.
myofascial structures, we have described a
vertical (core) system t h r o u g h t h e b o d y in
e a r l i e r s e c t i o n s (Fig. 20-2). T h i s v e r t i c a l c o n -
t i n u u m includes the interosseous m e m b r a n e
o f t h e legs, t h e d e e p f a s c i a o f t h e t h i g h , t h e
i n t e r n a l fascial l i n i n g o f t h e b o w l o f t h e
pelvis, a n d t h e m e d i a s t i n u m . It c o n t i n u e s by
w a y of t h e fascia a r o u n d t h e cervical viscera
(esophagus and trachea) to the back of the
m o u t h a n d p h a r y n x , a n d ends a s t h e fascial
s e p t u m t h a t lies b e t w e e n t h e t w o h a l v e s o f
the brain.
Acute t e n s i o n s are c o m m u n i c a t e d t h r o u g h
t h e b o d y b y way o f these horizontal a n d ver-
tical c o n n e c t i v e tissue p a t h w a y s . T h i s results
in a generalized tension through t h e inner Figure 2 0 - 2
aspect of the body that is characteristically The plumb line.
 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL MYOFASCIAL STRUCTURES 107

e x p r e s s e d as a k i n d of o v e r a l l i r r i t a b i l i t y . It is a
feeling of "don't t o u c h m e " or "I can't c o p e "
rather t h a n an acutely debilitating pain.
W h e n w e refer t o s p a c e s w i t h i n t h e b o d y ,
it s h o u l d be r e m e m b e r e d t h a t t h e s e spaces are
n o t e m p t y . T h e y are f i l l e d w i t h organs, c o n -
nective tissue, muscles, etc. T h e vertical a n d
horizontal myofascial pathways we have
described above exist as a n o r m a l part of
t h e structure of t h e body. W h e n this is out
of b a l a n c e , c o n n e c t i v e tissue filling t h e inter-
v e n i n g s p a c e s r e s p o n d s b y e s t a b l i s h i n g stress
lines. T h e s e are s e c o n d a r y f u n c t i o n a l struc-
tures. T h e y are established in r e s p o n s e to
need and m a y be resorbed as function is
modified.
For e x a m p l e , t h e r e are c o n n e c t i o n s f r o m
t h e respiratory diaphragm d o w n i n t o t h e
p e l v i s . W h e r e t h e a b d o m i n a l d i a p h r a g m lies
adjacent to the vertebral c o l u m n , it sends
Figure 20-3 e x t e n s i o n s ( c r u r a e ) d o w n a s far a s t h e u p p e r
It is obvious from this diagram that changes in any
p a r t o f t h e s a c r u m (Fig. 20-3). J u s t l a t e r a l t o
part of the abdomen and pelvis will affect all of
e a c h side o f t h e v e r t e b r a l c o l u m n , t h e p s o a s
the abdomen and pelvis.
penetrates these crurae and extends up to
attach to the lower vertebrae in the chest
c a v i t y . I n t h i s way, t h e f a s c i a o f t h e p s o a s i s
c o n t i n u o u s with t h e fascia of t h e lower bor-
der of t h e d i a p h r a g m . T h e fascia of t h e psoas
via t h e iliacus is also c o n t i n u o u s w i t h t h a t of
the obturator internus, which then blends
i n t o the diaphragms in the pelvis. In t h e
back, t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue of t h e psoas
is continuous with that of the quadratus
l u m b o r u m and the erector spinae.
O n t h e sides, t h e r e s p i r a t o r y d i a p h r a g m
blends into the transverse and oblique
abdominal muscles. In the front, the
d i a p h r a g m is c o n t i n u o u s with t h e fascia
on t h e underside of t h e rectus a b d o m i n i s .
T h e rectus a b d o m i n i s provides a c o n n e c t i o n
b e t w e e n t h e f r o n t o f t h e respiratory dia-
phragm and the pubic bone. The abdominal
o b l i q u e s are a c o n t i n u a t i o n of t h e respiratory
Figure 2 0 - 4
Fascial connection between pubic bone and diaphragm d o w n to t h e crest of t h e ilium,
humerus. continuing into the pelvic diaphragms by
108 T H E E N D L E S S W E B

way of t h e fascia of t h e iliacus a n d obturator

internus.
Fascial p a t h w a y s o n t h e b o d y surface
also c o n t r i b u t e t o t h e b a l a n c e a m o n g t h e
diaphragms. These connections tend to be
in broader and longer sheets, covering more
o f t h e body. O n e c o n n e c t i o n u p across t h e
a b d o m e n i s b y w a y o f t h e superficial a b d o m -
inals, e x t e n d i n g across t h e pectoralis m a j o r to
t h e a r m (Fig. 20-4). F a s c i a l s h e e t s o n t h e sur-
face o f t h e obliques tie upward i n t o t h o s e o n
t h e s e r r a t u s a n t e r i o r u n d e r t h e s c a p u l a (Fig.
20-5). I n t h e b a c k , t h e f a s c i a o v e r t h e g l u t e u s
m a x i m u s flows upward obliquely i n t o t h a t of
t h e latissimus dorsi c o n n e c t i n g o n u p i n t o t h e
a r m . T h e o f t e n leathery covering of t h e erec-
Figure 2 0 - 5
Fascial connection from front of abdomen tor spinae c a n immobilize the vertical play of
to upper back. a n y o r all o f t h e d i a p h r a g m s .
TWENTY-ONE
Reciprocity of Movement
S p i n a l c u r v e s are r e c i p r o c a l . T h e c u r v e o f t h e
lumbar spine is reflected in t h e curve of t h e
cervical spine. If t h e lumbar spine is curved
t o o far f o r w a r d , t h e c e r v i c a l s p i n e will a l s o b e
c u r v e d t o o far f o r w a r d . I f t h e l u m b a r s p i n e i s
t o o flat o r s t r a i g h t , t h e c e r v i c a l s p i n e will b e
t o o flat o r s t r a i g h t .
It is t e m p t i n g to classify t h e b a l a n c e of t h e
spine by the way a person holds himself w h e n
h e i s s t a n d i n g still. I n a c t u a l i t y , t h e s p i n e i s
like a s p r i n g , e x p a n d i n g a n d c o n t r a c t i n g a s
t h e person m o v e s a n d b r e a t h e s . T h e true diag-
n o s i s o f t h e s p i n e i s n o t i n its c u r v a t u r e b u t i n
its q u a l i t y o f m o v e m e n t . N o p a r t o f a m o v i n g
s p i n e s h o u l d b e q u i e t o r still. I f o n e s e g m e n t
o f t h e v e r t e b r a l c o l u m n i s b e i n g h e l d still,
freedom of m o v e m e n t throughout the spine
will b e i n h i b i t e d .
W h e n w e talk a b o u t m o v e m e n t , w e usually
t h i n k o f large g e s t u r e s like w a l k i n g , d o i n g
work, picking up t h e baby, w a s h i n g t h e
d i s h e s , d r i v i n g t h e car. Yet m o v e m e n t c a n
be as subtle as slow breathing during sleep.
A b o d y never stops m o v i n g . Even t h e smallest
m o v e m e n t creates a ripple t h r o u g h o u t t h e
entire o r g a n i s m . T h e tissue t h r o u g h w h i c h
this ripple is t r a n s m i t t e d is t h e c o n n e c t i v e
tissue. W h e n c o n n e c t i v e tissue is in t o n e , it
i s m u c h like t h e c a t g u t o n a p r o p e r l y s t r u n g
cello. It transmits vibrations; it transmits
m o v e m e n t . S o m a y b e w e s h o u l d say t h a t
w h e n w e are p r o p e r l y i n t o n e , w e h u m — t o
each person his or her characteristic t o n e .
W e c a n d e m o n s t r a t e this for ourselves b y
t w o a w a r e n e s s e x e r c i s e s . Sit o r s t a n d , l e t t i n g
your head and arms be very loose, and sense
your breathing. Be aware of your breathing
with your b o d y relaxed as m u c h as possible.
I f y o u t h e n h o l d y o u r h e a d still (like s t a r t i n g
t o t h i n k a b o u t s o m e t h i n g ) , y o u will s e n s e a
restriction in your breathing. Notice that
w h e n t h e h e a d i s h e l d v e r y still, t h e b r e a t h i s
b o t h shallower and more labored. If y o u o n c e
a g a i n let y o u r h e a d b e v e r y easy, a l o n g w i t h
t h e rest o f y o u r b o d y , y o u c a n f e e l a g r e a t e r
ease in b r e a t h i n g . T h e r e is m o r e fullness of
b r e a t h w i t h less e f f o r t .
Another example of this can be seen in
walking. Allow your head and shoulders to
be as limber and loose as possible. If you can
e v e n let t h e m flop a bit, this will give y o u an
e x a g g e r a t i o n . T h e n , w h i l e still w a l k i n g , h o l d
y o u r h e a d still. C o n c e n t r a t e o n a t h o u g h t ,
a n d r e g i s t e r h o w t h i s h o l d i n g r e s u l t s i n rigid-
ity in t h e w h o l e b a c k . You will n o t i c e an
increased heaviness on your heels as you
w a l k . A f t e r w a l k i n g i n t h i s m o r e stressful
p o s i t i o n , a g a i n let y o u r h e a d g o easy, n o d -
d i n g g e n t l y y e s (or n o , i f t h a t ' s y o u r a t t i t u d e ) .
Feel h o w y o u r b a c k l e n g t h e n s a n d m o v e s
w i t h greater ease. Your step will b e c o m e
m u c h softer.
T h e s e are t w o e x a m p l e s o f h o w h o l d i n g
o n e p a r t o f t h e b o d y a f f e c t s t h e rest o f t h e
b o d y . T h e y a r e d e l i b e r a t e g e s t u r e s . W e all
have holding patterns in our bodies that
are i n v o l u n t a r y . W h e t h e r t h e h o l d i n g i s o f
a single m u s c l e or of a larger part, t h e w h o l e
b o d y will b e affected. W h e n y o u h i t t h e side
of a table, t h e resonance of t h e blow vibrates
t h r o u g h t h e entire table. Similarly, a n y ges-
ture vibrates t h r o u g h o u t a living body. We
t e n d to forget t h a t we are a single v i b r a t i o n a l
u n i t . H o l d i n g o n e p a r t still c o n s t i t u t e s a n
interference with our resonance.
T h e r e is a t o y c a l l e d a S l i n k y r M
, a highly
tempered, very l o n g spring coil of steel. O n e
of t h e t h i n g s t h a t a Slinky will do is pull itself
d o w n s t a i r s . I f y o u start b y p u l l i n g o n e e n d o f
t h e coil d o w n o n e step, e a c h circle in t h e coil
110 T H E E N D L E S S W E B

w i l l p u l l t h e n e x t o n e a f t e r it. T h i s i s a n e x -
ample of m o v e m e n t reverberating through a
structure. A l t h o u g h it is n o t m a d e of steel, t h e
elasticity a n d organization of t h e c o n n e c t i v e
tissue reverberates like a Slinky in t h e body.
This kind of reciprocity of m o v e m e n t is
especially apparent in the spine. Because the
superficial m u s c l e s are t h e longest, h o l d i n g
p a t t e r n s at a s u p e r f i c i a l l e v e l a f f e c t a b r o a d
e x p a n s e of t h e b a c k . H o l d i n g at deeper levels
affects smaller s e g m e n t s . Usually, h o l d i n g in
an area occurs at m o r e t h a n o n e level, a n d to
a different degree at e a c h level. Sideways cur-
vatures of t h e b a c k , as in scoliosis, are a c c o m -
p a n i e d by stepwise c o m p r e s s i o n of t h e soft
t i s s u e o f t h e b a c k , a l t e r n a t i n g f r o m o n e side
to t h e other of the vertebral c o l u m n .
T h e e r e c t o r s p i n a e are c o v e r e d b y a h e a v y
f a s c i a l s h e e t , t h e l u m b o - d o r s a l fascia, w h i c h
b l e n d s i n t o t h e h e a v y c o n n e c t i v e tissue p a d
on the sacrum and coccyx. From the sacrum,
t h e fascia c o n t i n u e s diagonally across t h e
b u t t o c k s a n d o n i n t o t h e i l i o - t i b i a l b a n d (Fig.
21-1) T h u s , b o t h c l e n c h i n g t h e b u t t o c k s o r
h o l d i n g t h e legs h a v e a c l e a r e f f e c t o n t h e
b a c k all t h e w a y u p t o t h e h e a d . C o n v e r s e l y ,
p r o b l e m s i n t h e b a c k are g e n e r a l i z e d t o t h e
b u t t o c k s a n d legs a s w e l l a s t o t h e h e a d .
T h r o u g h its c o n n e c t i o n w i t h t h e f a s c i a o f
t h e l a t i s s i m u s d o r s i , t h e l u m b o - d o r s a l fascia

Figure 21-1 Figure 2 1 - 2 Figure 21-3

The superficial fascia of the As we include the fascia of Still at a superficial level,
back is layered. It starts the latissimus dorsi, the the fascia of the trapezius
with the continuity of the change in directional pull adds yet another dimen-
whole back with the leg. converges over a wider sion.
The change in direction area.
converges on the sacrum.
 RECIPROCITY OF MOVEMENT 111

mediates a reciprocal effect on t h e freedom of

t h e s h o u l d e r a n d a r m (Fig. 21-2). T h e f a s c i a l
crossover point between t h e trapezius a n d t h e
latissimus dorsi (the dorsal h i n g e ) is at a b o u t
t h e s i x t h a n d e i g h t h t h o r a c i c v e r t e b r a e (Fig.
21-3). H o l d i n g p a t t e r n s o r p a i n i n t h e a r m s Fascia of
( s u c h as f r o m a t e n n i s e l b o w ) a r e felt as a i erector
spinae m.
spinal restriction in this area. In short, t h e
fascial c o v e r i n g o f t h e b a c k i s c o n t i n u o u s
w i t h all o t h e r p a r t s o f t h e b o d y . T h e b r o a d
fascial c o n n e c t i o n s o n t h e s u r f a c e o f t h e b o d y Fascia of
Fascia of H quadratus
allow restrictions to be generalized over t h e psoas m. lumborum m.
w h o l e structure. T h i s c a n give s h o r t - t e r m
relief i n a c u t e t r a u m a , b u t u l t i m a t e l y s u c h
restriction b e c o m e s c h r o n i c a n d difficult to
track d o w n a n d release.
O n t h e inside o f t h e spine are t h e d e e p
flexors of t h e trunk. In t h e l u m b a r region,
there is the psoas, w h i c h attaches to m o s t of
the lumbar vertebrae. T h e quadratus l u m b o -
r u m i s a s h o r t m u s c l e t h a t lies b e t w e e n t h e
p s o a s a n d t h e e r e c t o r s p i n a e (Fig. 21-4). T h i s
muscle is defined as c o n n e c t i n g the twelfth
rib ( t h e l o w e s t , s h o r t e s t free rib) t o t h e u p p e r
m a r g i n (crest) o f t h e i l i u m . T h e q u a d r a t u s
lumborum is the connection between the Figure 2 1 - 4
inside a n d outside of t h e b o d y at t h e waist. The deep muscles of the lumbar region.
T h e fascial s h e e t s o f t h e e r e c t o r s p i n a e , q u a d -
ratus l u m b o r u m , a n d p s o a s a r e c o n t i n u o u s
(Fig. 21-5). T h i s f a s c i a l b l e n d i n g t r a v e l s l a t e r -
ally t o f o r m t h e c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e c o v e r i n g o f
the a b d o m i n a l oblique muscles a n d t h e rectus
a b d o m i n i s . D i s t o r t i o n i n a n y o n e will distort
all t o s o m e d e g r e e .
I n t h e l u m b a r r e g i o n , m o v e m e n t s are o b -
viously n o t straight forward or straight back-
ward. T h e m o s t frequent m o v e m e n t s o f t h e
lower b a c k — w a l k i n g , l e a n i n g over, r e a c h i n g —
all i n c l u d e t w i s t i n g o r s p i r a l i n g . W h a t i s desir-
able is a balance of the twisting on t h e t w o
sides. M o s t o f u s h a v e a s l i g h t r o t a t i o n t o o n e
Figure 2 1 - 5
side s o m e w h e r e i n t h e m i d - t r u n k . S t a n d i n g
This diagrammatic cross section of the abdomen
r e l a t i v e l y still, o n e h i p a n d leg h a b i t u a l l y is in the region of the lumbar spine. The continuity
stand slightly forward of t h e other, while t h e of the fascia as it ensheathes the muscles and the
s h o u l d e r s a n d a r m s are r e v e r s e d i n r o t a t i o n vertebra is emphasized.
112 THE ENDLESS WEB

Figure 2 1 - 6
Habitual rotation of the body.
Figure 2 1 - 7
For clarity, we have depicted the deep muscles of
the neck separated on the two sides. The compos-
ite of the two sides make up the total myofascial
complement.
(Fig. 21-6). T h e b o t t o m h a l f o f t h e b o d y g o e s
in o n e direction, w h i l e t h e t o p half goes in
t h e o t h e r . I n w a l k i n g , t h e l e g a n d h i p t h a t are
s l i g h t l y f o r w a r d h a v e less d i s t a n c e t o t r a v e l
a n d therefore t e n d t o m o v e m o r e straight
f o r w a r d . T h e o p p o s i n g l e g a n d h i p , w h i c h are
s l i g h t l y b e h i n d , h a v e t o w o r k h a r d e r a n d tra-
v e r s e a g r e a t e r d i s t a n c e . U s u a l l y t h i s side
m o v e s d i a g o n a l l y a n d w i t h a s w i n g . T h e dif-
f e r e n c e i s p e r h a p s a h a l f a n i n c h o r less. O v e r
y e a r s o f c o n s t a n t u s e , t h e side t h a t w o r k s
harder will s h o w t h e strain in t h e back. O n e
side w i l l s h o r t e n , g i v i n g t h e i m p r e s s i o n o f a
s h o r t e r l e g a n d a s l i g h t l i m p . V e r y s l i g h t dif-
f e r e n c e s i n d i s t a n c e i n t h e b o d y c r e a t e large
effects.
T h e p e a k o f t o r s i o n i n o v e r a l l b o d y spirals
will be m o s t a p p a r e n t at t h e waist, w h i c h
thickens and shortens. Most people have no
f u n c t i o n a l waistline a n d therefore few people
h a v e a c o n c e p t o f it. T h e w a i s t l i n e b e c o m e s
apparent w h e n the body unrotates and the
l o w e r f r e e ribs l i t e r a l l y lift o f f t h e p e l v i s . M u s -
cles a n d fascia on t h e inside a n d outside of
t h e v e r t e b r a l c o l u m n h o l d t h e l o w e r ribs
d o w n i n t o t h e tissue a c c u m u l a t i o n o n t h e
b r i m of t h e pelvis. As t h e lower back unro-
tates a n d lengthens, a waistline m a y miracu-
lously appear. This c a n result in ecstasy a n d
a n e w wardrobe for w o m e n . M e n m a y experi-
e n c e c o n s t e r n a t i o n i f t h e y b e l i e v e t h e pelvis i s
n o t supposed to exist except as a small path-
w a y b e t w e e n t h e l a r g e c h e s t a n d large t h i g h s .
Nevertheless, t h e y t o o will h a v e a m o r e ami-
a b l e r e l a t i o n s h i p w i t h t h e i r tailor.
T h e upward continuation of the erector
spinae into t h e neck blends with the pad at
t h e b a c k o f t h e h e a d . T h e largely vertical
a c t i o n o f t h e s e m u s c l e s i s m o d i f i e d b y a lat-
eral p u l l f r o m t h e m o r e s u p e r f i c i a l t r a p e z i u s .
T h e flexors on t h e front of t h e neck balance
t h e e r e c t o r s p i n a e i n b a c k , w h i c h are e x t e n -
sors o f t h e n e c k . A t t h e d e e p e s t l e v e l are t w o
p a i r s o f m u s c l e s t h a t lie d i r e c t l y i n f r o n t o f
 RECIPROCITY OF MOVEMENT 113

t h e transverse processes of t h e cervical verte-

brae. T h e upper pair (longus capitis) c o n n e c t
t h e c e r v i c a l v e r t e b r a e t o t h e b a s e o f t h e skull
in front of t h e spinal c o l u m n . These flex t h e
h e a d o n t h e t o p cervical vertebrae. T h e sec-
o n d set ( l o n g u s c o l l i ) e x t e n d s d o w n f r o m t h e
transverse processes of t h e cervical vertebrae
to the transverse processes of t h e upper chest
(thoracic) vertebrae. These muscles flex t h e
n e c k o n t h e t r u n k (Fig. 21-7).
At a slightly m o r e superficial level, f a n n i n g
o u t t o t h e side, t h e r e a r e t h e s c a l e n e m u s c l e s .
These attach to the transverse processes of
t h e cervical vertebrae a n d c o n t i n u e on to t h e
s u r f a c e o f t h e first a n d s e c o n d r i b s . T h e s e are
active in b o t h flexing t h e n e c k a n d t u r n i n g
t h e n e c k f r o m side t o s i d e . A t t h e m o s t s u p e r -
ficial l e v e l , o n t h e f r o n t o f t h e n e c k , are t h e
sternocleidomastoid muscles (Fig. 21-8).
T h e s e large m u s c l e s m o v e t h e h e a d w i t h r e -
spect to t h e n e c k as well as m o v i n g t h e n e c k Figure 2 1 - 8
Superficial fascia of the neck.
vertebrae o n t h e trunk. T h e fascial w r a p p i n g
o f all t h e s e m u s c l e s i s c o n t i n u o u s . I n t h e
n e c k , fascial g l u i n g c a n o c c u r b e t w e e n f l e x o r s a r e n o t v e r y a p p a r e n t . I t w a s I d a Rolf's c o n v i c -
a n d extensors as well as b e t w e e n layers, creat- t i o n t h a t s p i n a l b a l a n c e relies c h i e f l y o n s t a b i -
ing problems in t h e freedom of m o v e m e n t of lizing t h e c o n c a v e curves of t h e spine. T h e
the neck and head. psoas stabilizes t h e c o n c a v e i n n e r surface of
T h e ideal m y o f a s c i a l b l u e p r i n t i s t h r o w n the lumbar spine; the longus colli a n d longus
o u t o f kilter w h e n t h e h e a d i s t h r u s t t o o far capitis t o g e t h e r stabilize t h e c o n c a v e i n n e r
forward. W h e n this is t h e case, m o s t h e a d surface of t h e n e c k p o r t i o n of t h e spine. In
movements must be controlled by the sterno- Dr. Rolf's v i e w , t h e d o r s a l c u r v e o f t h e s p i n e
cleidomastoid. T h e erector spinae and the i s s u p p o r t e d a l o n g its o u t s i d e s u r f a c e b y t h e
trapezius are t h e n used a l m o s t exclusively to rhomboids. This is an unusual view of body
hold the head on. Their function as extensors m e c h a n i c s , a n d o n e t h a t d e p e n d s f o r its l o g i c
in b a l a n c e with t h e flexors on t h e front of on questions of balance, movement, and
t h e n e c k i s r e d u c e d . W h e n t h e h e a d i s t o o far transmission of weight.
forward, these f l e x o r s o n t h e front o f t h e n e c k Spinal curves are always c h a n g i n g . W i t h
(longus colli a n d longus capitis) lack t h e span every m o v e , including breathing, these
to f u n c t i o n properly. T h e sternocleidomastoid curves undulate, going f r o m m o r e curved
then becomes both the chief flexor and exten- to straighter a n d back. If there is fluidity of
sor o f t h e n e c k . T h i s i s a n a w k w a r d s i t u a t i o n m o v e m e n t t h r o u g h all p a r t s o f t h e v e r t e b r a l
a n d o n e t h a t leads t o very restricted m o v e - c o l u m n , t h e rest o f t h e b o d y w i l l r e a d i l y
ment of the head. arrange itself i n t o appropriate b a l a n c e for
In the chest region, prevertebral muscles t h e person, time, a n d gesture.
TWENTY-TWO
Joints

J o i n t s are t h e m o s t c o m p l e x a n d also t h e w h e n a joint is distended with too m u c h

m o s t interesting focus for t h e w a y different
densities in c o n n e c t i v e tissue affect a n d deter-
m i n e m o v e m e n t . T h e differences a m o n g
j o i n t s is t h o r o u g h l y described a n d classified
in anatomical texts. Our interest is in discov-
ering t h e ways j o i n t s are similar t o e a c h o t h e r
a n d in analyzing t h e overall f u n c t i o n of joints
w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d . In t h e tradi-
tional classification of joints, there is the
i m p l i c a t i o n that e a c h joint f u n c t i o n s in isola-
tion. Our attitude throughout this b o o k has
b e e n t h a t n o o n e part o f t h e b o d y m o v e s
w i t h o u t i n t e r a c t i o n w i t h all o t h e r b o d y p a r t s .
T h e elements of a joint are:
• Two or m o r e b o n e s ;
• T h e relatively nonresilient t e n d o n s
and ligaments;
• T h e fluid-filled j o i n t capsule;
• T h e m o r e resilient muscular a n d c o n -
nective tissue c o m b i n a t i o n k n o w n as
myofascia.
f l u i d (fluid o n t h e j o i n t ) , l o o s e n i n g t h e c o n -
n e c t i v e tissue a b o v e a n d b e l o w t h e j o i n t
r e s u l t s i n a r e t u r n t o n o r m a l size. T h i s c a n
be accomplished without the need to touch
t h e actual distended area.
T h e joint capsule is m a d e up of fibers that
have formed in the e m b r y o in response to
directional tension lines between bones. A
m a t u r e j o i n t c a p s u l e a l s o lays stress l i n e s t o
a c c o m m o d a t e the different rotations of m o v e
m e n t . T h e result is an interweaving of fibers
around the end of the bones. This encloses
t h e fluid-filled s p a c e b e t w e e n t h e b o n e s , a n d
is c o n t i n u o u s w i t h t h e p e r i o s t e u m (Fig. 22-1)
T h e r e i s a t e n d e n c y f o r c o n n e c t i v e tissue
t o w r a p a j o i n t a s stress w i t h i n t h e j o i n t
increasingly calls for m o r e stability. W h e n
t h e j o i n t i s w e l l - b a l a n c e d a n d h a s full r a n g e

At t h e deepest level, by m e a n s of t h e
fibrous joint capsule, the periosteum of o n e
b o n e is continuous with the periosteum of
the next b o n e . W i t h i n the joint capsule,
b a t h i n g t h e e n d s of t h e b o n e s , is j o i n t fluid.
It is very similar in c o m p o s i t i o n to the inter-
c e l l u l a r m a t r i x o f all c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e . T h i s
d e s c r i p t i o n a p p l i e s t o all j o i n t s t h a t a r e tra-
ditionally classified as freely m o v a b l e . O u r
feeling is t h a t it also applies to those joints
classified as slightly m o v a b l e or i m m o v a b l e .
T h e y differ o n l y i n t h e p r o p o r t i o n o f fluid
within the joint capsule. A n o r m a l joint c o m -
prises a d j a c e n t b o n e s , w h i c h l i t e r a l l y f l o a t
with respect to o n e another. If t h e ends of t h e
b o n e s a r e d r a w n t o o c l o s e t o e a c h o t h e r , irri- Figure 22-1
t a t i o n of s o m e k i n d will result. Conversely, The joint capsule matures.

of m o v e m e n t , this wrapping will be sufficient
t o stabilize t h e j o i n t a n d y e t f l e x i b l e e n o u g h
t o ease o f f w h e n t h e j o i n t i s n o l o n g e r i n
active use. W h e n a j o i n t is u n b a l a n c e d or
s h o r t e n e d , w e see a n a c c u m u l a t i o n o f e x c e s s
tissue, w h a t w e w o u l d c a l l " b a n d a g i n g . " T h i s
bandaging c a n n o t be released until we c a n
learn to trust t h e stability of t h e j o i n t .
A n e x a m p l e o f w h a t w e are t a l k i n g a b o u t
i s t h e t h i c k e n i n g a n d s h o r t e n i n g t h a t s o fre-
q u e n t l y occurs i n knees. M a n y knees are
w r a p p e d i n s u c h a w a y t h a t t h e y are h e l d
in a permanently bent position, unable to
lengthen out. Or the knee m a y be held in a
locked-back position. In either case, t h e knee
is tightly b o u n d . A well-balanced k n e e is o n e
i n w h i c h t h e j o i n t feels v e r y s l i g h t l y b e n t ;
there is fluidity in t h e structure so t h a t t h e
knee is on "go."
Wrapping or thickening is o n e hallmark of
w h a t we call i m m a t u r i t y in a j o i n t . T h e cause
could be injury or lack of d e v e l o p m e n t or
regression out of negative e m o t i o n . T h e phys-
ical e f f e c t i n t h e b o d y , i n t h e j o i n t , i s a l w a y s
c o n t r a c t i o n in t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue structure.
M o v i n g a j o i n t t h a t is tightly b o u n d will
eventually create tissue irritation. T h i s is felt
as chronic joint pain.
I m m a t u r i t y in a j o i n t is t h e a b s e n c e of ease
a n d full r a n g e o f m o v e m e n t . T h i s p h y s i c a l
immaturity is n o t usually a w h o l e - b o d y c o n -
dition. We c an have a well-formed a n d fully
f u n c t i o n i n g rib c a g e a n d s a d l y l a c k i n g h i p s
a n d legs. T h i s i s a t y p e t h a t i s o f t e n s e e n i n
m e n . T h e reverse i s o f t e n seen i n w o m e n —
fully formed, v o l u p t u o u s hips a n d a child-like
top.
These have b e c o m e stereotypes, symbols of
w h a t is desirable in a w o m a n or m a n . A m a n
m a y h a v e a s m a l l rib c a g e a n d t h r o u g h t h e
wonders of muscle-building create massive
bulk on top. He can m o c k up the look of male
m a t u r i t y t h a t i s c u r r e n t l y f a v o r e d . Yet h i s i s
n o t a truly mature structure; he c a n n o t fully
e x p a n d h i s rib c a g e a n d s h o u l d e r s . W h a t h e
J O I N T S 115
has created is simply h e a v y tissue p a d d i n g
over a contracted a n d narrowed structure.
T h e padding can b e c o m e very tough, even
like b o n e . It is n o t possible for this to h a v e
t h e resilience a n d potential of a truly flexible
structure.
Dr. R o l f r e a l i z e d t h a t t h e b o n e s o f t h e
b o d y act as spacers w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t i v e
t i s s u e b e d . B o n e s are h a r d c o n n e c t i v e t i s s u e
e l e m e n t s w i t h i n t h e softer c o n n e c t i v e tissue
e l e m e n t s o f t h e body. Each b o n e floats w i t h
respect to t h e other. T h e skeleton as a w h o l e
floats w i t h i n t h e fluid c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d .
A j o i n t is a m o r e o r g a n i z e d a r e a of t h i s s t r u c -
ture, o n e w h e r e m o v e m e n t is expressed.
An a n a l o g y is t h e b a t t e n or strut in an
upholstered piece of furniture. T h e m a i n
s u p p o r t f o r t h e u p h o l s t e r e d p i e c e i s f r o m its
stuffing; t h e w o o d adds stability. T h e strut or
b a t t e n is w h a t keeps t h e c o u c h f r o m sagging
w i t h age. Likewise, we c a n consider b o n e s as
being present to prevent us from collapsing
w i t h years of use a n d disuse.
Underdeveloped structure is c o m m o n in
the foot a n d ankle. A baby's foot at birth is
n o t y e t f u n c t i o n a l f o r w a l k i n g . T h e h e e l (cal-
caneus) is drawn up into the ankle joint. The
f o o t p r o j e c t s m o r e o r less a s a s t r a i g h t e x t e n -
s i o n o f t h e l o w e r leg. T h i s i s a b a l l e t d a n c e r ' s
d r e a m b u t m a k e s f o r s t i l t e d w a l k i n g . Part o f
the structural m a t u r a t i o n that c o m e s with t h e
transition from baby to child occurs in the
foot. For stable walking, t h e h e e l m u s t drop
d o w n a n d back. This also establishes t h e
necessary arches of the foot.
M o v e m e n t of the ankle includes both
flexion a n d sliding. I n m a n y people, t h e heel
remains wedged forward into the ankle joint,
a n d sliding m o t i o n is lost. Ankle m o v e m e n t is
then limited to flexion—the front of the foot
c o m i n g up and down. This places excessive
strain o n t h e m u s c l e s o f t h e s h i n . Ideally,
flexion in the front of the foot is counterbal-
a n c e d by a sliding m o t i o n e x t e n d i n g t h e heel
down. In addition, in stepping down, the
116 THE ENDLESS WEB
joints of t h e foot flatten a n d t h e n spring back
into t h e arch as weight is transferred. This,
t o o , is lost w h e n t h e ankle is i m m a t u r e .
Immaturity of the ankles does n o t neces-
sarily i m p l y a n i m m a t u r e i n d i v i d u a l . A n d y e t
t h e r e will be a c o n s t a n t awareness of lack of
support. T h e consciousness m a y simply be
t h a t my feet hurt. It d o e s n ' t m e a n t h a t I never
feel g o o d a b o u t a n y t h i n g . I t does m e a n t h a t
e v e n w h e n I feel w o n d e r f u l , I am also aware
t h a t m y feet are b o t h e r i n g m e .
Body types s h o w different ways of using
t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue as a w h o l e . Our favorite
imaginative illustration of this is to be found
in The Wizard ofOz. T h e T i n W o o d s m a n is
o n e c o m m o n type. T h e outside of the b o d y
h a s b e e n s o t o u g h e n e d t h a t t h e j o i n t s feel
rusted. W e a l m o s t m u s t add oil t o get t h e m t o
w o r k . It's a s t h o u g h t h i s p e r s o n h a s n o c o n f i -
dence in t h e deeper structure; m o s t of t h e
support is on t h e surface.
At the other extreme is the example of
t h e Scarecrow. He is soft a n d structureless
a n d pliable on t h e surface. T h i s is w h a t Ida
Rolf termed a "soft body." An extreme e x a m -
ple w o u l d be a person w h o is double-jointed.
Yet w i t h i n t h i s s t r u c t u r e , a t t h e d e e p e s t l e v e l ,
there is a t h i n core t h a t is u n d e r e x t r e m e
t e n s i o n . T h i s is similar to t h e t h i n sticks t h a t
keep t h e scarecrow upright. T h e s e deep sup-
p o r t s i n t h e l i v i n g b o d y are s o h a r d t h e y
a l m o s t s e e m like s t e e l . Yet t h e y , t o o , h a v e
t h e i r origin in t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue sleeve
between and surrounding the bones, tendons,
and muscles.
Instead of a static image of bodies, we
w o u l d like t o o f f e r a d i f f e r e n t c o n c e p t . B o d i e s
a r e n e v e r c o m p l e t e l y still. W h e n w e are q u i e t ,
t h e fine m o v e m e n t s of breathing and balanc-
i n g a r e r e v e r b e r a t i n g f r o m h e e l b o n e t o skull.
At a level b e l o w c o n s c i o u s awareness, there
i s t h e c o n s t a n t v i b r a t i o n o f tissue t h a t i s i n
tone, ready to move.
I n t h i s s e n s e , t h e b o d y i s m u c h like a car
t h a t i s n o t t u r n e d off. W h e n i t i s n o t m o v i n g ,
it is i d l i n g . Its m o v e m e n t is m e r e l y a s h i f t i n g
i n t o gear. W e m a y t h i n k t h a t i n o r d e r t o m o v e
we h a v e to pull ourselves o u t of a deep i m m o -
bility a n d inertia, b u t this is n o t t h e case. We
can be aware of our constant m o v e m e n t and
vibration. We c a n be aware t h a t gesture a n d
a c t i v i t y are a s h i f t o f gear. T h e y a r e c h a n g e s
in the intensity and direction of movement,
b u t n o t a c h a n g e in state.
O n e expression of this attitude is in the
old song, "I w a n t to dance with a dolly with
a h o l e in her stocking while her knees keep
a-knocking a n d her toes keep a-rocking."
 PART FIVE

Practical Applications
TWENTY-THREE
Doing Bodywork Based on the Connective Tissue Concept
A s o u r i d e a s h a v e g a i n e d clarity, w e r e a l i z e
t h a t t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue c o n c e p t c a n b e o f
use i n a n y k i n d o f b o d y w o r k . I t i s n ' t p o s s i b l e
to provide a " r e c i p e " for work. W h a t we c a n
do in this section is o p e n a way of t h i n k i n g
a n d an a p p r o a c h to tissue. Ideally this will
lead t h e b o d y w o r k e r t o d e v e l o p a p p r o p r i a t e
strategies f o r c o n d i t i o n s a s t h e y a r i s e .
This section is divided i n t o several
s u b s e c t i o n s : e v a l u a t i o n , first i n t e r v e n t i o n ,
h o w t o g o deeper, h o w t o t o u c h , a n d h o w
t o m a k e c h a n g e s last. W e h a v e t a k e n specific
c o n d i t i o n s as e x a m p l e s for t h e sake of
demonstration.
Evaluation—
Example: knee pain
Evaluation c a n be visual, t h r o u g h palpation,
or by observing m o v e m e n t . It is n o t necessary
to do an exhaustive evaluation but rather to
f i n d a p l a c e t o start. T h e c o n c e p t s u n d e r l y i n g
e v a l u a t i o n are c o n t o u r , s y m m e t r y , a n d p r o -
portion. In practical terms, this m e a n s c o m -
p a r i n g b o t h k n e e s f r o m t h e f r o n t , sides, a n d
back. It also m e a n s considering t h e e x t e n s i o n
of t h e k n e e d o w n to t h e f o o t a n d at least as
far u p a s t h e h i p , i f n o t f a r t h e r . I t i s h e l p f u l
to consider the a n a t o m y involved. T h e knee
is composed of two bones—femur and tibia—
and two outriders—the fibula and t h e patella.
I t also h e l p f u l t o c o n s i d e r g r a v i t y / b o d y
weight. T h e knee is the interface between
the torso/hips and the ground. The hip and
the ankle can be considered upper and lower
extensions of the knee.
T h e a b o v e are e l e m e n t s o f p r a c t i t i o n e r
e v a l u a t i o n . Full i n i t i a l e v a l u a t i o n i s a c o m -
bination of these and the client's report.
Listening to the client and asking t h e right
questions at t h e outset are critical: E x a c t l y
where does it hurt; point with o n e finger.
D o e s t h e p a i n r a d i a t e ? Are t h e r e a s s o c i a t e d
pains in other b o d y parts? W h a t brings t h e
pain on? W h e n is it most intense? W h a t
makes it better? Was there an injury? Has
there b e e n a history of repeated injury? Is
the pain constant or intermittent?
From the point of view of immediate inter-
vention, probably the most important ques-
t i o n is, " H o w p a i n f u l i s i t r i g h t n o w ? " T h i s
will tell y o u w h e n a n d h o w to i n t e r v e n e . It is
your best b a r o m e t e r for assessing w h e n it m a y
be detrimental to do work. W h e n acute pain
is n o t a p r o b l e m , it is p r o b a b l y possible to
w o r k d i r e c t l y o n t h e a r e a (see s e c t i o n o n f i r s t
intervention).
O f t e n k n e e p a i n arises o n l y w i t h m o v e -
m e n t . Cautious m o v e m e n t is a part of evalu-
ation. W h a t can the knee do with comfort?
W h a t m o v e m e n t creates t h e p a i n ? C l i e n t fear
a n d a p p r e h e n s i o n are a n i n e v i t a b l e part o f
acute pain. Ideally this c a n be allayed to get
a clearer picture of t h e actual tissue p r o b l e m s .
Reassurance that pain is not the same as dam-
age s h o u l d h e l p . O b v i o u s l y it will be n e c e s -
s a r y t o b e g e n t l e a n d slow. Y o u r a i m i s t o f i n d
out what the knee can do and exactly w h e n
a n d w h e r e p a i n starts.
At this point, anatomical information is
essential to good visualization of t h e prob-
l e m s i n v o l v e d . For clarity we are u s i n g m u s c l e
n o m e n c l a t u r e ; we are actually referring to
local t e n s i o n s in t h e c o n n e c t i v e tissue b e d
(Fig. 23-1).
T h e tibia is suspended by t h e h a m s t r i n g s
posteriorly and by the quadriceps anteriorly.
M e d i a l l y a n d laterally, t h e r e is t h e a d d u c t o r
group a n d t h e ilio-tibial b a n d , respectively.
T h e interface b e t w e e n t h e tibia a n d fibula c a n
be locked down by the popliteus behind the
120 T H E E N D L E S S W E B
knee. Thus this very small muscle controls
the interosseus m e m b r a n e between these
t w o b o n e s . Tibial rotation is manifest at t h e
ankles. T h e degree of tension in t h e Achilles
t e n d o n is an i n d e x of severity of rotation
between t h e tibia a n d calcaneus.
Evaluation is a s e q u e n c e f r o m visualization
to m o v e m e n t to evaluation by touch. As we
m o v e t h e part, w e are starting t o evaluate b y
touch. It is almost impossible to know w h e n
evaluative touch ends and treatment touch
starts. If t h e p a i n is acute, it is p o t e n t i a l l y
hazardous to treat t h e acutely painful area
directly. It s h o u l d be possible to ease t h e pain
with educated intervention above and below.
Your knowledge of a n a t o m y a n d y o u r careful
e v a l u a t i o n will t e l l y o u w h e r e t o s t a r t . S o m e -
t i m e s i t i s h e l p f u l t o w o r k f a i r l y far a f i e l d i n
o t h e r parts o f t h e b o d y — a s s o c i a t e d areas o f
reported p a i n or p r o b a b l e areas of dysfunc-
t i o n (see list i n H o w t o M a k e I t Last s e c t i o n ,
p. 126). Before we go m o r e extensively into
first i n t e r v e n t i o n , w e n e e d t o a d d a f e w c o m -
ments on treatment of acute knee problems.
E v e n t u a l l y i t will b e p o s s i b l e t o g e n t l y start
t o work o n t h e fascial wrapping o f t h e k n e e
itself. A s i m p l e w a y t o d o t h i s i s t o r e s t r a i n
Figure 23-1
Superficial muscles of the thigh.
t h e k n e e tissue against ever-greater k n e e flex-
ion a n d e x t e n s i o n . This allows t h e client to
feel safe b e c a u s e h e / s h e c a n c o n t r o l t h e
degree of m o v e m e n t .
It should be r e m e m b e r e d that o n e cause
of i n t e r m i t t e n t acute pain in t h e knee is a
m e n i s c a l tear. T h i s i s n o t a n a b s o l u t e c o n t r a -
indication to work; cautious easing of the
j o i n t will b e h e l p f u l . U l t i m a t e l y , h o w e v e r ,
t h e r e m a y h a v e t o b e surgery. A n a b s o l u t e
contraindication to manipulation of the knee
(except by an expert) is a tear in o n e of the
c r u c i a t e l i g a m e n t s . S u c h a t e a r m a y b e felt a s
hypermobility of the knee in the anterior-
posterior direction and is obvious with even
s l i g h t m o v e m e n t . A f r a c t u r e is, a g a i n , a n
absolute contraindication to bodywork except
in t h e h a n d s of an expert. If t h e client is able
to walk i n t o your office w i t h o u t crutches, it is
unlikely that either of these two catastrophes
has occurred.
First Intervention—
Example: chronic neck ache
S o m e practitioners are m o r e e x p e r i e n c e d with
visual evaluation a n d s o m e with palpation.
Furthermore, o n e of the oddities of bodywork
tends to be that the more experienced the
p r a c t i t i o n e r , t h e less e x t e n s i v e t h e e v a l u a t i o n .
In part, this is because bodyworkers c o n t i n u -
ally evaluate as t h e y work. Evaluation is n o t
an endpoint, it is an o n g o i n g process.
I t i s i m p o r t a n t t o start w o r k w i t h t h e m o s t
s u p e r f i c i a l layers o f t i s s u e . W o r k i n g superfi-
c i a l l y u s u a l l y will a l l o w d e e p e r tissue p r o b -
l e m s t o e m e r g e t h a t w e r e n o t a p p a r e n t a t first.
T h e client will o f t e n report t h a t t h e nature or
l o c a t i o n (or b o t h ) o f t h e p a i n h a s c h a n g e d
a n d h e / s h e c a n o f t e n b e m o r e specific about
t h e pain. This is to be expected as a n o r m a l
p a r t o f p r a c t i c e . Early i n p r a c t i c e , i t c a n b e
confusing a n d h u m b l i n g w h e n this happens.
G o i n g t o o d e e p t o o fast will a l m o s t a l w a y s
create unnecessary problems and usually
creates m o r e pain.
 DOING BODYWORK BASED ON THE
W h a t does it m e a n to w o r k on a superficial
layer o f t i s s u e ? H o w i s t h i s d o n e ? E a s i l y t h e
m o s t i m p o r t a n t m a n e u v e r is to go i n t o tissue
a t a n a n g l e . G o i n g s t r a i g h t i n a l l o w s t h e tis-
sue n o e s c a p e , n o m o v e m e n t ; t h e t i s s u e i s
trapped. G o i n g straight in also often causes
bruising. In practical terms, this m e a n s that
tissue i s m o v e d i n a d i r e c t i o n , t o w a r d a n
intended endpoint. O n c e again, a knowledge
of a n a t o m y is essential.
In the neck and shoulder assembly, t h e
m o s t superficial m u s c l e i s t h e t r a p e z i u s . I t
fans out from t h e occiput, t h e cervical verte-
brae, and the upper thoracic vertebrae, across
the shoulder blades to the collarbones a n d
the acromion. The sternocleidomastoid mus-
c l e i s a fairly s u p e r f i c i a l r o p e f r o m t h e m a s t o i d
process to t h e sternum and t h e clavicle. Poste-
riorly a n d d e e p e r , t h e l e v a t o r s c a p u l a e sus-
pends the shoulder blade from t h e cervical
vertebrae. At a similar d e p t h , t h e scalenes
s u s p e n d t h e ribs f r o m t h e c e r v i c a l v e r t e b r a e
(Fig 23-2).
E v e n t h i s p a r t i a l list o f t h e m u s c l e s i n -
volved in chronic neck ache makes it obvious
t h a t t h e associated fascia is a w e b ; t h e m u s c l e s
a r e n o t l a y e r e d like a c a k e , b u t i n t e r w o v e n
like a m e s h . A r e a s o n a b l e w o r k i n g k n o w l e d g e
o f l o c a l a n a t o m y gives a n u n d e r s t a n d i n g o f
Figure 2 3 - 2
Fascial tensions in the neck and back.
CONNECTIVE TISSUE CONCEPT 121
t h e tissue "layers" a n d direction of fascial
fibers. As y o u work, t h e fiber d i r e c t i o n u n d e r
y o u r h a n d s will tell y o u w h a t level o f tissue
i n t h e b o d y y o u are w o r k i n g o n . T h e r e c a n b e
times w h e r e n o d o m i n a n t tissue directionality
is apparent; this is c o m m o n in the most
superficial s u b c u t a n e o u s layers.
I d a R o l f w a s w o n t t o say, " I f t h e t i s s u e
doesn't m o v e w h e n you go in o n e direction,
try g o i n g in t h e o t h e r d i r e c t i o n . " T h i s is a rule
of t h u m b t h a t has stood us in g o o d stead for
m a n y years. It should be pointed out that
f a s c i a l fibers d o n o t n e c e s s a r i l y f o l l o w t h e
e x a c t p a t h o f t h e associated m u s c l e fibers.
F a s c i a l fibers r e s p o n d t o t h e d i r e c t i o n a l p u l l s
e x e r t e d o n t h e m ; m u s c l e fibers a r e o n e t y p e
of pull, b u t t h e r e are o t h e r s . For e x a m p l e , t h e
fascia superficial to t h e trapezius has m u l t i p l e
fine layers in m u l t i p l e directions. It is n o t
necessary or possible to organize each of these
fascial sheets. C r e a t i n g order in o n e t e n d s to
organize sheets above and below. Direction
of work m a y be toward a joint, away from a
joint, along the plane of the muscle, or even
across t h e m u s c l e fibers. W i t h a t t e n t i v e n e s s
a n d delicacy o f t o u c h , y o u r h a n d s will tell
y o u w h a t t o d o . W h a t y o u are h o p i n g t o
achieve, the feeling you want under your
h a n d s , is t h e feeling of elasticity.
122 T H E E N D L E S S W E B
The shoulder and neck assembly is one of
t h e m o r e c o m p l e x structures in t h e body. O n e
i m a g e t h a t gives an overview is t h a t tissue is
gathered up into the neck m u c h the way a
p l a s t i c b a g i s g a t h e r e d a t its c l o s u r e . I n t h i s
i m a g e , a n y t w i s t o n o n e p a r t o f t h e n e c k will
spread d o w n w a r d to t h e structures below.
T h e r e f o r e as t h e superficial layers of t h e n e c k
a r e e a s e d , t e n s i o n b e l o w a l s o starts t o e a s e .
B o n e s will shift their h o m e p o s i t i o n ; m u s c l e s
will shift their p l a n e o f a c t i o n . T h i s h a p p e n s
gradually, over t i m e . M u c h h a p p e n s b e t w e e n
b o d y w o r k sessions. C h a n g e s are subtle at first;
t h e y are c u m u l a t i v e a n d s o o n b e c o m e clearly
apparent.
At s o m e point going deeper b e c o m e s a
natural e x t e n s i o n of t h e work in progress.
O c c a s i o n a l l y this is a t h e r a p e u t i c decision,
m o r e often it is the obvious n e x t step. O n e
s i g n i s t h a t t h e t e n s i o n s start t o b e m o r e o b v i -
ously associated w i t h specific m u s c l e action.
Because the spasm in these muscles can be
so severe that acute pain is elicited with light
t o u c h , i t will n o w b e n e c e s s a r y t o e a s e t h e
tissue by w o r k i n g further afield. In n e c k pain,
w o r k i n g at t h e rotator cuff, t h e shoulder
joint, t h e back of t h e ulna just above t h e
e l b o w , o r t h e m a r g i n o f t h e o c c i p u t will b r i n g
relief.
T h e s e are n o t b y a n y m e a n s t h e deepest
layers. We are w o r k i n g our w a y gradually
t h r o u g h t h e layers over a n u m b e r of sessions
— t h r e e or four spaced a b o u t a week apart.
T h e client's report of pain and your hands'
report of tissue resistance will be y o u r guides
o n h o w fast t o p r o g r e s s . I t i s a l m o s t n e v e r
advisable to use force to go t h r o u g h pain or
t i s s u e r e s i s t a n c e . T h i s b r i n g s u s t o t h e diffi-
cult-to-describe, intangible concept of inten-
tion. Intention has to do with how deep your
h a n d s g o , h o w d e e p y o u r f o c u s is, h o w d e e p
y o u w a n t to get w i t h a given m a n e u v e r . It is
hard to believe t h a t i n t e n t i o n is a m a j o r fac-
tor; it is even harder to believe that there is
any such thing as intention.
O u r struggle in this b o o k has b e e n to put
into words what is so obviously happening
under our hands. We find it impossible to
give a verbal description of i n t e n t i o n . T h e
concept is often apparent when watching
a n o t h e r bodyworker. It c a n be a useful ques-
t i o n w h e n t h e progress of work is stalled. A
c h a n g e i n i n t e n t i o n o r g o a l c a n r e s t o r e flow.
W h a t t o d o w h e n a n area i s t o u c h y o r t i c k -
lish? W e h a v e f o u n d t h a t t h e tissue deep t o
a t i c k l i s h s p o t is i n v a r i a b l y e x c e s s i v e l y t i g h t .
Even t h o u g h ticklishness has a "don't t o u c h "
a s p e c t to it, it is a s i g n a l t h a t b o d y w o r k n e e d s
to be d o n e . A light t o u c h is generally n o t
h e l p f u l . E a s i n g a r o u n d t h e area c a n b e u s e f u l .
O n e m a n e u v e r t h a t c a n w o r k i s t o m a k e use
of t h e body's neural wiring. Light t o u c h and
d e e p t o u c h a r e m e d i a t e d b y t w o d i f f e r e n t sets
of nerve endings. It is possible to place the
w h o l e h a n d f i r m l y o v e r t h e s e n s i t i v e area
while working more deeply with the other
hand underneath the covering hand.
W i t h deeper work there is always t h e
potential of discomfort while working. Some
c l i e n t s a r e a b l e t o feel t h r o u g h t h i s m o m e n -
tary d i s c o m f o r t to t h e relief t h a t is h a p p e n -
ing. Their usual c o m m e n t is that it is " g o o d
p a i n . " T h e r e are at least t w o c o m p o n e n t s to
t h e s e s e n s a t i o n s . T h e r e i s t h e tissue s e n s a t i o n ,
which can be warm or hot or burning. This
is akin to what happens w h e n you m o v e a
part t h a t has n o t m o v e d for a l o n g t i m e . It is
t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c f e e l i n g o f c o n n e c t i v e tissue
s t r e t c h i n g . A n o t h e r c o m p o n e n t o f tissue p a i n
is v e r y m u c h like a s t a r t l e r e s p o n s e ; it is m o r e
mental than physical.
B o t h a s p e c t s o f t i s s u e s e n s a t i o n will u s u a l l y
b e p r e s e n t , b u t o n e will b e m o r e p r o m i n e n t
t h a n t h e other. In either case, it is useful to
m a k e sure t h a t t h e client is n o t h o l d i n g his/
her breath. A l o n g slow e x h a l e is t h e best way
to ease t h e strain a n d allow t h e stretch. It is
also good to focus attention exactly where
t h e stretch is occurring a n d / o r to m o v e a
related b o d y part (wiggle t h e fingers). T h e r e
 DOING BODYWORK BASED ON THE CONNECTIVE TISSUE CONCEPT 123

are t h e o r e t i c a l r e a s o n s w h y t h e s e m a n e u v e r s T h e rotators of the hip attach to t h e ilium,

w o r k b u t it's p r o b a b l y e n o u g h s i m p l y t o k n o w i s c h i u m , o r s a c r u m . A l t h o u g h t h e y are s m a l l ,
that they do work. t h e y are short a n d deep; t h e y powerfully
To finish up t r e a t m e n t of n e c k pain, the i n f l u e n c e t h e basic structure of t h e pelvis
deepest structures u n d e r t e n s i o n will be t h e w h e n t h e y are i n s p a s m . T h e y a r e a m a j o r
levator scapulae a n d t h e layers of t h e cervical factor in sciatic pain. T h e y c a n be readily
muscles closest to t h e vertebrae. T h e small influenced by wedging the space b e h i n d the
transverse muscles at t h e atlanto-occipital g r e a t e r t r o c h a n t e r a n d a s k i n g f o r s t r a i g h t leg
junction can be so contracted as to be barely external rotation (Fig. 23-3).
p a l p a b l e . W o r k i n g i n layers t o e a s e t h e s e i s T h e ischial tuberosity is the b o t t o m m o s t
the answer. I n addition, t w o m o v e m e n t m a - edge of t h e hip assembly; it provides an end-
n e u v e r s will b e h e l p f u l : a s m a l l c h i n t h r u s t p o i n t for t h e t e n d o n s of t h e h a m s t r i n g s .
(like a n o d ) a n d t u r n i n g t h e h e a d . W h e n W h e n t h e h a m s t r i n g s are tight, t h e y pull
turning the head, the m o v e m e n t is initiated d o w n w a r d on t h e i s c h i u m . As a result, t h e
f r o m t h e a n g l e o f t h e j a w j u s t b e l o w t h e ear, sacrum is overworked with any m o v e m e n t .
w h i c h is a way of creating precise m o v e m e n t Release m u s t necessarily i n c l u d e work to
b e t w e e n t h e atlas a n d axis. release t h e h a m s t r i n g s .
H o w to k n o w where to start? Observing
How to Go Deeper— n o r m a l m o v e m e n t is usually helpful—walk-
Example: chronic sciatica i n g , s i t t i n g , s t a n d i n g . O n e o f I d a R o l f ' s first
A t t h e d e e p e r level, a n a t o m i c a l k n o w l e d g e i s principles was "take t h e part to n o r m a l a n d
e s s e n t i a l t o a c c u r a c y . S c i a t i c p a i n arises f r o m m a k e it m o v e . " We w a n t to evaluate t h e bal-
t e n s i o n o n t h e s c i a t i c n e r v e , u s u a l l y a t its anced m o v e m e n t of the j o i n t — t h e initial
outlet, w h i c h is variably located near the mid- m o v e m e n t f r o m a n ideal h o m e p o s i t i o n . For
dle o f t h e s a c r o i l i a c j u n c t i o n . S c i a t i c p a i n i s t e s t i n g p u r p o s e s o n l y , i n t h e h i p a n d leg, t h e
most c o m m o n l y a radiating pain, extending
t o t h e t h i g h , leg, o r f o o t , d e p e n d i n g o n t h e
p o r t i o n o f t h e n e r v e t h a t i s i m p i n g e d . Piri-
formis pain, on t h e other h a n d , is local to the
hip, does n o t radiate, a n d c a n be elicited by
p u l l i n g t h e b e n t k n e e a c r o s s t h e b o d y . I n piri-
formis pain, it is usually possible to palpate
the taut rope of the muscle t h r o u g h the over-
lying gluteus m a x i m u s . T h e piriformis runs
from t h e inside of t h e lower tip of t h e sacrum
to t h e greater t r o c h a n t e r of t h e femur.
T h e relationship of the piriformis to the
sciatic nerve is variable. Piriformis t e n s i o n
can contribute to sciatic nerve pain. T h e
nerve is not entrapped by b o n e but by the
ligamentous bindings of the sacroiliac junc-
t i o n . A s t h e tissue layers o f t h e h i p a s s e m b l y
start t o r e l e a s e , t h e l o c a t i o n o f t h e s c i a t i c p a i n
a n d its r a d i a t i o n o f t e n c h a n g e s . T h i s i s i n f a c t
Figure 23-3
a sign t h a t w o r k h a s b e e n e f f e c t i v e .
Rotators of the hip.
124 T H E E N D L E S S W E B
ideal s t a n d i n g position is as follows: feet
together, ankles touching, heels about an
i n c h apart. In this position, a shallow knee
b e n d will graphically reveal t e n s i o n s i n t h e
sacrum and groin. In the knee bend, the knee
should c o m e straight forward over the second
toe; the b a c k is kept straight. A s e c o n d m o v e -
m e n t , leaning over to t o u c h the toes, shows
t h e ability of t h e hamstrings to l e n g t h e n a n d
the ischial tuberosities to appropriately
widen.
T h r e e m a i n strategies interact in this deep
level of work; traction, tissue stretching, a n d
client m o v e m e n t . Traction c a n be passive or
active on t h e client's part. Active traction
involves stretching to t h e limit of t h e gesture.
For e x a m p l e , a h e e l stretch activates t h e
Achilles t e n d o n , t h e back of the knees, t h e
hamstrings, a n d up into the ischial tuberosity.
This can be combined with other movements,
e.g. h e e l s t r e t c h w i t h h i p r o t a t i o n o r l e g lift.
M o v e m e n t s s h o u l d b e guided for p r e c i s i o n t o
give m a x i m u m assistance to tissue stretching.
A guiding principle in soft tissue w o r k is
" w h a t ' s d o n e i s d o n e . " Dr. R o l f u s e d t o say, " I f
a t first y o u d o n ' t s u c c e e d , g e t t h e h e l l o u t . " A
m o r e long-winded way of saying the same
t h i n g is t h a t w h e n tissue in an area w o n ' t
s t r e t c h , it's b e c a u s e it's n o t r e a d y t o s t r e t c h .
W o r k i n a n o t h e r a r e a h a s t o h a p p e n first.
T h e art o f a b o d y w o r k e r i s k n o w i n g w h e r e
to work n e x t . Partly this is a m a t t e r of experi-
e n c e . W o r k c a n proceed contiguously: sacroil-
iac j u n c t i o n — l u m b a r area—lower ribs. W o r k
c a n m o v e t o t h e o t h e r side o f t h e j o i n t . O n e
non-obvious sequence involves looking at the
c o u n t e r b a l a n c i n g structure. In t h e case of t h e
hip, this would be t h e spine a n d t h e bridge
would be the psoas. Just as the position of the
f o o t (by w a y o f t h e leg) fixes t h e a n g l e o f t h e
pelvis f r o m below, so does t h e position of t h e
s p i n e fix t h e p e l v i s f r o m a b o v e . T h e h o l d i n g
pattern can originate in the lumbar spine, at
t h e d o r s a l h i n g e , o r e v e n t h e o c c i p u t . (As w e
have explained in t h e text, t h e dorsal h i n g e
is a variable m i d - b a c k l o c a t i o n where shoul-
der m o v e m e n t a n d b o d y support intermesh.)
T h e g r o i n a n d p a r t i c u l a r l y t h e i n g u i n a l liga-
m e n t are anterior aspects of sciatic pain.
W h e n t h e r e are true physical deficits such
as a s c o l i o s i s or a m i s s i n g p o r t i o n of a v e r t e -
bra, t h e r e will b e a n o n g o i n g n e e d for b o d y -
w o r k . T h i s d o e s n o t m e a n a n o f f i c e visit o n c e
a week or even o n c e a m o n t h . It can m e a n
a b a t c h of work every couple of years. T h e
client is the best judge of what he/she needs.
U n d e r stress, w h e t h e r t r a u m a t i c o r r e p e t i t i v e ,
t h e b o d y will t e n d t o return t o pattern. This
d o e s n o t m e a n t h a t earlier b o d y w o r k w a s n o t
effective. Generally speaking, renewed work
w i l l b e easier, less u n c o m f o r t a b l e , a n d p r o g -
ress w i l l b e faster.
How to Touch—
Example: carpal tunnel syndrome
In this s e c t i o n we are b r i n g i n g t o g e t h e r points
about t o u c h from prior sections.
(A) C o n s i d e r t h e o r i g i n o f t h e p r o b l e m —
accident, repeated injury, or repetitive use
u n d e r stress. C a r p a l t u n n e l s y n d r o m e i s a
c l a s s i c e x a m p l e o f r e p e t i t i v e u s e u n d e r stress.
A m o s t c o m m o n v e r s i o n arises f r o m c o m p u -
ter use. T h e gesture includes tensely staring
at a small (usually t o o low) screen while over-
focusing t h e eyes a n d thrusting t h e head
f o r w a r d . T h i s sets u p a n i m b a l a n c e a t t h e
s h o u l d e r — t h e s c a p u l a rides u p , t h e c l a v i c l e
a n d a c r o m i o n are elevated, a n d t h e a r m has
l o s t its b a s e o f s u p p o r t . E v e n i f t h e s c r e e n i s
n o t t o o low a n d t h e keyboard position is ade-
quate, prolonged eye tension a n d head thrust
c r e a t e a p r o b l e m . T e n s i o n a n d o v e r u s e are
t h e culprits here. From this brief analysis it
is obvious that there cannot be m u c h help
for carpal t u n n e l s y n d r o m e w i t h o u t work
o n t h e shoulder, n e c k , a n d occipital ridge.
(B) A c u t e s p a s m is a s i g n a l f o r c a u t i o n .
W o r k c a n b e g i n o n t h e s u p e r f i c i a l layers o r
o n s u r r o u n d i n g a r e a s . T h e i d e a i s t o give t h e
tissue u n d e r s p a s m relief before w o r k i n g on
 DOING BODYWORK BASED ON THE
i t directly. I n a c u t e c a r p a l t u n n e l p a i n , i t i s
helpful to reduce tension in the interosseus
m e m b r a n e o f t h e f o r e a r m a n d t o r e s t o r e free
rotation b e t w e e n t h e radius a n d u l n a at t h e
elbow. Almost always, there is a lock on
m o v e m e n t of t h e u l n a because of tissue
tightness at the back of the elbow. Restoring
e l a s t i c i t y h e r e will start t o e a s e t h e a c u t e p a i n
a t t h e wrist.
(C) " R e s i s t i v e m o v e m e n t " i s o u r p h r a s e f o r
t h e m a n e u v e r of w e d g i n g a tissue space o p e n
while t h e client m o v e s . In carpal t u n n e l syn-
drome, this is particularly useful in o p e n i n g
t h e spaces b e t w e e n t h e small b o n e s at t h e
base of t h e h a n d . O n e specific e x a m p l e of a
small muscle that seems to get particularly
tight is the opponens, w h i c h adducts the
t h u m b across t h e p a l m . W e d g i n g at t h e
base of the t h u m b while asking t h e client
to adduct t h e t h u m b will e v e n t u a l l y release
t h i s a r e a . W e d g i n g o n t h e o p p o s i t e side o f
the h a n d ( h y p o t h e n a r space) produces further
opening. Although the hypothenar move-
m e n t is s u b t l e , t h e r e is a g e s t u r e like g r a s p i n g
with t h e base o f t h e h a n d t h a t will h e l p this
opening.
(D) G e t t i n g t h e feel o f t i s s u e i s a n o n g o i n g
study for a bodyworker. T h e u l t i m a t e goal is
to m o v e t h e fascial s h e a t h s in s u c h a w a y as
t o r e s t o r e e l a s t i c i t y . S o m e c u e s : Lift t h e t i s s u e ,
t r y n o t t o c o m p r e s s it. B e sure t h a t y o u a r e
taking t h e tissue in a direction rather t h a n
compressing it to the bone. Be attentive to
a n a t o m y ; fiber d i r e c t i o n w i l l o f t e n i n f o r m
y o u a b o u t t h e d e p t h of tissue y o u are influ-
encing. Try n o t t o overwork tissue; w h e n n e w
s t r e t c h h a s b e e n a c h i e v e d , l e t t h e t i s s u e rest
and integrate. K n o w t h a t a tense surface layer
will u s u a l l y h a v e f a s c i a l fibers g o i n g i n m a n y
directions.
(E) A s p e c i a l a p p r o a c h to t i s s u e i n v o l v e s
going across t h e direction of tissue fibers. T h i s
is not a c o m m o n maneuver; it c a n be very
helpful in the right place. In carpal t u n n e l
syndrome, the retinaculum, a thin binding
CONNECTIVE TISSUE CONCEPT 125
s h e a t h a r o u n d t h e wrist, responds well to this
a p p r o a c h . It is also useful w h e r e tissue is very
tight but n o t in s p a s m — b e h i n d the elbow, on
t h e a r m just b e l o w t h e shoulder j o i n t (junc-
t i o n of t h e trapezius a n d deltoid), a n d just
above and below the spine of the shoulder
blade. Care must be taken that there is good
support under a structure being worked in
this way.
(F) O n e o f t h e m o r e s u b t l e a s p e c t s o f b o d y -
work is recognizing a n d asking for appropriate
m o v e m e n t . Most kinesiology texts describe
range of m o t i o n ; this is n o t exactly what we
are l o o k i n g for. W e w a n t t o d e f i n e a n d u s e t h e
initial gesture f r o m t h e " h o m e " p o s i t i o n . For
example, the h o m e position of the elbow
while lying on the back is pointing away from
t h e trunk. This is n o t the " a n a t o m i c a l posi-
t i o n " described in texts. Normal m o v e m e n t
h e r e i n o u r t e r m s i s t h e a b i l i t y t o slide t h e
elbow away from the body and back without
twisting at t h e elbow or elevating t h e shoulder.*
W h e n lying o n t h e back, t h e h o m e posi-
t i o n o f t h e s c a p u l a i s flat a g a i n s t t h e ribs, p a r t
way down the back. In normal movement,
t h e s c a p u l a d o e s n o t rise w i t h m o v e m e n t o f
t h e a r m . In fact, it drops slightly as a c o u n -
terweight as t h e a r m is raised. W h e n lying
o n t h e back, t h e h o m e p o s i t i o n o f t h e wrist
a l l o w s t h e p a l m t o rest flat w i t h e l b o w p o i n t -
ing away from t h e trunk. W h e n raising t h e
hand,it should be possible to l e n g t h e n
t h r o u g h t h e p a l m b y first r a i s i n g t h e f i n g e r s
a n d t h e n r a i s i n g t h e rest o f t h e p a l m i n s e c -
t i o n s (Fig. 23-4). F l e x i o n is t h e s a m e r o l l i n g
gesture in reverse.
(G) U s i n g m o v e m e n t allows freeing o f t h e
structure at a level u n a t t a i n a b l e w i t h t h e use
of m a n i p u l a t i o n alone. However, this must
be precise, educated m o v e m e n t , as we have
described above in the case of the arm. It is
*For an excellent exposition of this c o n c e p t , see Ida P.
Rolf, Confinia Psychiatrica, Vol. 16, pp. 7 7 - 7 8 , 1 9 7 3 . Avail-
able from t h e Rolf Institute, B o x 1 8 6 8 , Boulder, Colorado
80306.
126 THE ENDLESS WEB
Figure 2 3 - 4
Wedging the muscles of the forearm in combina-
tion with m o v e m e n t of the hand.
generally n o t possible to use m o v e m e n t early
in m a n i p u l a t i o n because the structure is too
compressed to get accurate m o v e m e n t . There
are e x c e p t i o n s , o f course. W i t h s o m e m a n u a l
assist, c o r r e c t m o v e m e n t m a y b e p o s s i b l e
early o n .
How to Make It Last
The element of time is important in body-
work. We have talked about n o t diving in
before t h e structure is ready to o p e n , of pre-
paring t h e way. A n o t h e r aspect of t i m i n g is
t h e integration t h a t h a p p e n s b e t w e e n sessions
a n d after a group of sessions. This is an e x a m -
ple of latency in t h e learning process. It is just
as necessary to allow t i m e for integration
b e t w e e n work as it is to do t h e work.
Client education is an essential part of
bodywork. Ideally this has b e e n h a p p e n i n g
in an o n g o i n g way t h r o u g h o u t t h e sessions.
A p r i m a r y goal of such e d u c a t i o n is refining
the ability to sense physical change. There
will be c h a n g e s in stance, shoulder height,
position of the a r m — t h e best time to notice
these is w h e n the change is new. T h e m i n d
learns best by comparing sensation; w h e n
c h a n g e is recent, the comparison is most
vivid.
Too m u c h information can be overwhelm-
ing. A glut of n e w b o d y sensations is merely
confusing. Keep in m i n d that in t h e period
just following bodywork, b o d y a n d m i n d
are in a fluid state. O n e or at m o s t t w o n e w
t h i n g s t o f o c u s o n i s all t h a t c a n r e a s o n a b l y
be incorporated.
O n e of t h e client questions that bedevils
t h e b o d y w o r k e r is " A m I d o i n g it r i g h t ? " Am I
walking right, b r e a t h i n g right, sleeping right?
T h e o n l y w a y o u t o f t h i s d i l e m m a o f "Tight-
n e s s " is to h e l p increase client sensitivity.
T h e feel o f t h e b o d y i s t h e b e s t g u i d e . A n ide-
alized " c o r r e c t " p o s i t i o n has to be gradually
a p p r o a c h e d . For e x a m p l e , in a client w h o is
pigeon-toed, forcing a straight-ahead foot
position before the knees a n d especially the
hips can a c c o m m o d a t e the n e w position is
d a m a g i n g to t h e structure as well as confusing
to the client.
We have alluded to t h e n e e d for work on
compensating patterns. Knowing where that
c o m p e n s a t i o n is likely to be is o f t e n a m a t t e r
o f e x p e r i e n c e . W e list a f e w b e l o w t h a t h a v e
b e e n useful to us:
carpal t u n n e l neck and shoulder
sprained ankle t w e l f t h rib
sciatic pain l u m b a r vertebrae, dorsal
hinge, atlanto-occipital
j u n c t i o n , s h o r t leg,
groin, a n d psoas
knee pain hip; sometimes ankle
shoulder bursitis ribs a n d d i a p h r a g m ;
little finger
tennis elbow wrist
A s Dr. R o l f o f t e n said, " W h e r e y o u t h i n k i t
is, i t a i n ' t . " W e h a v e u s e d t h e c o n n e c t i v e tis-
sue c o n c e p t i n t h e c o n t e x t o f R o l f i n g a n d i t
has been valuable to us in opening up new
vistas. We h o p e t h a t it will e x p a n d y o u r hori-
z o n as well, no m a t t e r w h a t tradition of body-
work you practice.
Illustration Index
acromion 15-1, 17-2, 17-8.
adductor magnus m. 19-5.
atlanto-occipital junction 13-7.
amnion 2-1.
belly band/strap 12-2 A&B.
brachialis m. 4-2.
calcaneus 7-3.
cervico-dorsal junction 13-7.
cervical-thoracic junction 13-7.
chest band/strap 12-2 A&B.
chin band/strap 12-2 A&B, 14-5.
clavicle 14-5, 15-1, 17-8, 18-3.
collar band/strap 12-2 A&B, 14-5, 15-1.
coracobrachialis m. 8-3.
coracoid process 8-3, 15-1.
costal arch 13-1A, 15-3, 15-4, 15-6.
deltoid m. 17-2, 17-8, 17-11.
dorsal hinge 12-3B, 13-7.
ectoderm/ectodermal 2-1, 2-2, 2-3.
endoderm/endodermal 2-1, 2-2, 2-3.
erector spinae m. 10-2, 18-2, 21-2, 21-4, 2 1 - 6 .
external abdominal oblique m. 17-7, 19-7.
eye band/strap 12-2 A&B.
flexures (junctions of the spinal column) 13-7.
fontanelles 14-3.
gluteus maximus m. 10-2, 15-5, 17-5, 18-2, 19-1,
19-7, 21-2, 21-3.
gluteus medius m. 19-7.
gluteus minimus m. 19-7, 19-8.
gracilis m. 19-1, 19-5, 19-6.
groin band/strap 12-2 A&B, 15-4, 15-5, 15-6.
hyoid b. 14-5, 15-1.
iliacus m. 19-4, 19-10.
iliotibial tract 5-2, 17-5, 18-2, 19-1, 19-6, 21-2,
21-3.
inguinal band/strap 12-2 A&B, 13-1A, 13-1B, 15-4.
inguinal ligament 5-2, 13-1A, 13-1B, 13-6, 15-6.
ischial tuberosity 18-3.
junctions of the spinal column 13-7.
latissimus dorsi m. 8-8, 12-3B, 17-1, 17-2, 17-11,
21-2, 2 1 - 3 .
levator scapulae m. 8-8, 17-6.
ligamentum nuchae 18-7.
lumbo-dorsal junction 13-7.
lumbo-sacral junction 13-7.
mediastinum 18-3.
mesoderm/mesodermal 2-1, 2-2.
midchest band/strap 12-2 A&B, 12-3 A.
notochord 2-1, 2-2, 2-3.
obturator internus m. 15-7, 19-4, 19-8, 19-10.
pectoralis major m. 12-3A, 12-3B, 17-1, 17-11.
pectoralis minor m. 8-3.
pelvic diaphragm 15-7, 18-3, 2 0 - 3 .
perichondrium 7-2.
periosteum 4-2, 7-2.
piriformis m. 19-4, 19-8.
primitive streak 2-1, 2-3.
psoas m. 10-5, 10-6A, 19-2, 19-3, 19-4, 20-3,
21-4, 2 1 - 5 .
pubic band/strap 12-2 A&B.
quadratus lumborum m. 21-4, 2 1 - 6 .
rectus abdominis m. 5-2, 12-3A, 12-3B, 13-1A,
15-6, 2 0 - 3 .
sacro-coccygeal junction 13-7.
sacro-iliac junction 18-2.
sacrospinous ligament 19-4.
sartorius m. 5-2, 19-1, 19-6.
scalenus anterior m. 15-1, 18-3, 21-7.
scalenus medius m. 15-1, 18-3, 21-7.
scalenus posterior m. 21-7.
semispinalis capitis m. 18-7.
semispinalis cervicis m. 18-7.
semimembranosus m. 19-1.
semitendinosus m. 19-1.
serratus anterior m. 17-7.
sphenoid b. 14-4.
sternocleidomastoid m. 14-5, 17-1, 18-7.
supraspinatus m. 8-8, 17-6.
tensor fascia lata m. 17-5, 19-1.
trapezius m. 17-1, 17-2, 17-6, 17-8, 18-7, 2 1 - 3 .
umbilical band/strap 12-2 A&B, 15-2, 15-3.
urogenital diaphragm 15-7, 18-3, 19-5.
Subject Index
acromion 73, 86, 88, 92, 121, 124
adductor magnus m. 2 3 , 99, 101-102, 119
atlanto-occipital junction 68, 70, 123, 126
belly band/strap 74-75
calcaneus 115, 120
cervico-dorsal junction 29, 6 5 , 67
cervical-thoracic junction 73
chest band/strap 58-60, 62
chin band/strap 68, 70-71, 73, 74
Cohen, Bonnie Bainbridge 65, 66, 67
collar band/strap 73-74, 76
dorsal hinge 54, 57, 58, 67, 74, 92, 111, 124, 126
ectoderm/ectodermal 11
endoderm/endodermal 10, 11, 12
eye band/strap 67, 68-69, 74
fibrocartilage 25
flexures 16, 25, 67, 69
groin band/strap 62, 75-77, 102
inguinal band/strap 15, 61-65
LeBoyer, Frederick 21, 22
lumbo-dorsal junction 65, 67, 75
lumbo-sacral junction 65, 67
midchest band/strap 5 3 - 5 8 , 65
Odent, Michel 22
pelvic diaphragm 1 0 4 - 1 0 5 , 106, 107
piriformis m. 103, 123
primitive streak 6, 7, 8
proprioception 4 9 - 5 0 , 8 3 - 8 4
psoas m. 4 2 - 4 3 , 63, 1 0 0 - 1 0 1 , 107, 111, 113, 124,
125
pubic band/strap 62, 75-77, 102
Reich, Wilhelm 44
Rolf, Ida P. vii, ix, 2, 15, 27, 28, 36, 38, 4 3 , 6 5 , 100,
113, 115, 116, 121, 123, 124, 126, 131
sacro-coccygeal junction 6 5 , 67, 75
sacro-iliac junction 34, 77, 98, 123, 124
sphenoid b. 67, 68, 6 9 - 7 0
Sutherland, W.G. 69, 70
tendon/ligament formation 3, 5, 13, 14, 15, 4 3 , 44,
53, 57, 58, 73, 76, 77, 8 5 , 87, 9 5 , 97, 99, 101,
103, 116, 123
umbilical band/strap 74-75
urogenital diaphragm 76, 105, 106
About the Authors

R. Louis Schultz, Ph.D., trained as a Rolfer in 1 9 7 3 . T h e following year he

established t h e a n a t o m y program for t h e Rolf Institute a n d b e c a m e a Struc-
t u r a l P a t t e r n e r (later c a l l e d R o l f i n g M o v e m e n t T e a c h e r ) . H e h a s p r e s e n t e d
w o r k s h o p s for Rolfers in m a n y states in t h e U n i t e d States as well as in Ger-
m a n y , Italy, E n g l a n d , Brazil, a n d A u s t r a l i a . I n 1 9 7 2 , Dr. S c h u l t z r e t i r e d f r o m
the University of Colorado School of Medicine and Dentistry, where his final
position was Professor a n d C h a i r m a n o f t h e D e p a r t m e n t o f H u m a n Biology.
He is t h e author of over forty scientific publications. He received his Ph.D. in
physiology from the University of Wisconsin in 1 9 5 5 ; currently he practices
R o l f i n g i n N e w York C i t y .

R o s e m a r y Feitis, D . O . , a t t e n d e d B a r n a r d C o l l e g e a n d t h e U n i v e r s i t y o f C a l i -
f o r n i a a t B e r k e l e y . S h e i n i t i a l l y w o r k e d w i t h Dr. R o l f o n t h e b o o k Rolfing a n d
eventually w e n t on to train as a Rolfer in 1 9 6 9 . She worked intensively w i t h
Dr. R o l f f o r a n u m b e r o f y e a r s , " k e e p i n g t h e i n f a n t R o l f i n g a l i v e , " a s Dr. R o l f
o n c e said, a s w e l l a s e x p l o r i n g s o m e o f t h e i n t e r e s t i n g b y w a y s o f t h e h u m a n
p o t e n t i a l m o v e m e n t . I n 1 9 7 8 , s e e i n g t h e n e e d f o r a less f o r m a l b o o k o n R o l f -
i n g , s h e e d i t e d Rolfing and Physical Reality, a c o l l e c t i o n of q u o t a t i o n s f r o m Dr.
Rolf's l e c t u r e s . S h e a n d L o u i s S c h u l t z are c o - e d i t o r s of Remembering Ida Rolf,
a c o l l e c t i o n o f s t o r i e s a b o u t t h e f o u n d e r o f R o l f i n g . Dr. Feitis r e c e i v e d h e r
degree in o s t e o p a t h y in 1 9 9 0 a n d currently practices Rolfing a n d h o m e o p a -
t h y in N e w York City.

D i a n a Salles e a r n e d h e r M a s t e r s D e g r e e i n M e d i c a l I l l u s t r a t i o n f r o m t h e U n i -
v e r s i t y o f M i c h i g a n . S h e i s c u r r e n t l y s e n i o r artist f o r t h e A m e r i c a n M u s e u m
of Natural History in N e w York City.

Ronald T h o m p s o n has b e e n a Rolfer for twenty-five years. Before t h a t he did

considerable work in underwater photography. He is currently a m e m b e r of
the a n a t o m y faculty and t h e Rolfing faculty of t h e Rolf Institute a n d prac-
tices Rolfing in T a m p a , Florida.